Scripture · Sanskrit Bible with the King James Version · the Pāli Canon

Chapters on Legal Topics 14 खन्धक 14

Chapter: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 131415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

1. Sammukhāvinaya

Pāli in Devanagari; under each word its Roman pronunciation, syllable by syllable (ṃ = nasal hum). Tap a Pāli word for its meaning (PTS Pāli-English Dictionary); tap again to open it in the Pāli dictionary.

Verse: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 1170 1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 1190 1191 1192 1193 1194 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 1326 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1434 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 · Hide pronunciation

1

थेरवादthe·ra·vā·da विनयपिटकvi·na·ya·pi·ṭa·ka

Theravāda Vinayapiṭaka

Theravāda Collection on Monastic Law
2

चूळवग्गcū·ḷa·vag·ga

Cūḷavagga

The Small Division
3

14। समथक्खन्धकsa·ma·thak·khan·dha·ka

14. Samathakkhandhaka

The chapter on the settling of legal issues
4

1। सम्मुखाविनयsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ya

1. Sammukhāvinaya

1. Resolution face-to-face
5

तेनte·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na बुद्धोbud·dho भगवाbha·ga·vā सावत्थियंsā·vat·thi·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti जेतवनेje·ta·va·ne अनाथपिण्डिकस्सa·nā·tha·piṇ·ḍi·kas·sa आरामे।ā·rā·me

Tena samayena buddho bhagavā sāvatthiyaṁ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.

At one time the Buddha was staying at Sāvatthī in the Jeta Grove, Anāthapiṇḍika’s Monastery.
6

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū असम्मुखीभूतानंa·sam·mu·khī·bhū·tā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ कम्मानिkam·mā·ni करोन्ति—ka·ron·ti

Tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū asammukhībhūtānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ kammāni karonti—

At that time the monks from the group of six did legal procedures—
7

तज्जनीयम्पि,taj·ja·nī·yam·pi नियस्सम्पि,ni·yas·sam·pi पब्बाजनीयम्पि,pab·bā·ja·nī·yam·pi पटिसारणीयम्पि,pa·ṭi·sā·ra·ṇī·yam·pi उक्खेपनीयम्पि।uk·khe·pa·nī·yam·pi

tajjanīyampi, niyassampi, pabbājanīyampi, paṭisāraṇīyampi, ukkhepanīyampi.

censure, demotion, banishment, reconciliation, and ejection—against monks who were absent.
8

येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पिच्छाap·pic·chā …पे…pe तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Ye te bhikkhū appicchā …pe… te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

The monks of few desires complained and criticized them,
9

“कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū असम्मुखीभूतानंa·sam·mu·khī·bhū·tā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ कम्मानिkam·mā·ni करिस्सन्ति—ka·ris·san·ti

“kathañhi nāma chabbaggiyā bhikkhū asammukhībhūtānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ kammāni karissanti—

“How can the monks from the group of six do this?”
10

तज्जनीयम्पि,taj·ja·nī·yam·pi नियस्सम्पि,ni·yas·sam·pi पब्बाजनीयम्पि,pab·bā·ja·nī·yam·pi पटिसारणीयम्पि,pa·ṭi·sā·ra·ṇī·yam·pi उक्खेपनीयम्पी”ति।uk·khe·pa·nī·yam·pī

tajjanīyampi, niyassampi, pabbājanīyampi, paṭisāraṇīyampi, ukkhepanīyampī”ti.

(Pāli only)
11

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुंā·ro·ce·suṃ …पे…pe

Atha kho te bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ …pe…

They told the Buddha. Soon afterwards he had the Sangha of monks gathered and questioned them:
12

“सच्चंsac·caṃ किर,ki·ra भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū असम्मुखीभूतानंa·sam·mu·khī·bhū·tā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ कम्मानिkam·mā·ni करोन्ति—ka·ron·ti

“saccaṁ kira, bhikkhave, chabbaggiyā bhikkhū asammukhībhūtānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ kammāni karonti—

“Is it true, monks, that the monks from the group of six are doing this?”
13

तज्जनीयम्पि,taj·ja·nī·yam·pi नियस्सम्पि,ni·yas·sam·pi पब्बाजनीयम्पि,pab·bā·ja·nī·yam·pi पटिसारणीयम्पि,pa·ṭi·sā·ra·ṇī·yam·pi उक्खेपनीयम्पी”ति?uk·khe·pa·nī·yam·pī

tajjanīyampi, niyassampi, pabbājanīyampi, paṭisāraṇīyampi, ukkhepanīyampī”ti?

(Pāli only)
14

“सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”ति।bha·ga·vā

“Saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti.

“It’s true, sir.”
15

विगरहिvi·ga·ra·hi बुद्धोbud·dho भगवा—bha·ga·vā

Vigarahi buddho bhagavā—

The Buddha rebuked them,
16

“अननुच्छविकं,a·na·nuc·cha·vi·kaṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तेसंte·saṃ मोघपुरिसानंmo·gha·pu·ri·sā·naṃ अननुलोमिकंa·na·nu·lo·mi·kaṃ अप्पतिरूपंap·pa·ti·rū·paṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अकप्पियंa·kap·pi·yaṃ अकरणीयं।a·ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ

“ananucchavikaṁ, bhikkhave, tesaṁ moghapurisānaṁ ananulomikaṁ appatirūpaṁ assāmaṇakaṁ akappiyaṁ akaraṇīyaṁ.

“It’s not suitable for those foolish men, it’s not proper, it’s not worthy of a monastic, it’s not allowable, it’s not to be done.
17

कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma ते,te भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मोघपुरिसाmo·gha·pu·ri·sā असम्मुखीभूतानंa·sam·mu·khī·bhū·tā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ कम्मानिkam·mā·ni करिस्सन्ति—ka·ris·san·ti

Kathañhi nāma te, bhikkhave, moghapurisā asammukhībhūtānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ kammāni karissanti—

How can they do this?
18

तज्जनीयम्पि,taj·ja·nī·yam·pi नियस्सम्पि,ni·yas·sam·pi पब्बाजनीयम्पि,pab·bā·ja·nī·yam·pi पटिसारणीयम्पि,pa·ṭi·sā·ra·ṇī·yam·pi उक्खेपनीयम्पि।uk·khe·pa·nī·yam·pi

tajjanīyampi, niyassampi, pabbājanīyampi, paṭisāraṇīyampi, ukkhepanīyampi.

(Pāli only)
19

नेतं,ne·taṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अप्पसन्नानंap·pa·san·nā·naṃ वाvā पसादायpa·sā·dā·ya …पे…pe

Netaṁ, bhikkhave, appasannānaṁ vā pasādāya …pe…

This will affect people’s confidence …”
20

विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā …पे…pe

vigarahitvā …pe…

After rebuking them …
21

धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
22

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve असम्मुखीभूतानंa·sam·mu·khī·bhū·tā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ कम्मंkam·maṃ कातब्बं—kā·tab·baṃ

“Na, bhikkhave, asammukhībhūtānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ kammaṁ kātabbaṁ—

“You shouldn’t do legal procedures—
23

तज्जनीयंtaj·ja·nī·yaṃ वा,vā नियस्संni·yas·saṃ वा,vā पब्बाजनीयंpab·bā·ja·nī·yaṃ वा,vā पटिसारणीयंpa·ṭi·sā·ra·ṇī·yaṃ वा,vā उक्खेपनीयंuk·khe·pa·nī·yaṃ वा।vā

tajjanīyaṁ vā, niyassaṁ vā, pabbājanīyaṁ vā, paṭisāraṇīyaṁ vā, ukkhepanīyaṁ vā.

censure, demotion, banishment, reconciliation, or ejection—against monks who are absent.
24

योyo करेय्य,ka·rey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Yo kareyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.
25

अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Adhammavādī puggalo adhammavādī sambahulā adhammavādī saṅgho.

An individual who speaks contrary to the Teaching; several people who speak contrary to the Teaching; a sangha that speaks contrary to the Teaching.
26

धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Dhammavādī puggalo dhammavādī sambahulā dhammavādī saṅgho.

An individual who speaks in accordance with the Teaching; several people who speak in accordance with the Teaching; a sangha that speaks in accordance with the Teaching.”
27

1।1। कण्हपक्खनवकkaṇ·ha·pak·kha·na·va·ka

1.1. Kaṇhapakkhanavaka

The group of nine on the dark side
28

अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo धम्मवादिंdham·ma·vā·diṃ पुग्गलंpug·ga·laṃ सञ्ञापेतिsañ·ñā·pe·ti निज्झापेतिnij·jhā·pe·ti पेक्खेतिpek·khe·ti अनुपेक्खेतिa·nu·pek·khe·ti दस्सेतिdas·se·ti अनुदस्सेति—a·nu·das·se·ti

Adhammavādī puggalo dhammavādiṁ puggalaṁ saññāpeti nijjhāpeti pekkheti anupekkheti dasseti anudasseti—

“An individual who speaks contrary to the Teaching persuades an individual who speaks in accordance with the Teaching—convinces him, makes him see, makes him consider, shows him, teaches him:
29

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हाहि,gaṇ·hā·hi इमंi·maṃ रोचेही’ति।ro·ce·hī

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhāhi, imaṁ rocehī’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
30

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti अधम्मेनa·dham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयपतिरूपकेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ya·pa·ti·rū·pa·ke·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, adhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayapatirūpakena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved illegitimately by a face-to-face-like resolution.
31

अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलेsam·ba·hu·le सञ्ञापेतिsañ·ñā·pe·ti निज्झापेतिnij·jhā·pe·ti पेक्खेतिpek·khe·ti अनुपेक्खेतिa·nu·pek·khe·ti दस्सेतिdas·se·ti अनुदस्सेति—a·nu·das·se·ti

Adhammavādī puggalo dhammavādī sambahule saññāpeti nijjhāpeti pekkheti anupekkheti dasseti anudasseti—

An individual who speaks contrary to the Teaching persuades several people who speak in accordance with the Teaching—convinces them, makes them see, makes them consider, shows them, teaches them:
32

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
33

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti अधम्मेनa·dham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयपतिरूपकेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ya·pa·ti·rū·pa·ke·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, adhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayapatirūpakena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved illegitimately by a face-to-face-like resolution.
34

अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo धम्मवादिंdham·ma·vā·diṃ सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सञ्ञापेतिsañ·ñā·pe·ti निज्झापेतिnij·jhā·pe·ti पेक्खेतिpek·khe·ti अनुपेक्खेतिa·nu·pek·khe·ti दस्सेतिdas·se·ti अनुदस्सेति—a·nu·das·se·ti

Adhammavādī puggalo dhammavādiṁ saṅghaṁ saññāpeti nijjhāpeti pekkheti anupekkheti dasseti anudasseti—

An individual who speaks contrary to the Teaching persuades a sangha that speaks in accordance with the Teaching—convinces it, makes it see, makes it consider, shows it, teaches it:
35

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हाहि,gaṇ·hā·hi इमंi·maṃ रोचेही’ति।ro·ce·hī

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhāhi, imaṁ rocehī’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
36

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti अधम्मेनa·dham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयपतिरूपकेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ya·pa·ti·rū·pa·ke·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, adhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayapatirūpakena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved illegitimately by a face-to-face-like resolution.
37

अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā धम्मवादिंdham·ma·vā·diṃ पुग्गलंpug·ga·laṃ सञ्ञापेन्तिsañ·ñā·pen·ti निज्झापेन्तिnij·jhā·pen·ti पेक्खेन्तिpek·khen·ti अनुपेक्खेन्तिa·nu·pek·khen·ti दस्सेन्तिdas·sen·ti अनुदस्सेन्ति—a·nu·das·sen·ti

Adhammavādī sambahulā dhammavādiṁ puggalaṁ saññāpenti nijjhāpenti pekkhenti anupekkhenti dassenti anudassenti—

Several people who speak contrary to the Teaching persuade an individual who speaks in accordance with the Teaching—convince him, make him see, make him consider, show him, teach him:
38

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हाहि,gaṇ·hā·hi इमंi·maṃ रोचेही’ति।ro·ce·hī

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhāhi, imaṁ rocehī’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
39

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti अधम्मेनa·dham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयपतिरूपकेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ya·pa·ti·rū·pa·ke·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, adhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayapatirūpakena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved illegitimately by a face-to-face-like resolution.
40

अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलेsam·ba·hu·le सञ्ञापेन्तिsañ·ñā·pen·ti निज्झापेन्तिnij·jhā·pen·ti पेक्खेन्तिpek·khen·ti अनुपेक्खेन्तिa·nu·pek·khen·ti दस्सेन्तिdas·sen·ti अनुदस्सेन्ति—a·nu·das·sen·ti

Adhammavādī sambahulā dhammavādī sambahule saññāpenti nijjhāpenti pekkhenti anupekkhenti dassenti anudassenti—

Several people who speak contrary to the Teaching persuade several people who speak in accordance with the Teaching—convince them, make them see, make them consider, show them, teach them:
41

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
42

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti अधम्मेनa·dham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयपतिरूपकेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ya·pa·ti·rū·pa·ke·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, adhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayapatirūpakena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved illegitimately by a face-to-face-like resolution.
43

अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā धम्मवादिंdham·ma·vā·diṃ सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सञ्ञापेन्तिsañ·ñā·pen·ti निज्झापेन्तिnij·jhā·pen·ti पेक्खेन्तिpek·khen·ti अनुपेक्खेन्तिa·nu·pek·khen·ti दस्सेन्तिdas·sen·ti अनुदस्सेन्ति—a·nu·das·sen·ti

Adhammavādī sambahulā dhammavādiṁ saṅghaṁ saññāpenti nijjhāpenti pekkhenti anupekkhenti dassenti anudassenti—

Several people who speak contrary to the Teaching persuade a sangha that speaks in accordance with the Teaching—convince it, make it see, make it consider, show it, teach it:
44

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हाहि,gaṇ·hā·hi इमंi·maṃ रोचेही’ति।ro·ce·hī

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhāhi, imaṁ rocehī’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
45

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti अधम्मेनa·dham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयपतिरूपकेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ya·pa·ti·rū·pa·ke·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, adhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayapatirūpakena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved illegitimately by a face-to-face-like resolution.
46

अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī सङ्घोsaṅ·gho धम्मवादिंdham·ma·vā·diṃ पुग्गलंpug·ga·laṃ सञ्ञापेतिsañ·ñā·pe·ti निज्झापेतिnij·jhā·pe·ti पेक्खेतिpek·khe·ti अनुपेक्खेतिa·nu·pek·khe·ti दस्सेतिdas·se·ti अनुदस्सेति—a·nu·das·se·ti

Adhammavādī saṅgho dhammavādiṁ puggalaṁ saññāpeti nijjhāpeti pekkheti anupekkheti dasseti anudasseti—

A sangha that speaks contrary to the Teaching persuades an individual who speaks in accordance with the Teaching—convinces him, makes him see, makes him consider, shows him, teaches him:
47

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हाहि,gaṇ·hā·hi इमंi·maṃ रोचेही’ति।ro·ce·hī

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhāhi, imaṁ rocehī’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
48

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti अधम्मेनa·dham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयपतिरूपकेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ya·pa·ti·rū·pa·ke·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, adhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayapatirūpakena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved illegitimately by a face-to-face-like resolution.
49

अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī सङ्घोsaṅ·gho धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलेsam·ba·hu·le सञ्ञापेतिsañ·ñā·pe·ti निज्झापेतिnij·jhā·pe·ti पेक्खेतिpek·khe·ti अनुपेक्खेतिa·nu·pek·khe·ti दस्सेतिdas·se·ti अनुदस्सेति—a·nu·das·se·ti

Adhammavādī saṅgho dhammavādī sambahule saññāpeti nijjhāpeti pekkheti anupekkheti dasseti anudasseti—

A sangha that speaks contrary to the Teaching persuades several people who speak in accordance with the Teaching—convinces them, makes them see, makes them consider, shows them, teaches them:
50

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
51

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti अधम्मेनa·dham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयपतिरूपकेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ya·pa·ti·rū·pa·ke·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, adhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayapatirūpakena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved illegitimately by a face-to-face-like resolution.
52

अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī सङ्घोsaṅ·gho धम्मवादिंdham·ma·vā·diṃ सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सञ्ञापेतिsañ·ñā·pe·ti निज्झापेतिnij·jhā·pe·ti पेक्खेतिpek·khe·ti अनुपेक्खेतिa·nu·pek·khe·ti दस्सेतिdas·se·ti अनुदस्सेति—a·nu·das·se·ti

Adhammavādī saṅgho dhammavādiṁ saṅghaṁ saññāpeti nijjhāpeti pekkheti anupekkheti dasseti anudasseti—

A sangha that speaks contrary to the Teaching persuades a sangha that speaks in accordance with the Teaching—convinces it, makes it see, makes it consider, shows it, teaches it:
53

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हाहि,gaṇ·hā·hi इमंi·maṃ रोचेही’ति।ro·ce·hī

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhāhi, imaṁ rocehī’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
54

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti अधम्मेनa·dham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयपतिरूपकेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ya·pa·ti·rū·pa·ke·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, adhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayapatirūpakena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved illegitimately by a face-to-face-like resolution.”
55

कण्हपक्खनवकंkaṇ·ha·pak·kha·na·va·kaṃ निट्ठितं।niṭ·ṭhi·taṃ

Kaṇhapakkhanavakaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.

The group of nine on the dark side is finished.
56

1।2। सुक्कपक्खनवकsuk·ka·pak·kha·na·va·ka

1.2. Sukkapakkhanavaka

The group of nine on the bright side
57

धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo अधम्मवादिंa·dham·ma·vā·diṃ पुग्गलंpug·ga·laṃ सञ्ञापेतिsañ·ñā·pe·ti निज्झापेतिnij·jhā·pe·ti पेक्खेतिpek·khe·ti अनुपेक्खेतिa·nu·pek·khe·ti दस्सेतिdas·se·ti अनुदस्सेति—a·nu·das·se·ti

Dhammavādī puggalo adhammavādiṁ puggalaṁ saññāpeti nijjhāpeti pekkheti anupekkheti dasseti anudasseti—

“An individual who speaks in accordance with the Teaching persuades an individual who speaks contrary to the Teaching—convinces him, makes him see, makes him consider, shows him, teaches him:
58

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हाहि,gaṇ·hā·hi इमंi·maṃ रोचेही’ति।ro·ce·hī

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhāhi, imaṁ rocehī’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
59

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti धम्मेनdham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, dhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved legitimately by face-to-face resolution.
60

धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलेsam·ba·hu·le सञ्ञापेतिsañ·ñā·pe·ti निज्झापेतिnij·jhā·pe·ti पेक्खेतिpek·khe·ti अनुपेक्खेतिa·nu·pek·khe·ti दस्सेतिdas·se·ti अनुदस्सेति—a·nu·das·se·ti

Dhammavādī puggalo adhammavādī sambahule saññāpeti nijjhāpeti pekkheti anupekkheti dasseti anudasseti—

An individual who speaks in accordance with the Teaching persuades several people who speak contrary to the Teaching—convinces them, makes them see, makes them consider, shows them, teaches them:
61

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
62

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti धम्मेनdham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, dhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved legitimately by face-to-face resolution.
63

धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī पुग्गलोpug·ga·lo अधम्मवादिंa·dham·ma·vā·diṃ सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सञ्ञापेतिsañ·ñā·pe·ti निज्झापेतिnij·jhā·pe·ti पेक्खेतिpek·khe·ti अनुपेक्खेतिa·nu·pek·khe·ti दस्सेतिdas·se·ti अनुदस्सेति—a·nu·das·se·ti

Dhammavādī puggalo adhammavādiṁ saṅghaṁ saññāpeti nijjhāpeti pekkheti anupekkheti dasseti anudasseti—

An individual who speaks in accordance with the Teaching persuades a sangha that speaks contrary to the Teaching—convinces it, makes it see, makes it consider, shows it, teaches it:
64

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हाहि,gaṇ·hā·hi इमंi·maṃ रोचेही’ति।ro·ce·hī

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhāhi, imaṁ rocehī’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
65

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti धम्मेनdham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, dhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved legitimately by face-to-face resolution.
66

धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā अधम्मवादिंa·dham·ma·vā·diṃ पुग्गलंpug·ga·laṃ सञ्ञापेन्तिsañ·ñā·pen·ti निज्झापेन्तिnij·jhā·pen·ti पेक्खेन्तिpek·khen·ti अनुपेक्खेन्तिa·nu·pek·khen·ti दस्सेन्तिdas·sen·ti अनुदस्सेन्ति—a·nu·das·sen·ti

Dhammavādī sambahulā adhammavādiṁ puggalaṁ saññāpenti nijjhāpenti pekkhenti anupekkhenti dassenti anudassenti—

Several people who speak in accordance with the Teaching persuade an individual who speaks contrary to the Teaching—convince him, make him see, make him consider, show him, teach him:
67

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हाहि,gaṇ·hā·hi इमंi·maṃ रोचेही’ति।ro·ce·hī

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhāhi, imaṁ rocehī’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
68

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti धम्मेनdham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, dhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved legitimately by face-to-face resolution.
69

धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलेsam·ba·hu·le सञ्ञापेन्तिsañ·ñā·pen·ti निज्झापेन्तिnij·jhā·pen·ti पेक्खेन्तिpek·khen·ti अनुपेक्खेन्तिa·nu·pek·khen·ti दस्सेन्तिdas·sen·ti अनुदस्सेन्ति—a·nu·das·sen·ti

Dhammavādī sambahulā adhammavādī sambahule saññāpenti nijjhāpenti pekkhenti anupekkhenti dassenti anudassenti—

Several people who speak in accordance with the Teaching persuade several people who speak contrary to the Teaching—convince them, make them see, make them consider, show them, teach them:
70

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
71

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti धम्मेनdham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, dhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved legitimately by face-to-face resolution.
72

धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā अधम्मवादिंa·dham·ma·vā·diṃ सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सञ्ञापेन्तिsañ·ñā·pen·ti निज्झापेन्तिnij·jhā·pen·ti पेक्खेन्तिpek·khen·ti अनुपेक्खेन्तिa·nu·pek·khen·ti दस्सेन्तिdas·sen·ti अनुदस्सेन्ति—a·nu·das·sen·ti

Dhammavādī sambahulā adhammavādiṁ saṅghaṁ saññāpenti nijjhāpenti pekkhenti anupekkhenti dassenti anudassenti—

Several people who speak in accordance with the Teaching persuade a sangha that speaks contrary to the Teaching—convince it, make it see, make it consider, show it, teach it:
73

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हाहि,gaṇ·hā·hi इमंi·maṃ रोचेही’ति।ro·ce·hī

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhāhi, imaṁ rocehī’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
74

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti धम्मेनdham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, dhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved legitimately by face-to-face resolution.
75

धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī सङ्घोsaṅ·gho अधम्मवादिंa·dham·ma·vā·diṃ पुग्गलंpug·ga·laṃ सञ्ञापेतिsañ·ñā·pe·ti निज्झापेतिnij·jhā·pe·ti पेक्खेतिpek·khe·ti अनुपेक्खेतिa·nu·pek·khe·ti दस्सेतिdas·se·ti अनुदस्सेति—a·nu·das·se·ti

Dhammavādī saṅgho adhammavādiṁ puggalaṁ saññāpeti nijjhāpeti pekkheti anupekkheti dasseti anudasseti—

A sangha that speaks in accordance with the Teaching persuades an individual who speaks contrary to the Teaching—convinces him, makes him see, makes him consider, shows him, teaches him:
76

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हाहि,gaṇ·hā·hi इमंi·maṃ रोचेही’ति।ro·ce·hī

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhāhi, imaṁ rocehī’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
77

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti धम्मेनdham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, dhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved legitimately by face-to-face resolution.
78

धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī सङ्घोsaṅ·gho अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī सम्बहुलेsam·ba·hu·le सञ्ञापेतिsañ·ñā·pe·ti निज्झापेतिnij·jhā·pe·ti पेक्खेतिpek·khe·ti अनुपेक्खेतिa·nu·pek·khe·ti दस्सेतिdas·se·ti अनुदस्सेति—a·nu·das·se·ti

Dhammavādī saṅgho adhammavādī sambahule saññāpeti nijjhāpeti pekkheti anupekkheti dasseti anudasseti—

A sangha that speaks in accordance with the Teaching persuades several people who speak contrary to the Teaching—convinces them, makes them see, makes them consider, shows them, teaches them:
79

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हथ,gaṇ·ha·tha इमंi·maṃ रोचेथा’ति।ro·ce·thā

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhatha, imaṁ rocethā’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
80

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti धम्मेनdham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, dhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayena.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved legitimately by face-to-face resolution.
81

धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī सङ्घोsaṅ·gho अधम्मवादिंa·dham·ma·vā·diṃ सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सञ्ञापेतिsañ·ñā·pe·ti निज्झापेतिnij·jhā·pe·ti पेक्खेतिpek·khe·ti अनुपेक्खेतिa·nu·pek·khe·ti दस्सेतिdas·se·ti अनुदस्सेति—a·nu·das·se·ti

Dhammavādī saṅgho adhammavādiṁ saṅghaṁ saññāpeti nijjhāpeti pekkheti anupekkheti dasseti anudasseti—

A sangha that speaks in accordance with the Teaching persuades a sangha that speaks contrary to the Teaching—convinces it, makes it see, makes it consider, shows it, teaches it:
82

‘अयंa·yaṃ धम्मो,dham·mo अयंa·yaṃ विनयो,vi·na·yo इदंi·daṃ सत्थुसासनं,sat·thu·sā·sa·naṃ इमंi·maṃ गण्हाहि,gaṇ·hā·hi इमंi·maṃ रोचेही’ति।ro·ce·hī

‘ayaṁ dhammo, ayaṁ vinayo, idaṁ satthusāsanaṁ, imaṁ gaṇhāhi, imaṁ rocehī’ti.

‘This is the Teaching, this is the Monastic Law, this is the Teacher’s instruction; learn this, accept this.’
83

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति,vū·pa·sam·ma·ti धम्मेनdham·me·na वूपसम्मतिvū·pa·sam·ma·ti सम्मुखाविनयेना”ति।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·nā

Evañcetaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati, dhammena vūpasammati sammukhāvinayenā”ti.

If a legal issue is resolved like this, it’s resolved legitimately by face-to-face resolution.”
84

सुक्कपक्खनवकंsuk·ka·pak·kha·na·va·kaṃ निट्ठितं।niṭ·ṭhi·taṃ

Sukkapakkhanavakaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ.

The group of nine on the bright side is finished.
85

2। सतिविनयsa·ti·vi·na·ya

2. Sativinaya

2. Resolution through recollection
86

तेनte·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na बुद्धोbud·dho भगवाbha·ga·vā राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti वेळुवनेve·ḷu·va·ne कलन्दकनिवापे।ka·lan·da·ka·ni·vā·pe

Tena samayena buddho bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.

At one time when the Buddha was staying at Rājagaha in the Bamboo Grove,
87

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्मताā·yas·ma·tā दब्बेनdab·be·na मल्लपुत्तेनmal·la·put·te·na जातियाjā·ti·yā सत्तवस्सेनsat·ta·vas·se·na अरहत्तंa·ra·hat·taṃ सच्छिकतंsac·chi·ka·taṃ होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena āyasmatā dabbena mallaputtena jātiyā sattavassena arahattaṁ sacchikataṁ hoti.

Venerable Dabba the Mallian realized perfection at the age of seven.
88

यंyaṃ किञ्चिkiñ·ci सावकेनsā·va·ke·na पत्तब्बंpat·tab·baṃ सब्बंsab·baṃ तेनte·na अनुप्पत्तंa·nup·pat·taṃ होति।ho·ti

Yaṁ kiñci sāvakena pattabbaṁ sabbaṁ tena anuppattaṁ hoti.

He had achieved all there is to achieve by a disciple
89

नत्थिnat·thi चस्सcas·sa किञ्चिkiñ·ci उत्तरिut·ta·ri करणीयं,ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ कतस्सka·tas·sa वाvā पतिचयो।pa·ti·ca·yo

Natthi cassa kiñci uttari karaṇīyaṁ, katassa vā paticayo.

and had nothing further to do.
90

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to दब्बस्सdab·bas·sa मल्लपुत्तस्सmal·la·put·tas·sa रहोगतस्सra·ho·ga·tas·sa पटिसल्लीनस्सpa·ṭi·sal·lī·nas·sa एवंe·vaṃ चेतसोce·ta·so परिवितक्कोpa·ri·vi·tak·ko उदपादि—u·da·pā·di

Atha kho āyasmato dabbassa mallaputtassa rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi—

Then, while reflecting in private,
91

“मयाma·yā खोkho जातियाjā·ti·yā सत्तवस्सेनsat·ta·vas·se·na अरहत्तंa·ra·hat·taṃ सच्छिकतं।sac·chi·ka·taṃ

“mayā kho jātiyā sattavassena arahattaṁ sacchikataṁ.

(Pāli only)
92

यंyaṃ किञ्चिkiñ·ci सावकेनsā·va·ke·na पत्तब्बंpat·tab·baṃ सब्बंsab·baṃ मयाma·yā अनुप्पत्तं।a·nup·pat·taṃ

Yaṁ kiñci sāvakena pattabbaṁ sabbaṁ mayā anuppattaṁ.

(Pāli only)
93

नत्थिnat·thi चca मेme किञ्चिkiñ·ci उत्तरिकरणीयं,ut·ta·ri·ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ कतस्सka·tas·sa वाvā पतिचयो।pa·ti·ca·yo

Natthi ca me kiñci uttarikaraṇīyaṁ, katassa vā paticayo.

(Pāli only)
94

किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho अहंa·haṃ सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa वेय्यावच्चंvey·yā·vac·caṃ करेय्यन्”ति।ka·rey·yan

Kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ saṅghassa veyyāvaccaṁ kareyyan”ti.

he thought, “How can I be of service to the Sangha?
95

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to दब्बस्सdab·bas·sa मल्लपुत्तस्सmal·la·put·tas·sa एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho āyasmato dabbassa mallaputtassa etadahosi—

(Pāli only)
96

“यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa सेनासनञ्चse·nā·sa·nañ·ca पञ्ञपेय्यंpañ·ña·pey·yaṃ भत्तानिbhat·tā·ni चca उद्दिसेय्यन्”ति।ud·di·sey·yan

“yannūnāhaṁ saṅghassa senāsanañca paññapeyyaṁ bhattāni ca uddiseyyan”ti.

Why don’t I assign the dwellings and designate the meals?”
97

अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to सायन्हसमयंsā·yan·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ पटिसल्लानाpa·ṭi·sal·lā·nā वुट्ठितोvuṭ·ṭhi·to येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

Atha kho āyasmā dabbo mallaputto sāyanhasamayaṁ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

In the evening Dabba came out of seclusion and went to the Buddha. He bowed, sat down,
98

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho āyasmā dabbo mallaputto bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and said,
99

“इधi·dha मय्हं,may·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te रहोगतस्सra·ho·ga·tas·sa पटिसल्लीनस्सpa·ṭi·sal·lī·nas·sa एवंe·vaṃ चेतसोce·ta·so परिवितक्कोpa·ri·vi·tak·ko उदपादि—u·da·pā·di

“idha mayhaṁ, bhante, rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa evaṁ cetaso parivitakko udapādi—

“Sir, while I was reflecting in private, it occurred to me that
100

‘मयाma·yā खोkho जातियाjā·ti·yā सत्तवस्सेनsat·ta·vas·se·na अरहत्तंa·ra·hat·taṃ सच्छिकतं।sac·chi·ka·taṃ

‘mayā kho jātiyā sattavassena arahattaṁ sacchikataṁ.

I’ve achieved all there is to achieve by a disciple,
101

यंyaṃ किञ्चिkiñ·ci सावकेनsā·va·ke·na पत्तब्बं,pat·tab·baṃ सब्बंsab·baṃ मयाma·yā अनुप्पत्तं।a·nup·pat·taṃ

Yaṁ kiñci sāvakena pattabbaṁ, sabbaṁ mayā anuppattaṁ.

(Pāli only)
102

नत्थिnat·thi चca मेme किञ्चिkiñ·ci उत्तरिकरणीयं,ut·ta·ri·ka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ कतस्सka·tas·sa वाvā पतिचयो।pa·ti·ca·yo

Natthi ca me kiñci uttarikaraṇīyaṁ, katassa vā paticayo.

(Pāli only)
103

किंkiṃ नुnu खोkho अहंa·haṃ सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa वेय्यावच्चंvey·yā·vac·caṃ करेय्यन्’ति?ka·rey·yan

Kiṁ nu kho ahaṁ saṅghassa veyyāvaccaṁ kareyyan’ti?

and I was wondering how I could be of service to the Sangha.
104

तस्सtas·sa मय्हं,may·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Tassa mayhaṁ, bhante, etadahosi—

I thought,
105

‘यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa सेनासनञ्चse·nā·sa·nañ·ca पञ्ञपेय्यंpañ·ña·pey·yaṃ भत्तानिbhat·tā·ni चca उद्दिसेय्यन्’ति।ud·di·sey·yan

‘yannūnāhaṁ saṅghassa senāsanañca paññapeyyaṁ bhattāni ca uddiseyyan’ti.

‘Why don’t I assign the dwellings and designate the meals?’”
106

इच्छामहं,ic·chā·ma·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa सेनासनञ्चse·nā·sa·nañ·ca पञ्ञापेतुंpañ·ñā·pe·tuṃ भत्तानिbhat·tā·ni चca उद्दिसितुन्”ति।ud·di·si·tun

Icchāmahaṁ, bhante, saṅghassa senāsanañca paññāpetuṁ bhattāni ca uddisitun”ti.

(Pāli only)
107

“साधुsā·dhu साधु,sā·dhu दब्ब।dab·ba

“Sādhu sādhu, dabba.

“Good, good, Dabba,
108

तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ दब्ब,dab·ba सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa सेनासनञ्चse·nā·sa·nañ·ca पञ्ञपेहिpañ·ña·pe·hi भत्तानिbhat·tā·ni चca उद्दिसाही”ति।ud·di·sā·hī

Tena hi tvaṁ, dabba, saṅghassa senāsanañca paññapehi bhattāni ca uddisāhī”ti.

please do so.”
109

“एवं,e·vaṃ भन्ते”तिbhan·te खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to भगवतोbha·ga·va·to पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

“Evaṁ, bhante”ti kho āyasmā dabbo mallaputto bhagavato paccassosi.

“Yes, sir.”
110

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
111

“तेनte·na हि,hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सङ्घोsaṅ·gho दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ सेनासनपञ्ञापकञ्चse·nā·sa·na·pañ·ñā·pa·kañ·ca भत्तुद्देसकञ्चbhat·tud·de·sa·kañ·ca सम्मन्नतु।sam·man·na·tu

“tena hi, bhikkhave, saṅgho dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ senāsanapaññāpakañca bhattuddesakañca sammannatu.

“Monks, the Sangha should appoint Dabba the Mallian as the assigner of dwellings and the designator of meals.
112

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मन्नितब्बो।sam·man·ni·tab·bo

Evañca pana, bhikkhave, sammannitabbo.

And he should be appointed like this.
113

पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to याचितब्बो।yā·ci·tab·bo

Paṭhamaṁ dabbo mallaputto yācitabbo.

First Dabba should be asked.
114

याचित्वाyā·cit·vā ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Yācitvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:
115

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
116

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ सेनासनपञ्ञापकञ्चse·nā·sa·na·pañ·ñā·pa·kañ·ca भत्तुद्देसकञ्चbhat·tud·de·sa·kañ·ca सम्मन्नेय्य।sam·man·ney·ya

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ senāsanapaññāpakañca bhattuddesakañca sammanneyya.

If the Sangha is ready, it should appoint Venerable Dabba the Mallian as the assigner of dwellings and the designator of meals.
117

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
118

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
119

सङ्घोsaṅ·gho आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ सेनासनपञ्ञापकञ्चse·nā·sa·na·pañ·ñā·pa·kañ·ca भत्तुद्देसकञ्चbhat·tud·de·sa·kañ·ca सम्मन्नति।sam·man·na·ti

Saṅgho āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ senāsanapaññāpakañca bhattuddesakañca sammannati.

The Sangha appoints Venerable Dabba the Mallian as the assigner of dwellings and the designator of meals.
120

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to दब्बस्सdab·bas·sa मल्लपुत्तस्सmal·la·put·tas·sa सेनासनपञ्ञापकस्सse·nā·sa·na·pañ·ñā·pa·kas·sa चca भत्तुद्देसकस्सbhat·tud·de·sa·kas·sa चca सम्मुति,sam·mu·ti सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati āyasmato dabbassa mallaputtassa senāsanapaññāpakassa ca bhattuddesakassa ca sammuti, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves of appointing Venerable Dabba as the assigner of dwellings and the designator of meals should remain silent.
121

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
122

सम्मतोsam·ma·to सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na आयस्माā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to सेनासनपञ्ञापकोse·nā·sa·na·pañ·ñā·pa·ko चca भत्तुद्देसकोbhat·tud·de·sa·ko च।ca

Sammato saṅghena āyasmā dabbo mallaputto senāsanapaññāpako ca bhattuddesako ca.

The Sangha has appointed Venerable Dabba the Mallian as the assigner of dwellings and the designator of meals.
123

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’”ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’”ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’”
124

सम्मतोsam·ma·to चca पनायस्माpa·nā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to सभागानंsa·bhā·gā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एकज्झंe·kaj·jhaṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेति।pañ·ña·pe·ti

Sammato ca panāyasmā dabbo mallaputto sabhāgānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ ekajjhaṁ senāsanaṁ paññapeti.

Dabba assigned dwellings to the monks according to their character.
125

येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū सुत्तन्तिकाsut·tan·ti·kā तेसंte·saṃ एकज्झंe·kaj·jhaṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेति—pañ·ña·pe·ti

Ye te bhikkhū suttantikā tesaṁ ekajjhaṁ senāsanaṁ paññapeti—

He assigned dwellings in the same place to those monks who were experts on the discourses, thinking,
126

“तेte अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ सुत्तन्तंsut·tan·taṃ सङ्गायिस्सन्ती”ति।saṅ·gā·yis·san·tī

“te aññamaññaṁ suttantaṁ saṅgāyissantī”ti.

“They’ll recite the discourses to one another.”
127

येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū विनयधराvi·na·ya·dha·rā तेसंte·saṃ एकज्झंe·kaj·jhaṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेति—pañ·ña·pe·ti

Ye te bhikkhū vinayadharā tesaṁ ekajjhaṁ senāsanaṁ paññapeti—

And he did likewise for the experts on the Monastic Law, thinking,
128

“तेte अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ विनयंvi·na·yaṃ विनिच्छिनिस्सन्ती”ति।vi·nic·chi·nis·san·tī

“te aññamaññaṁ vinayaṁ vinicchinissantī”ti.

“They’ll discuss the Monastic Law;”
129

येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū धम्मकथिकाdham·ma·ka·thi·kā तेसंte·saṃ एकज्झंe·kaj·jhaṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेति—pañ·ña·pe·ti

Ye te bhikkhū dhammakathikā tesaṁ ekajjhaṁ senāsanaṁ paññapeti—

for the expounders of the Teaching, thinking,
130

“तेte अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ साकच्छिस्सन्ती”ति।sā·kac·chis·san·tī

“te aññamaññaṁ dhammaṁ sākacchissantī”ti.

“They’ll discuss the Teaching;”
131

येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū झायिनोjhā·yi·no तेसंte·saṃ एकज्झंe·kaj·jhaṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेति—pañ·ña·pe·ti

Ye te bhikkhū jhāyino tesaṁ ekajjhaṁ senāsanaṁ paññapeti—

for the meditators, thinking,
132

“तेte अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ नna ब्याबाधिस्सन्ती”ति।byā·bā·dhis·san·tī

“te aññamaññaṁ na byābādhissantī”ti.

“They won’t disturb one another;”
133

येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तिरच्छानकथिकाti·rac·chā·na·ka·thi·kā कायदळ्हिबहुलाkā·ya·da·ḷhi·ba·hu·lā विहरन्तिvi·ha·ran·ti तेसम्पिte·sam·pi एकज्झंe·kaj·jhaṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेति—pañ·ña·pe·ti

Ye te bhikkhū tiracchānakathikā kāyadaḷhibahulā viharanti tesampi ekajjhaṁ senāsanaṁ paññapeti—

and for the gossips and the bodybuilders, thinking,
134

“इमायपिमेi·mā·ya·pi·me आयस्मन्तोā·yas·man·to रतियाra·ti·yā अच्छिस्सन्ती”ति।ac·chis·san·tī

“imāyapime āyasmanto ratiyā acchissantī”ti.

“In this way even these venerables will be happy.”
135

येपिye·pi तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū विकालेvi·kā·le आगच्छन्तिā·gac·chan·ti तेसम्पिte·sam·pi तेजोधातुंte·jo·dhā·tuṃ समापज्जित्वाsa·mā·paj·jit·vā तेनेवte·ne·va आलोकेनā·lo·ke·na सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेति;pañ·ña·pe·ti

Yepi te bhikkhū vikāle āgacchanti tesampi tejodhātuṁ samāpajjitvā teneva ālokena senāsanaṁ paññapeti;

When monks arrived at night, he entered the fire element and assigned dwellings with the help of that light.
136

अपिस्सुa·pis·su भिक्खूbhik·khū सञ्चिच्चsañ·cic·ca विकालेvi·kā·le आगच्छन्ति—ā·gac·chan·ti

apissu bhikkhū sañcicca vikāle āgacchanti—

Monks even arrived late on purpose,
137

“मयंma·yaṃ आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to दब्बस्सdab·bas·sa मल्लपुत्तस्सmal·la·put·tas·sa इद्धिपाटिहारियंid·dhi·pā·ṭi·hā·ri·yaṃ पस्सिस्सामा”ति।pas·sis·sā·mā

“mayaṁ āyasmato dabbassa mallaputtassa iddhipāṭihāriyaṁ passissāmā”ti.

hoping to see the marvel of Dabba’s supernormal powers.
138

तेte आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एवंe·vaṃ वदन्ति—va·dan·ti

Te āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadanti—

They would approach Dabba and say,
139

“अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसोā·vu·so दब्ब,dab·ba सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेही”ति।pañ·ña·pe·hī

“amhākaṁ, āvuso dabba, senāsanaṁ paññapehī”ti.

“Venerable Dabba, please assign us a dwelling.”
140

तेte आयस्माā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

Te āyasmā dabbo mallaputto evaṁ vadeti—

(Pāli only)
141

“कत्थkat·tha आयस्मन्ताā·yas·man·tā इच्छन्तिic·chan·ti कत्थkat·tha पञ्ञपेमी”ति?pañ·ña·pe·mī

“kattha āyasmantā icchanti kattha paññapemī”ti?

“Where would you like to stay?”
142

तेte सञ्चिच्चsañ·cic·ca दूरेdū·re अपदिसन्ति—a·pa·di·san·ti

Te sañcicca dūre apadisanti—

They would intentionally suggest somewhere far away:
143

“अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसोā·vu·so दब्ब,dab·ba गिज्झकूटेgij·jha·kū·ṭe पब्बतेpab·ba·te सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेहि।pañ·ña·pe·hi

“amhākaṁ, āvuso dabba, gijjhakūṭe pabbate senāsanaṁ paññapehi.

“On the Vulture Peak,”
144

अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so चोरपपातेco·ra·pa·pā·te सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेहि।pañ·ña·pe·hi

Amhākaṁ, āvuso, corapapāte senāsanaṁ paññapehi.

“At Robbers’ Cliff,”
145

अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so इसिगिलिपस्सेi·si·gi·li·pas·se काळसिलायंkā·ḷa·si·lā·yaṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेहि।pañ·ña·pe·hi

Amhākaṁ, āvuso, isigilipasse kāḷasilāyaṁ senāsanaṁ paññapehi.

“On Black Rock on the slope of Mount Isigili,”
146

अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so वेभारपस्सेve·bhā·ra·pas·se सत्तपण्णिगुहायंsat·ta·paṇ·ṇi·gu·hā·yaṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेहि।pañ·ña·pe·hi

Amhākaṁ, āvuso, vebhārapasse sattapaṇṇiguhāyaṁ senāsanaṁ paññapehi.

“In the Sattapaṇṇi Cave on the slope of Mount Vebhāra,”
147

अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so सीतवनेsī·ta·va·ne सप्पसोण्डिकपब्भारेsap·pa·soṇ·ḍi·ka·pab·bhā·re सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेहि।pañ·ña·pe·hi

Amhākaṁ, āvuso, sītavane sappasoṇḍikapabbhāre senāsanaṁ paññapehi.

“In Cool Grove on the hill at the Snake’s Pool,”
148

अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so गोतमककन्दरायंgo·ta·ma·ka·kan·da·rā·yaṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेहि।pañ·ña·pe·hi

Amhākaṁ, āvuso, gotamakakandarāyaṁ senāsanaṁ paññapehi.

“At Gotamaka Gorge,”
149

अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so तिन्दुककन्दरायंtin·du·ka·kan·da·rā·yaṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेहि।pañ·ña·pe·hi

Amhākaṁ, āvuso, tindukakandarāyaṁ senāsanaṁ paññapehi.

“At Tinduka Gorge,”
150

अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so तपोदकन्दरायंta·po·da·kan·da·rā·yaṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेहि।pañ·ña·pe·hi

Amhākaṁ, āvuso, tapodakandarāyaṁ senāsanaṁ paññapehi.

“At Tapoda Gorge,”
151

अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so तपोदारामेta·po·dā·rā·me सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेहि।pañ·ña·pe·hi

Amhākaṁ, āvuso, tapodārāme senāsanaṁ paññapehi.

“In Tapoda Park,”
152

अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so जीवकम्बवनेjī·va·kam·ba·va·ne सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेहि।pañ·ña·pe·hi

Amhākaṁ, āvuso, jīvakambavane senāsanaṁ paññapehi.

“In Jīvaka’s Mango Grove,”
153

अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so मद्दकुच्छिम्हिmad·da·kuc·chim·hi मिगदायेmi·ga·dā·ye सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेही”ति।pañ·ña·pe·hī

Amhākaṁ, āvuso, maddakucchimhi migadāye senāsanaṁ paññapehī”ti.

“In the deer park at Maddakucchi.”
154

तेसंte·saṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to तेजोधातुंte·jo·dhā·tuṃ समापज्जित्वाsa·mā·paj·jit·vā अङ्गुलियाaṅ·gu·li·yā जलमानायja·la·mā·nā·ya पुरतोpu·ra·to पुरतोpu·ra·to गच्छति।gac·cha·ti

Tesaṁ āyasmā dabbo mallaputto tejodhātuṁ samāpajjitvā aṅguliyā jalamānāya purato purato gacchati.

Dabba then entered the fire element, and with his finger glowing, he walked in front of those monks.
155

तेपिte·pi तेनेवte·ne·va आलोकेनā·lo·ke·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to दब्बस्सdab·bas·sa मल्लपुत्तस्सmal·la·put·tas·sa पिट्ठितोpiṭ·ṭhi·to पिट्ठितोpiṭ·ṭhi·to गच्छन्ति।gac·chan·ti

Tepi teneva ālokena āyasmato dabbassa mallaputtassa piṭṭhito piṭṭhito gacchanti.

They followed behind him with the help of that light.
156

तेसंte·saṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to एवंe·vaṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेति—pañ·ña·pe·ti

Tesaṁ āyasmā dabbo mallaputto evaṁ senāsanaṁ paññapeti—

And he would assign them dwellings:
157

“अयंa·yaṃ मञ्चो,mañ·co इदंi·daṃ पीठं,pī·ṭhaṃ अयंa·yaṃ भिसि,bhi·si इदंi·daṃ बिब्बोहनं,bib·bo·ha·naṃ इदंi·daṃ वच्चट्ठानं,vac·caṭ·ṭhā·naṃ इदंi·daṃ पस्सावट्ठानं,pas·sā·vaṭ·ṭhā·naṃ इदंi·daṃ पानीयं,pā·nī·yaṃ इदंi·daṃ परिभोजनीयं,pa·ri·bho·ja·nī·yaṃ अयंa·yaṃ कत्तरदण्डो,kat·ta·ra·daṇ·ḍo इदंi·daṃ सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa कतिकसण्ठानं,ka·ti·ka·saṇ·ṭhā·naṃ इमंi·maṃ कालंkā·laṃ पविसितब्बं,pa·vi·si·tab·baṃ इमंi·maṃ कालंkā·laṃ निक्खमितब्बन्”ति।nik·kha·mi·tab·ban

“ayaṁ mañco, idaṁ pīṭhaṁ, ayaṁ bhisi, idaṁ bibbohanaṁ, idaṁ vaccaṭṭhānaṁ, idaṁ passāvaṭṭhānaṁ, idaṁ pānīyaṁ, idaṁ paribhojanīyaṁ, ayaṁ kattaradaṇḍo, idaṁ saṅghassa katikasaṇṭhānaṁ, imaṁ kālaṁ pavisitabbaṁ, imaṁ kālaṁ nikkhamitabban”ti.

“This is the bed, this the bench, this the mattress, this the pillow, this the place for defecating, this the place for urinating, this the water for drinking, this the water for washing, this the walking stick; these are the Sangha’s agreements concerning the right time to enter and the right time to leave.”
158

तेसंte·saṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to एवंe·vaṃ सेनासनंse·nā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेत्वाpañ·ña·pet·vā पुनदेवpu·na·de·va वेळुवनंve·ḷu·va·naṃ पच्चागच्छति।pac·cā·gac·cha·ti

Tesaṁ āyasmā dabbo mallaputto evaṁ senāsanaṁ paññapetvā punadeva veḷuvanaṁ paccāgacchati.

Dabba then returned to the Bamboo Grove.
159

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū नवकाna·va·kā चेवce·va होन्तिhon·ti अप्पपुञ्ञाap·pa·puñ·ñā च।ca

Tena kho pana samayena mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū navakā ceva honti appapuññā ca.

At that time the monks Mettiya and Bhūmajaka were only newly ordained. They had little merit,
160

यानिyā·ni सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa लामकानिlā·ma·kā·ni सेनासनानिse·nā·sa·nā·ni तानिtā·ni तेसंte·saṃ पापुणन्तिpā·pu·ṇan·ti लामकानिlā·ma·kā·ni चca भत्तानि।bhat·tā·ni

Yāni saṅghassa lāmakāni senāsanāni tāni tesaṁ pāpuṇanti lāmakāni ca bhattāni.

getting inferior dwellings and meals.
161

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na राजगहेrā·ja·ga·he मनुस्साma·nus·sā इच्छन्तिic·chan·ti थेरानंthe·rā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ अभिसङ्खारिकंa·bhi·saṅ·khā·ri·kaṃ पिण्डपातंpiṇ·ḍa·pā·taṃ दातुं—dā·tuṃ

Tena kho pana samayena rājagahe manussā icchanti therānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ abhisaṅkhārikaṁ piṇḍapātaṁ dātuṁ—

The people of Rājagaha were keen to give specially prepared almsfood to the senior monks—
162

सप्पिम्पि,sap·pim·pi तेलम्पि,te·lam·pi उत्तरिभङ्गम्पि।ut·ta·ri·bhaṅ·gam·pi

sappimpi, telampi, uttaribhaṅgampi.

ghee, oil, and special curries—
163

मेत्तियभूमजकानंmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā·naṃ पनpa·na भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पाकतिकंpā·ka·ti·kaṃ देन्ति—den·ti

Mettiyabhūmajakānaṁ pana bhikkhūnaṁ pākatikaṁ denti—

but to the monks Mettiya and Bhūmajaka they gave ordinary food of
164

यथारन्धंya·thā·ran·dhaṃ कणाजकंka·ṇā·ja·kaṃ बिलङ्गदुतियं।bi·laṅ·ga·du·ti·yaṃ

yathārandhaṁ kaṇājakaṁ bilaṅgadutiyaṁ.

porridge and broken rice.
165

तेte पच्छाभत्तंpac·chā·bhat·taṃ पिण्डपातपटिक्कन्ताpiṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·pa·ṭik·kan·tā थेरेthe·re भिक्खूbhik·khū पुच्छन्ति—puc·chan·ti

Te pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantā there bhikkhū pucchanti—

When they had eaten their meal and returned from almsround, they asked the senior monks,
166

“तुम्हाकं,tum·hā·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge किंkiṃ अहोसि,a·ho·si तुम्हाकंtum·hā·kaṃ किंkiṃ अहोसी”ति?a·ho·sī

“tumhākaṁ, āvuso, bhattagge kiṁ ahosi, tumhākaṁ kiṁ ahosī”ti?

“What did you get at the dining hall?”
167

एकच्चेe·kac·ce थेराthe·rā एवंe·vaṃ वदन्ति—va·dan·ti

Ekacce therā evaṁ vadanti—

Some said,
168

“अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so सप्पिsap·pi अहोसि,a·ho·si तेलंte·laṃ अहोसि,a·ho·si उत्तरिभङ्गंut·ta·ri·bhaṅ·gaṃ अहोसी”ति।a·ho·sī

“amhākaṁ, āvuso, sappi ahosi, telaṁ ahosi, uttaribhaṅgaṁ ahosī”ti.

“We got ghee, oil, and special curries.”
169

मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā पनpa·na भिक्खूbhik·khū एवंe·vaṃ वदन्ति—va·dan·ti

Mettiyabhūmajakā pana bhikkhū evaṁ vadanti—

But the monks Mettiya and Bhūmajaka said,
170

“अम्हाकं,am·hā·kaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so नna किञ्चिkiñ·ci अहोसि—a·ho·si

“amhākaṁ, āvuso, na kiñci ahosi—

“We didn’t get anything
171

पाकतिकंpā·ka·ti·kaṃ यथारन्धंya·thā·ran·dhaṃ कणाजकंka·ṇā·ja·kaṃ बिलङ्गदुतियन्”ति।bi·laṅ·ga·du·ti·yan

pākatikaṁ yathārandhaṁ kaṇājakaṁ bilaṅgadutiyan”ti.

except ordinary food of porridge and broken rice.”
172

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na कल्याणभत्तिकोkal·yā·ṇa·bhat·ti·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa चतुक्कभत्तंca·tuk·ka·bhat·taṃ देतिde·ti निच्चभत्तं।nic·ca·bhat·taṃ

Tena kho pana samayena kalyāṇabhattiko gahapati saṅghassa catukkabhattaṁ deti niccabhattaṁ.

At that time there was a householder who gave a regular meal of fine food to four monks.
173

सोso भत्तग्गेbhat·tag·ge सपुत्तदारोsa·put·ta·dā·ro उपतिट्ठित्वाu·pa·tiṭ·ṭhit·vā परिविसति—pa·ri·vi·sa·ti

So bhattagge saputtadāro upatiṭṭhitvā parivisati—

He made his offering in the dining hall together with his wives and children.
174

अञ्ञेañ·ñe ओदनेनo·da·ne·na पुच्छन्ति,puc·chan·ti अञ्ञेañ·ñe सूपेनsū·pe·na पुच्छन्ति,puc·chan·ti अञ्ञेañ·ñe तेलेनte·le·na पुच्छन्ति,puc·chan·ti अञ्ञेañ·ñe उत्तरिभङ्गेनut·ta·ri·bhaṅ·ge·na पुच्छन्ति।puc·chan·ti

aññe odanena pucchanti, aññe sūpena pucchanti, aññe telena pucchanti, aññe uttaribhaṅgena pucchanti.

Some of them offered rice, some bean curry, some oil, and some special curries.
175

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na कल्याणभत्तिकस्सkal·yā·ṇa·bhat·ti·kas·sa गहपतिनोga·ha·pa·ti·no भत्तंbhat·taṃ स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya मेत्तियभूमजकानंmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ उद्दिट्ठंud·diṭ·ṭhaṃ होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena kalyāṇabhattikassa gahapatino bhattaṁ svātanāya mettiyabhūmajakānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ uddiṭṭhaṁ hoti.

On one occasion the meal to be given by this householder on the following day had been designated to the monks Mettiya and Bhūmajaka.
176

अथa·tha खोkho कल्याणभत्तिकोkal·yā·ṇa·bhat·ti·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti आरामंā·rā·maṃ अगमासिa·ga·mā·si केनचिदेवke·na·ci·de·va करणीयेन।ka·ra·ṇī·ye·na

Atha kho kalyāṇabhattiko gahapati ārāmaṁ agamāsi kenacideva karaṇīyena.

Just then that householder went to the monastery on some business.
177

सोso येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

So yenāyasmā dabbo mallaputto tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

He approached Dabba, bowed, and sat down.
178

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नंni·sin·naṃ खोkho कल्याणभत्तिकंkal·yā·ṇa·bhat·ti·kaṃ गहपतिंga·ha·pa·tiṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सेसिsan·das·se·si समादपेसिsa·mā·da·pe·si समुत्तेजेसिsa·mut·te·je·si सम्पहंसेसि।sam·pa·haṃ·se·si

Ekamantaṁ nisinnaṁ kho kalyāṇabhattikaṁ gahapatiṁ āyasmā dabbo mallaputto dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṁsesi.

Dabba instructed, inspired, and gladdened him with a teaching.
179

अथa·tha खोkho कल्याणभत्तिकोkal·yā·ṇa·bhat·ti·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti आयस्मताā·yas·ma·tā दब्बेनdab·be·na मल्लपुत्तेनmal·la·put·te·na धम्मियाdham·mi·yā कथायka·thā·ya सन्दस्सितोsan·das·si·to समादपितोsa·mā·da·pi·to समुत्तेजितोsa·mut·te·ji·to सम्पहंसितोsam·pa·haṃ·si·to आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho kalyāṇabhattiko gahapati āyasmatā dabbena mallaputtena dhammiyā kathāya sandassito samādapito samuttejito sampahaṁsito āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ etadavoca—

After the talk, he asked Dabba,
180

“कस्स,kas·sa भन्ते,bhan·te अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ घरेgha·re स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तंbhat·taṃ उद्दिट्ठन्”ति?ud·diṭ·ṭhan

“kassa, bhante, amhākaṁ ghare svātanāya bhattaṁ uddiṭṭhan”ti?

“Sir, who has been designated to receive tomorrow’s meal in our house?”
181

“मेत्तियभूमजकानंmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā·naṃ खो,kho गहपति,ga·ha·pa·ti भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ तुम्हाकंtum·hā·kaṃ घरेgha·re स्वातनायsvā·ta·nā·ya भत्तंbhat·taṃ उद्दिट्ठन्”ति।ud·diṭ·ṭhan

“Mettiyabhūmajakānaṁ kho, gahapati, bhikkhūnaṁ tumhākaṁ ghare svātanāya bhattaṁ uddiṭṭhan”ti.

“Mettiya and Bhūmajaka.”
182

अथa·tha खोkho कल्याणभत्तिकोkal·yā·ṇa·bhat·ti·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti अनत्तमनोa·nat·ta·ma·no अहोसि।a·ho·si

Atha kho kalyāṇabhattiko gahapati anattamano ahosi.

He was disappointed,
183

कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma पापभिक्खूpā·pa·bhik·khū अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ घरेgha·re भुञ्जिस्सन्तीतिbhuñ·jis·san·tī·ti घरंgha·raṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā दासिंdā·siṃ आणापेसि—ā·ṇā·pe·si

Kathañhi nāma pāpabhikkhū amhākaṁ ghare bhuñjissantīti gharaṁ gantvā dāsiṁ āṇāpesi—

and thought, “Why should bad monks eat in our house?” After returning to his house, he told a female slave,
184

“ये,ye जे,je स्वेsve भत्तिकाbhat·ti·kā आगच्छन्तिā·gac·chan·ti तेte कोट्ठकेkoṭ·ṭha·ke आसनंā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेत्वाpañ·ña·pet·vā कणाजकेनka·ṇā·ja·ke·na बिलङ्गदुतियेनbi·laṅ·ga·du·ti·ye·na परिविसा”ति।pa·ri·vi·sā

“ye, je, sve bhattikā āgacchanti te koṭṭhake āsanaṁ paññapetvā kaṇājakena bilaṅgadutiyena parivisā”ti.

“For those who are coming for tomorrow’s meal, prepare seats in the gatehouse and serve them broken rice and porridge.”
185

“एवं,e·vaṃ अय्या”तिay·yā खोkho साsā दासीdā·sī कल्याणभत्तिकस्सkal·yā·ṇa·bhat·ti·kas·sa गहपतिनोga·ha·pa·ti·no पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

“Evaṁ, ayyā”ti kho sā dāsī kalyāṇabhattikassa gahapatino paccassosi.

“Yes, sir.”
186

अथa·tha खोkho मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खू—bhik·khū

Atha kho mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū—

The monks Mettiya and Bhūmajaka said to each other,
187

“हिय्योhiy·yo खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ कल्याणभत्तिकस्सkal·yā·ṇa·bhat·ti·kas·sa गहपतिनोga·ha·pa·ti·no भत्तंbhat·taṃ उद्दिट्ठं;ud·diṭ·ṭhaṃ

“hiyyo kho, āvuso, amhākaṁ kalyāṇabhattikassa gahapatino bhattaṁ uddiṭṭhaṁ;

“Yesterday we were designated a meal from that householder who offers fine food.
188

स्वेsve अम्हेam·he कल्याणभत्तिकोkal·yā·ṇa·bhat·ti·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti सपुत्तदारोsa·put·ta·dā·ro उपतिट्ठित्वाu·pa·tiṭ·ṭhit·vā परिविसिस्सति;pa·ri·vi·sis·sa·ti

sve amhe kalyāṇabhattiko gahapati saputtadāro upatiṭṭhitvā parivisissati;

Tomorrow he’ll serve us together with his wives and children.
189

अञ्ञेañ·ñe ओदनेनo·da·ne·na पुच्छिस्सन्ति,puc·chis·san·ti अञ्ञेañ·ñe सूपेनsū·pe·na पुच्छिस्सन्ति,puc·chis·san·ti अञ्ञेañ·ñe तेलेनte·le·na पुच्छिस्सन्ति,puc·chis·san·ti अञ्ञेañ·ñe उत्तरिभङ्गेनut·ta·ri·bhaṅ·ge·na पुच्छिस्सन्ती”ति।puc·chis·san·tī

aññe odanena pucchissanti, aññe sūpena pucchissanti, aññe telena pucchissanti, aññe uttaribhaṅgena pucchissantī”ti.

Some of them will offer us rice, some bean curry, some oil, and some special curries.”
190

तेte तेनेवte·ne·va सोमनस्सेनso·ma·nas·se·na नna चित्तरूपंcit·ta·rū·paṃ रत्तियाrat·ti·yā सुपिंसु।su·piṃ·su

Te teneva somanassena na cittarūpaṁ rattiyā supiṁsu.

And because they were excited, they did not sleep properly that night.
191

अथa·tha खोkho मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū पुब्बण्हसमयंpub·baṇ·ha·sa·ma·yaṃ निवासेत्वाni·vā·set·vā पत्तचीवरमादायpat·ta·cī·va·ra·mā·dā·ya येनye·na कल्याणभत्तिकस्सkal·yā·ṇa·bhat·ti·kas·sa गहपतिनोga·ha·pa·ti·no निवेसनंni·ve·sa·naṃ तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su

Atha kho mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū pubbaṇhasamayaṁ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena kalyāṇabhattikassa gahapatino nivesanaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.

The following morning they robed up, took their bowls and robes, and went to the house of that householder.
192

अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho साsā दासीdā·sī मेत्तियभूमजकेmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū दूरतोवdū·ra·to·va आगच्छन्ते;ā·gac·chan·te

Addasā kho sā dāsī mettiyabhūmajake bhikkhū dūratova āgacchante;

When the female slave saw them coming,
193

दिस्वानdis·vā·na कोट्ठकेkoṭ·ṭha·ke आसनंā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेत्वाpañ·ña·pet·vā मेत्तियभूमजकेmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

disvāna koṭṭhake āsanaṁ paññapetvā mettiyabhūmajake bhikkhū etadavoca—

she prepared seats in the gatehouse and said to them,
194

“निसीदथ,ni·sī·da·tha भन्ते”ति।bhan·te

“nisīdatha, bhante”ti.

“Please sit, venerables.”
195

अथa·tha खोkho मेत्तियभूमजकानंmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho mettiyabhūmajakānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

They thought,
196

“निस्संसयंnis·saṃ·sa·yaṃ खोkho नna तावtā·va भत्तंbhat·taṃ सिद्धंsid·dhaṃ भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti यथाya·thā मयंma·yaṃ कोट्ठकेkoṭ·ṭha·ke निसीदापियामा”ति।ni·sī·dā·pi·yā·mā

“nissaṁsayaṁ kho na tāva bhattaṁ siddhaṁ bhavissati yathā mayaṁ koṭṭhake nisīdāpiyāmā”ti.

“The meal can’t be ready, since we’re given seats in the gatehouse.”
197

अथa·tha खोkho साsā दासीdā·sī कणाजकेनka·ṇā·ja·ke·na बिलङ्गदुतियेनbi·laṅ·ga·du·ti·ye·na उपगञ्छि—u·pa·gañ·chi

Atha kho sā dāsī kaṇājakena bilaṅgadutiyena upagañchi—

She then brought them broken rice and porridge, and said,
198

“भुञ्जथ,bhuñ·ja·tha भन्ते”ति।bhan·te

“bhuñjatha, bhante”ti.

“Eat, sirs.”
199

“मयंma·yaṃ खो,kho भगिनि,bha·gi·ni निच्चभत्तिका”ति।nic·ca·bhat·ti·kā

“Mayaṁ kho, bhagini, niccabhattikā”ti.

“But, sister, we’ve come for the regular meal.”
200

“जानामिjā·nā·mi अय्याay·yā निच्चभत्तिकाति।nic·ca·bhat·ti·kā·ti

“Jānāmi ayyā niccabhattikāti.

“I know.
201

अपिa·pi चाहंcā·haṃ हिय्योवhiy·yo·va गहपतिनाga·ha·pa·ti·nā आणत्ता—ā·ṇat·tā

Api cāhaṁ hiyyova gahapatinā āṇattā—

But yesterday I was told by the head of the household
202

‘ये,ye जे,je स्वेsve भत्तिकाbhat·ti·kā आगच्छन्ति,ā·gac·chan·ti तेte कोट्ठकेkoṭ·ṭha·ke आसनंā·sa·naṃ पञ्ञपेत्वाpañ·ña·pet·vā कणाजकेनka·ṇā·ja·ke·na बिलङ्गदुतियेनbi·laṅ·ga·du·ti·ye·na परिविसा’ति।pa·ri·vi·sā

‘ye, je, sve bhattikā āgacchanti, te koṭṭhake āsanaṁ paññapetvā kaṇājakena bilaṅgadutiyena parivisā’ti.

to serve you like this.
203

भुञ्जथ,bhuñ·ja·tha भन्ते”ति।bhan·te

Bhuñjatha, bhante”ti.

Please eat.”
204

अथa·tha खोkho मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खू—bhik·khū

Atha kho mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū—

They said to each other,
205

“हिय्योhiy·yo खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so कल्याणभत्तिकोkal·yā·ṇa·bhat·ti·ko गहपतिga·ha·pa·ti आरामंā·rā·maṃ अगमासिa·ga·mā·si दब्बस्सdab·bas·sa मल्लपुत्तस्सmal·la·put·tas·sa सन्तिके।san·ti·ke

“hiyyo kho, āvuso, kalyāṇabhattiko gahapati ārāmaṁ agamāsi dabbassa mallaputtassa santike.

“Yesterday this householder came to the monastery and spoke with Dabba.
206

निस्संसयंnis·saṃ·sa·yaṃ खोkho मयंma·yaṃ दब्बेनdab·be·na मल्लपुत्तेनmal·la·put·te·na गहपतिनोga·ha·pa·ti·no अन्तरेan·ta·re परिभिन्ना”ति।pa·ri·bhin·nā

Nissaṁsayaṁ kho mayaṁ dabbena mallaputtena gahapatino antare paribhinnā”ti.

Dabba must be responsible for this split between the householder and us.”
207

तेte तेनेवte·ne·va दोमनस्सेनdo·ma·nas·se·na नna चित्तरूपंcit·ta·rū·paṃ भुञ्जिंसु।bhuñ·jiṃ·su

Te teneva domanassena na cittarūpaṁ bhuñjiṁsu.

And because they were dejected, they did not eat as much as they had intended.
208

अथa·tha खोkho मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū पच्छाभत्तंpac·chā·bhat·taṃ पिण्डपातपटिक्कन्ताpiṇ·ḍa·pā·ta·pa·ṭik·kan·tā आरामंā·rā·maṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā पत्तचीवरंpat·ta·cī·va·raṃ पटिसामेत्वाpa·ṭi·sā·met·vā बहारामकोट्ठकेba·hā·rā·ma·koṭ·ṭha·ke सङ्घाटिपल्लत्थिकायsaṅ·ghā·ṭi·pal·lat·thi·kā·ya निसीदिंसुni·sī·diṃ·su तुण्हीभूताtuṇ·hī·bhū·tā मङ्कुभूताmaṅ·ku·bhū·tā पत्तक्खन्धाpat·tak·khan·dhā अधोमुखाa·dho·mu·khā पज्झायन्ताpaj·jhā·yan·tā अप्पटिभाना।ap·pa·ṭi·bhā·nā

Atha kho mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū pacchābhattaṁ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantā ārāmaṁ gantvā pattacīvaraṁ paṭisāmetvā bahārāmakoṭṭhake saṅghāṭipallatthikāya nisīdiṁsu tuṇhībhūtā maṅkubhūtā pattakkhandhā adhomukhā pajjhāyantā appaṭibhānā.

When they had eaten their meal and returned from almsround, they put their bowls and robes away and squatted on their heels outside the monastery gatehouse, using their upper robes as a back-and-knee strap. They were silent and humiliated, with shoulders drooping and heads down, glum and speechless.
209

अथa·tha खोkho मेत्तियाmet·ti·yā भिक्खुनीbhik·khu·nī येनye·na मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā मेत्तियभूमजकेmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Atha kho mettiyā bhikkhunī yena mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā mettiyabhūmajake bhikkhū etadavoca—

Just then the nun Mettiyā came to them and said,
210

“वन्दामि,van·dā·mi अय्या”ति।ay·yā

“vandāmi, ayyā”ti.

“My respectful greetings to you, venerables.”
211

एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū नालपिंसु।nā·la·piṃ·su

Evaṁ vutte, mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū nālapiṁsu.

But they did not respond.
212

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho …पे…pe

Dutiyampi kho …pe…

A second time and
213

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho मेत्तियाmet·ti·yā भिक्खुनीbhik·khu·nī मेत्तियभूमजकेmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·ke भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

tatiyampi kho mettiyā bhikkhunī mettiyabhūmajake bhikkhū etadavoca—

a third time she said the same thing,
214

“वन्दामि,van·dā·mi अय्या”ति।ay·yā

“vandāmi, ayyā”ti.

(Pāli only)
215

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū नालपिंसु।nā·la·piṃ·su

Tatiyampi kho mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū nālapiṁsu.

but they still did not respond.
216

“क्याहंkyā·haṃ अय्यानंay·yā·naṃ अपरज्झामि?a·pa·raj·jhā·mi

“Kyāhaṁ ayyānaṁ aparajjhāmi?

“Have I done something wrong?
217

किस्सkis·sa मंmaṃ अय्याay·yā नालपन्ती”ति?nā·la·pan·tī

Kissa maṁ ayyā nālapantī”ti?

Why don’t you respond?”
218

“तथाta·thā हिhi पनpa·na त्वं,tvaṃ भगिनि,bha·gi·ni अम्हेam·he दब्बेनdab·be·na मल्लपुत्तेनmal·la·put·te·na विहेठियमानेvi·he·ṭhi·ya·mā·ne अज्झुपेक्खसी”ति?aj·jhu·pek·kha·sī

“Tathā hi pana tvaṁ, bhagini, amhe dabbena mallaputtena viheṭhiyamāne ajjhupekkhasī”ti?

“It’s because we’ve been badly treated by Dabba the Mallian, and you’re not taking an interest.”
219

“क्याहं,kyā·haṃ अय्या,ay·yā करोमी”ति?ka·ro·mī

“Kyāhaṁ, ayyā, karomī”ti?

“But what can I do?”
220

“सचेsa·ce खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ भगिनि,bha·gi·ni इच्छेय्यासि,ic·chey·yā·si अज्जेवaj·je·va भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ नासापेय्या”ति।nā·sā·pey·yā

“Sace kho tvaṁ, bhagini, iccheyyāsi, ajjeva bhagavā āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ nāsāpeyyā”ti.

“If you like, you could make the Buddha expel Dabba.”
221

“क्याहं,kyā·haṃ अय्या,ay·yā करोमि?ka·ro·mi

“Kyāhaṁ, ayyā, karomi?

(Pāli only)
222

किंkiṃ मयाma·yā सक्काsak·kā कातुन्”ति?kā·tun

Kiṁ mayā sakkā kātun”ti?

“And how can I do that?”
223

“एहिe·hi त्वं,tvaṃ भगिनि,bha·gi·ni येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कम,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·ma उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदेहि—va·de·hi

“Ehi tvaṁ, bhagini, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkama, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ evaṁ vadehi—

“Go to the Buddha and say,
224

‘इदं,i·daṃ भन्ते,bhan·te नच्छन्नंnac·chan·naṃ नप्पतिरूपं,nap·pa·ti·rū·paṃ यायं,yā·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te दिसाdi·sā अभयाa·bha·yā अनीतिकाa·nī·ti·kā अनुपद्दवाa·nu·pad·da·vā सायंsā·yaṃ दिसाdi·sā सभयाsa·bha·yā सईतिकाsa·ī·ti·kā सउपद्दवा;sa·u·pad·da·vā

‘idaṁ, bhante, nacchannaṁ nappatirūpaṁ, yāyaṁ, bhante, disā abhayā anītikā anupaddavā sāyaṁ disā sabhayā saītikā saupaddavā;

‘Sir, this isn’t proper or appropriate. There’s fear, distress, and oppression in this district, where none of these should exist.
225

यतोya·to निवातंni·vā·taṃ ततोta·to सवातं;sa·vā·taṃ

yato nivātaṁ tato savātaṁ;

It’s windy where it should be calm.
226

उदकंu·da·kaṃ मञ्ञेmañ·ñe आदित्तं;ā·dit·taṃ

udakaṁ maññe ādittaṁ;

It’s as if water is burning.
227

अय्येनम्हिay·ye·nam·hi दब्बेनdab·be·na मल्लपुत्तेनmal·la·put·te·na दूसिता’”ति।dū·si·tā

ayyenamhi dabbena mallaputtena dūsitā’”ti.

Venerable Dabba the Mallian has raped me.’”
228

“एवं,e·vaṃ अय्या”तिay·yā खोkho मेत्तियाmet·ti·yā भिक्खुनीbhik·khu·nī मेत्तियभूमजकानंmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमि,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si

“Evaṁ, ayyā”ti kho mettiyā bhikkhunī mettiyabhūmajakānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ paṭissutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi.

Saying, “Alright, venerables,” she went to the Buddha, bowed,
229

एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठिताṭhi·tā खोkho मेत्तियाmet·ti·yā भिक्खुनीbhik·khu·nī भगवन्तंbha·ga·van·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Ekamantaṁ ṭhitā kho mettiyā bhikkhunī bhagavantaṁ etadavoca—

and repeated
230

“इदं,i·daṃ भन्ते,bhan·te नच्छन्नंnac·chan·naṃ नप्पतिरूपं,nap·pa·ti·rū·paṃ यायं,yā·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te दिसाdi·sā अभयाa·bha·yā अनीतिकाa·nī·ti·kā अनुपद्दवाa·nu·pad·da·vā सायंsā·yaṃ दिसाdi·sā सभयाsa·bha·yā सईतिकाsa·ī·ti·kā सउपद्दवा;sa·u·pad·da·vā

“idaṁ, bhante, nacchannaṁ nappatirūpaṁ, yāyaṁ, bhante, disā abhayā anītikā anupaddavā sāyaṁ disā sabhayā saītikā saupaddavā;

what she had been told to say.
231

यतोya·to निवातंni·vā·taṃ ततोta·to सवातं;sa·vā·taṃ

yato nivātaṁ tato savātaṁ;

(Pāli only)
232

उदकंu·da·kaṃ मञ्ञेmañ·ñe आदित्तं;ā·dit·taṃ

udakaṁ maññe ādittaṁ;

(Pāli only)
233

अय्येनम्हिay·ye·nam·hi दब्बेनdab·be·na मल्लपुत्तेनmal·la·put·te·na दूसिता”ति।dū·si·tā

ayyenamhi dabbena mallaputtena dūsitā”ti.

(Pāli only)
234

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ निदानेni·dā·ne एतस्मिंe·tas·miṃ पकरणेpa·ka·ra·ṇe भिक्खुसङ्घंbhik·khu·saṅ·ghaṃ सन्निपातापेत्वाsan·ni·pā·tā·pet·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ पटिपुच्छि—pa·ṭi·puc·chi

Atha kho bhagavā etasmiṁ nidāne etasmiṁ pakaraṇe bhikkhusaṅghaṁ sannipātāpetvā āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ paṭipucchi—

Soon afterwards the Buddha had the Sangha gathered and questioned Dabba:
235

“सरसिsa·ra·si त्वं,tvaṃ दब्ब,dab·ba एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ कत्ताkat·tā यथायंya·thā·yaṃ भिक्खुनीbhik·khu·nī आहा”ति?ā·hā

“sarasi tvaṁ, dabba, evarūpaṁ kattā yathāyaṁ bhikkhunī āhā”ti?

“Dabba, do you remember doing as the nun Mettiyā says?”
236

“यथाya·thā मं,maṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā जानाती”ति।jā·nā·tī

“Yathā maṁ, bhante, bhagavā jānātī”ti.

“Sir, you know what I’m like.”
237

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Dutiyampi kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ etadavoca—

A second
238

“सरसिsa·ra·si त्वं,tvaṃ दब्ब,dab·ba एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ कत्ताkat·tā यथायंya·thā·yaṃ भिक्खुनीbhik·khu·nī आहा”ति?ā·hā

“sarasi tvaṁ, dabba, evarūpaṁ kattā yathāyaṁ bhikkhunī āhā”ti?

(Pāli only)
239

“यथाya·thā मं,maṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā जानाती”ति।jā·nā·tī

“Yathā maṁ, bhante, bhagavā jānātī”ti.

(Pāli only)
240

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ एतदवोच—e·ta·da·vo·ca

Tatiyampi kho bhagavā āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ etadavoca—

and a third time the Buddha asked
241

“सरसिsa·ra·si त्वं,tvaṃ दब्ब,dab·ba एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ कत्ताkat·tā यथायंya·thā·yaṃ भिक्खुनीbhik·khu·nī आहा”ति?ā·hā

“sarasi tvaṁ, dabba, evarūpaṁ kattā yathāyaṁ bhikkhunī āhā”ti?

the same question
242

“यथाya·thā मं,maṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भगवाbha·ga·vā जानाती”ति।jā·nā·tī

“Yathā maṁ, bhante, bhagavā jānātī”ti.

and got the same response.
243

“नna खो,kho दब्ब,dab·ba दब्बाdab·bā एवंe·vaṃ निब्बेठेन्ति।nib·be·ṭhen·ti

“Na kho, dabba, dabbā evaṁ nibbeṭhenti.

He then said, “Dabba, the Dabbas don’t give such evasive answers.
244

सचेsa·ce तयाta·yā कतंka·taṃ कतन्तिka·tan·ti वदेहि।va·de·hi

Sace tayā kataṁ katanti vadehi.

If it was done by you, say so;
245

सचेsa·ce अकतंa·ka·taṃ अकतन्तिa·ka·tan·ti वदेही”ति।va·de·hī

Sace akataṁ akatanti vadehī”ti.

if it wasn’t, then say that.”
246

“यतोहं,ya·to·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te जातोjā·to नाभिजानामिnā·bhi·jā·nā·mi सुपिनन्तेनपिsu·pi·nan·te·na·pi मेथुनंme·thu·naṃ धम्मंdham·maṃ पटिसेविता,pa·ṭi·se·vi·tā पगेवpa·ge·va जागरो”ति।jā·ga·ro

“Yatohaṁ, bhante, jāto nābhijānāmi supinantenapi methunaṁ dhammaṁ paṭisevitā, pageva jāgaro”ti.

“Since I was born, sir, I don’t recall having sexual intercourse even in a dream, let alone when awake.”
247

अथa·tha खोkho भगवाbha·ga·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi—

The Buddha addressed the monks:
248

“तेनte·na हि,hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मेत्तियंmet·ti·yaṃ भिक्खुनिंbhik·khu·niṃ नासेथ।nā·se·tha

“tena hi, bhikkhave, mettiyaṁ bhikkhuniṁ nāsetha.

“Well then, monks, expel the nun Mettiyā,
249

इमेi·me चca भिक्खूbhik·khū अनुयुञ्जथा”ति।a·nu·yuñ·ja·thā

Ime ca bhikkhū anuyuñjathā”ti.

and call these monks to account.”
250

इदंi·daṃ वत्वाvat·vā भगवाbha·ga·vā उट्ठायासनाuṭ·ṭhā·yā·sa·nā विहारंvi·hā·raṃ पाविसि।pā·vi·si

Idaṁ vatvā bhagavā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṁ pāvisi.

The Buddha then got up from his seat and entered his dwelling.
251

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū मेत्तियंmet·ti·yaṃ भिक्खुनिंbhik·khu·niṃ नासेसुं।nā·se·suṃ

Atha kho te bhikkhū mettiyaṁ bhikkhuniṁ nāsesuṁ.

When the monks had expelled the nun Mettiyā,
252

अथa·tha खोkho मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

Atha kho mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū te bhikkhū etadavocuṁ—

the monks Mettiya and Bhūmajaka said to them,
253

“मावुसो,mā·vu·so मेत्तियंmet·ti·yaṃ भिक्खुनिंbhik·khu·niṃ नासेथ,nā·se·tha नna साsā किञ्चिkiñ·ci अपरज्झति;a·pa·raj·jha·ti

“māvuso, mettiyaṁ bhikkhuniṁ nāsetha, na sā kiñci aparajjhati;

“Don’t expel the nun Mettiyā; she hasn’t done anything wrong.
254

अम्हेहिam·he·hi साsā उस्साहिताus·sā·hi·tā कुपितेहिku·pi·te·hi अनत्तमनेहिa·nat·ta·ma·ne·hi चावनाधिप्पायेही”ति।cā·va·nā·dhip·pā·ye·hī

amhehi sā ussāhitā kupitehi anattamanehi cāvanādhippāyehī”ti.

She was urged on by us. We were angry and displeased, and trying to make Dabba give up the monastic life.”
255

“किंkiṃ पनpa·na तुम्हे,tum·he आवुसो,ā·vu·so आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ अमूलिकायa·mū·li·kā·ya सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā अनुद्धंसेथा”ति?a·nud·dhaṃ·se·thā

“Kiṁ pana tumhe, āvuso, āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṁsethā”ti?

“But did you groundlessly charge Venerable Dabba with failure in morality?”
256

“एवमावुसो”ति।e·va·mā·vu·so

“Evamāvuso”ti.

“Yes.”
257

येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पिच्छाap·pic·chā …पे…pe तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Ye te bhikkhū appicchā …pe… te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

The monks of few desires … complained and criticized them,
258

“कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ अमूलिकायa·mū·li·kā·ya सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā अनुद्धंसेस्सन्ती”ति।a·nud·dhaṃ·ses·san·tī

“kathañhi nāma mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṁsessantī”ti.

“How could the monks Mettiya and Bhūmajaka groundlessly charge Venerable Dabba with failure in morality?”
259

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुंā·ro·ce·suṃ …पे…pe

Atha kho te bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ …pe…

They then told the Buddha. …
260

“सच्चंsac·caṃ किर,ki·ra भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ अमूलिकायa·mū·li·kā·ya सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā अनुद्धंसेन्ती”ति?a·nud·dhaṃ·sen·tī

“saccaṁ kira, bhikkhave, mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṁsentī”ti?

“Is it true, monks, that you did this?”
261

“सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”तिbha·ga·vā …पे…pe

“Saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti …pe…

“It’s true, sir.” …
262

विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā …पे…pe

vigarahitvā …pe…

After rebuking them …
263

धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

he gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
264

“तेनte·na हि,hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सङ्घोsaṅ·gho दब्बस्सdab·bas·sa मल्लपुत्तस्सmal·la·put·tas·sa सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तस्सsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·tas·sa सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ देतु।de·tu

“Tena hi, bhikkhave, saṅgho dabbassa mallaputtassa sativepullappattassa sativinayaṁ detu.

“Well then, because of his great clarity of memory, grant resolution through recollection to Dabba the Mallian.
265

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दातब्बो—dā·tab·bo

Evañca pana, bhikkhave, dātabbo—

And it should be granted like this.
266

तेन,te·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दब्बेनdab·be·na मल्लपुत्तेनmal·la·put·te·na सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ उपसङ्कमित्वा,u·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एकंसंe·kaṃ·saṃ उत्तरासङ्गंut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ करित्वा,ka·rit·vā वुड्ढानंvuḍ·ḍhā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पादेpā·de वन्दित्वा,van·dit·vā उक्कुटिकंuk·ku·ṭi·kaṃ निसीदित्वा,ni·sī·dit·vā अञ्जलिंañ·ja·liṃ पग्गहेत्वा,pag·ga·het·vā एवमस्सe·va·mas·sa वचनीयो—va·ca·nī·yo

tena, bhikkhave, dabbena mallaputtena saṅghaṁ upasaṅkamitvā, ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā, vuḍḍhānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ pāde vanditvā, ukkuṭikaṁ nisīditvā, añjaliṁ paggahetvā, evamassa vacanīyo—

Dabba should approach the Sangha, arrange his upper robe over one shoulder, pay respect at the feet of the senior monks, squat on his heels, raise his joined palms, and say:
267

‘इमेi·me मं,maṃ भन्ते,bhan·te मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū अमूलिकायa·mū·li·kā·ya सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā अनुद्धंसेन्ति।a·nud·dhaṃ·sen·ti

‘ime maṁ, bhante, mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṁsenti.

‘Venerables, these monks Mettiya and Bhūmajaka are groundlessly charging me with failure in morality.
268

सोहं,so·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तोsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·to सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ याचामी’ति।yā·cā·mī

Sohaṁ, bhante, sativepullappatto saṅghaṁ sativinayaṁ yācāmī’ti.

Because of my great clarity of memory, I ask the Sangha for resolution through recollection.
269

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi याचितब्बो।yā·ci·tab·bo

Dutiyampi yācitabbo.

Venerables, these monks Mettiya and Bhūmajaka are groundlessly charging me with failure in morality. Because of my great clarity of memory, for the second time, I ask the Sangha for resolution through recollection.
270

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi याचितब्बो—yā·ci·tab·bo

Tatiyampi yācitabbo—

(Pāli only)
271

‘इमेi·me मं,maṃ भन्ते,bhan·te मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū अमूलिकायa·mū·li·kā·ya सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā अनुद्धंसेन्ति।a·nud·dhaṃ·sen·ti

‘ime maṁ, bhante, mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṁsenti.

Venerables, these monks Mettiya and Bhūmajaka are groundlessly charging me with failure in morality.
272

सोहंso·haṃ सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तोsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·to ततियम्पि,ta·ti·yam·pi भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ याचामी’ति।yā·cā·mī

Sohaṁ sativepullappatto tatiyampi, bhante, saṅghaṁ sativinayaṁ yācāmī’ti.

Because of my great clarity of memory, for the third time, I ask the Sangha for resolution through recollection.’
273

ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:
274

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
275

इमेi·me मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ अमूलिकायa·mū·li·kā·ya सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā अनुद्धंसेन्ति।a·nud·dhaṃ·sen·ti

Ime mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṁsenti.

These monks Mettiya and Bhūmajaka are groundlessly charging Venerable Dabba the Mallian with failure in morality.
276

आयस्माā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तोsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·to सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ याचति।yā·ca·ti

Āyasmā dabbo mallaputto sativepullappatto saṅghaṁ sativinayaṁ yācati.

Because of Venerable Dabba the Mallian’s great clarity of memory, he is asking the Sangha for resolution through recollection.
277

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to दब्बस्सdab·bas·sa मल्लपुत्तस्सmal·la·put·tas·sa सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तस्सsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·tas·sa सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ ददेय्य।da·dey·ya

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho āyasmato dabbassa mallaputtassa sativepullappattassa sativinayaṁ dadeyya.

If the Sangha is ready, then, because of Venerable Dabba the Mallian’s great clarity of memory, the Sangha should grant him resolution through recollection.
278

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
279

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
280

इमेi·me मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ अमूलिकायa·mū·li·kā·ya सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā अनुद्धंसेन्ति।a·nud·dhaṃ·sen·ti

Ime mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṁsenti.

These monks Mettiya and Bhūmajaka are groundlessly charging Venerable Dabba the Mallian with failure in morality.
281

आयस्माā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तोsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·to सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ याचति।yā·ca·ti

Āyasmā dabbo mallaputto sativepullappatto saṅghaṁ sativinayaṁ yācati.

Because of Venerable Dabba the Mallian’s great clarity of memory, he is asking the Sangha for resolution through recollection.
282

सङ्घोsaṅ·gho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to दब्बस्सdab·bas·sa मल्लपुत्तस्सmal·la·put·tas·sa सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तस्सsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·tas·sa सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ देति।de·ti

Saṅgho āyasmato dabbassa mallaputtassa sativepullappattassa sativinayaṁ deti.

Because of Venerable Dabba the Mallian’s great clarity of memory, the Sangha grants him resolution through recollection.
283

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to दब्बस्सdab·bas·sa मल्लपुत्तस्सmal·la·put·tas·sa सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तस्सsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·tas·sa सतिविनयस्सsa·ti·vi·na·yas·sa दानं,dā·naṃ सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati āyasmato dabbassa mallaputtassa sativepullappattassa sativinayassa dānaṁ, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves, because of Venerable Dabba the Mallian’s great clarity of memory, of granting him resolution through recollection should remain silent.
284

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
285

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi …पे…pe

Dutiyampi etamatthaṁ vadāmi …pe…

For the second time, I speak on this matter. …
286

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ वदामि—va·dā·mi

tatiyampi etamatthaṁ vadāmi—

For the third time, I speak on this matter.
287

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
288

इमेi·me मेत्तियभूमजकाmet·ti·ya·bhū·ma·ja·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ दब्बंdab·baṃ मल्लपुत्तंmal·la·put·taṃ अमूलिकायa·mū·li·kā·ya सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā अनुद्धंसेन्ति।a·nud·dhaṃ·sen·ti

Ime mettiyabhūmajakā bhikkhū āyasmantaṁ dabbaṁ mallaputtaṁ amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṁsenti.

These monks Mettiya and Bhūmajaka are groundlessly charging Venerable Dabba the Mallian with failure in morality.
289

आयस्माā·yas·mā दब्बोdab·bo मल्लपुत्तोmal·la·put·to सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तोsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·to सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ याचति।yā·ca·ti

Āyasmā dabbo mallaputto sativepullappatto saṅghaṁ sativinayaṁ yācati.

Because of Venerable Dabba the Mallian’s great clarity of memory, he is asking the Sangha for resolution through recollection.
290

सङ्घोsaṅ·gho आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to दब्बस्सdab·bas·sa मल्लपुत्तस्सmal·la·put·tas·sa सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तस्सsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·tas·sa सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ देति।de·ti

Saṅgho āyasmato dabbassa mallaputtassa sativepullappattassa sativinayaṁ deti.

Because of Venerable Dabba the Mallian’s great clarity of memory, the Sangha grants him resolution through recollection.
291

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to दब्बस्सdab·bas·sa मल्लपुत्तस्सmal·la·put·tas·sa सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तस्सsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·tas·sa सतिविनयस्सsa·ti·vi·na·yas·sa दानं,dā·naṃ सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati āyasmato dabbassa mallaputtassa sativepullappattassa sativinayassa dānaṁ, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves, because of Venerable Dabba the Mallian’s great clarity of memory, of granting him resolution through recollection should remain silent.
292

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
293

दिन्नोdin·no सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na आयस्मतोā·yas·ma·to दब्बस्सdab·bas·sa मल्लपुत्तस्सmal·la·put·tas·sa सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तस्सsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·tas·sa सतिविनयो।sa·ti·vi·na·yo

Dinno saṅghena āyasmato dabbassa mallaputtassa sativepullappattassa sativinayo.

Because of Venerable Dabba the Mallian’s great clarity of memory, the Sangha has granted him resolution through recollection.
294

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’
295

पञ्चिमानि,pañ·ci·mā·ni भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve धम्मिकानिdham·mi·kā·ni सतिविनयस्सsa·ti·vi·na·yas·sa दानानि।dā·nā·ni

Pañcimāni, bhikkhave, dhammikāni sativinayassa dānāni.

There are five factors for the legitimate granting of resolution through recollection:
296

सुद्धोsud·dho होतिho·ti भिक्खुbhik·khu अनापत्तिको,a·nā·pat·ti·ko अनुवदन्तिa·nu·va·dan·ti चca नं,naṃ याचतिyā·ca·ti च,ca तस्सtas·sa सङ्घोsaṅ·gho सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ देतिde·ti धम्मेनdham·me·na समग्गेन—sa·mag·ge·na

Suddho hoti bhikkhu anāpattiko, anuvadanti ca naṁ, yācati ca, tassa saṅgho sativinayaṁ deti dhammena samaggena—

the monk is pure and free of offenses; he has been accused; he asks for resolution through recollection; the Sangha grants him resolution through recollection; the legal procedure is legitimate and done by a unanimous assembly.”
297

इमानिi·mā·ni खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चpañ·ca धम्मिकानिdham·mi·kā·ni सतिविनयस्सsa·ti·vi·na·yas·sa दानानी”ति।dā·nā·nī

imāni kho, bhikkhave, pañca dhammikāni sativinayassa dānānī”ti.

(Pāli only)
298

3। अमूळ्हविनयa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·ya

3. Amūḷhavinaya

3. Resolution because of past insanity
299

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na गग्गोgag·go भिक्खुbhik·khu उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko होति,ho·ti चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

Tena kho pana samayena gaggo bhikkhu ummattako hoti, cittavipariyāsakato.

At one time the monk Gagga was insane and suffering from psychosis.
300

तेनte·na उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ होतिho·ti भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ hoti bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of this, he did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
301

भिक्खूbhik·khū गग्गंgag·gaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na अज्झाचिण्णेनaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇe·na आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā चोदेन्ति—co·den·ti

Bhikkhū gaggaṁ bhikkhuṁ ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena ajjhāciṇṇena āpattiyā codenti—

The monks accused him of an offense, saying,
302

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti?

“Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?”
303

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

(Pāli only)
304

“अहंa·haṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिंa·ho·siṃ चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

“ahaṁ kho, āvuso, ummattako ahosiṁ cittavipariyāsakato.

“I was insane and suffering from psychosis.
305

तेनte·na मेme उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena me ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, I did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
306

नाहंnā·haṃ तंtaṃ सरामि।sa·rā·mi

Nāhaṁ taṁ sarāmi.

I don’t remember it.
307

मूळ्हेनmū·ḷhe·na मेme एतंe·taṃ कतन्”ति।ka·tan

Mūḷhena me etaṁ katan”ti.

I did it because I was insane.”
308

एवम्पिe·vam·pi नंnaṃ वुच्चमानाvuc·ca·mā·nā चोदेन्तेव—co·den·te·va

Evampi naṁ vuccamānā codenteva—

But they kept on accusing him
309

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti?

in the same way.
310

येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पिच्छाap·pic·chā …पे…pe तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Ye te bhikkhū appicchā …pe… te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

The monks of few desires … complained and criticized them,
311

“कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma भिक्खूbhik·khū गग्गंgag·gaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na अज्झाचिण्णेनaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇe·na आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā चोदेस्सन्ति—co·des·san·ti

“kathañhi nāma bhikkhū gaggaṁ bhikkhuṁ ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena ajjhāciṇṇena āpattiyā codessanti—

“How can these monks keep on accusing Gagga
312

‘सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता’ति।ā·paj·ji·tā

‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’ti.

(Pāli only)
313

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

when he says
314

‘अहंa·haṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिंa·ho·siṃ चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

‘ahaṁ kho, āvuso, ummattako ahosiṁ cittavipariyāsakato.

he was insane?”
315

तेनte·na मेme उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena me ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

(Pāli only)
316

नाहंnā·haṃ तंtaṃ सरामि।sa·rā·mi

Nāhaṁ taṁ sarāmi.

(Pāli only)
317

मूळ्हेनmū·ḷhe·na मेme एतंe·taṃ कतन्’ति।ka·tan

Mūḷhena me etaṁ katan’ti.

(Pāli only)
318

एवम्पिe·vam·pi नंnaṃ वुच्चमानाvuc·ca·mā·nā चोदेन्तेव—co·den·te·va

Evampi naṁ vuccamānā codenteva—

(Pāli only)
319

‘सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता’”ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’”ti?

(Pāli only)
320

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुंā·ro·ce·suṃ …पे…pe

Atha kho te bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ …pe…

They told the Buddha. …
321

“सच्चंsac·caṃ किर,ki·ra भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…pe

“saccaṁ kira, bhikkhave …pe…

He said, “Is it true, monks, that these monks are doing this?”
322

सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”तिbha·ga·vā …पे…pe

saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti …pe…

“It’s true, sir.” …
323

विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā …पे…pe

vigarahitvā …pe…

After rebuking them …
324

धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

he gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
325

“तेनte·na हि,hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सङ्घोsaṅ·gho गग्गस्सgag·gas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no अमूळ्हस्सa·mū·ḷhas·sa अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ देतु।de·tu

“Tena hi, bhikkhave, saṅgho gaggassa bhikkhuno amūḷhassa amūḷhavinayaṁ detu.

“Well then, since he’s now sane, grant the monk Gagga resolution because of past insanity.
326

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दातब्बो—dā·tab·bo

Evañca pana, bhikkhave, dātabbo—

And it should be granted like this.
327

तेन,te·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve गग्गेनgag·ge·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ उपसङ्कमित्वा,u·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एकंसंe·kaṃ·saṃ उत्तरासङ्गंut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ करित्वा,ka·rit·vā वुड्ढानंvuḍ·ḍhā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पादेpā·de वन्दित्वा,van·dit·vā उक्कुटिकंuk·ku·ṭi·kaṃ निसीदित्वा,ni·sī·dit·vā अञ्जलिंañ·ja·liṃ पग्गहेत्वा,pag·ga·het·vā एवमस्सe·va·mas·sa वचनीयो—va·ca·nī·yo

tena, bhikkhave, gaggena bhikkhunā saṅghaṁ upasaṅkamitvā, ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā, vuḍḍhānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ pāde vanditvā, ukkuṭikaṁ nisīditvā, añjaliṁ paggahetvā, evamassa vacanīyo—

The monk Gagga should approach the Sangha, arrange his upper robe over one shoulder, pay respect at the feet of the senior monks, squat on his heels, raise his joined palms, and say:
328

‘अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिंa·ho·siṃ चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

‘ahaṁ, bhante, ummattako ahosiṁ cittavipariyāsakato.

‘Venerables, I’ve been insane and suffering from psychosis.
329

तेनte·na मेme उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena me ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, I did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
330

मंmaṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na अज्झाचिण्णेनaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇe·na आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā चोदेन्ति—co·den·ti

Maṁ bhikkhū ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena ajjhāciṇṇena āpattiyā codenti—

The monks accused me of an offense, saying,
331

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti?

“Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?”
332

त्याहंtyā·haṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदामि—va·dā·mi

Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi—

I replied,
333

“अहंa·haṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिंa·ho·siṃ चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

“ahaṁ kho, āvuso, ummattako ahosiṁ cittavipariyāsakato.

“I was insane and suffering from psychosis.
334

तेनte·na मेme उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena me ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, I did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
335

नाहंnā·haṃ तंtaṃ सरामि।sa·rā·mi

Nāhaṁ taṁ sarāmi.

I don’t remember it.
336

मूळ्हेनmū·ḷhe·na मेme एतंe·taṃ कतन्”ति।ka·tan

Mūḷhena me etaṁ katan”ti.

I did it because I was insane.”
337

एवम्पिe·vam·pi मंmaṃ वुच्चमानाvuc·ca·mā·nā चोदेन्तेव—co·den·te·va

Evampi maṁ vuccamānā codenteva—

But they kept on accusing me
338

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti?

in the same way.
339

सोहं,so·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अमूळ्होa·mū·ḷho सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ याचामी’ति।yā·cā·mī

Sohaṁ, bhante, amūḷho saṅghaṁ amūḷhavinayaṁ yācāmī’ti.

Because I’m now sane, I ask the Sangha for resolution because of past insanity.’
340

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi याचितब्बो।yā·ci·tab·bo

Dutiyampi yācitabbo.

And he should ask a second
341

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi याचितब्बो—yā·ci·tab·bo

Tatiyampi yācitabbo—

and a third time:
342

‘अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिंa·ho·siṃ चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

‘ahaṁ, bhante, ummattako ahosiṁ cittavipariyāsakato.

‘Venerables, I’ve been insane and suffering from psychosis.
343

तेनte·na मेme उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena me ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, I did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
344

मंmaṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na अज्झाचिण्णेनaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇe·na आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā चोदेन्ति—co·den·ti

Maṁ bhikkhū ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena ajjhāciṇṇena āpattiyā codenti—

The monks accused me of an offense, saying,
345

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti?

“Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?”
346

त्याहंtyā·haṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदामि—va·dā·mi

Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi—

I replied,
347

“अहंa·haṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिंa·ho·siṃ चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

“ahaṁ kho, āvuso, ummattako ahosiṁ cittavipariyāsakato.

“I was insane and suffering from psychosis.
348

तेनte·na मेme उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena me ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, I did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
349

नाहंnā·haṃ तंtaṃ सरामिsa·rā·mi मूळ्हेनmū·ḷhe·na मेme एतंe·taṃ कतन्”ति।ka·tan

Nāhaṁ taṁ sarāmi mūḷhena me etaṁ katan”ti.

I don’t remember it. I did it because I was insane.”
350

एवम्पिe·vam·pi मंmaṃ वुच्चमानाvuc·ca·mā·nā चोदेन्तेव—co·den·te·va

Evampi maṁ vuccamānā codenteva—

But they kept on accusing me
351

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti?

in the same way.
352

सोहंso·haṃ अमूळ्होa·mū·ḷho ततियम्पि,ta·ti·yam·pi भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ याचामी’ति।yā·cā·mī

Sohaṁ amūḷho tatiyampi, bhante, saṅghaṁ amūḷhavinayaṁ yācāmī’ti.

Because I’m now sane, for the third time, I ask the Sangha for resolution because of past insanity.’
353

ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:
354

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
355

अयंa·yaṃ गग्गोgag·go भिक्खुbhik·khu उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिa·ho·si चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

Ayaṁ gaggo bhikkhu ummattako ahosi cittavipariyāsakato.

The monk Gagga has been insane and suffering from psychosis.
356

तेनte·na उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that insanity and psychosis, he did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
357

भिक्खूbhik·khū गग्गंgag·gaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na अज्झाचिण्णेनaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇe·na आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā चोदेन्ति—co·den·ti

Bhikkhū gaggaṁ bhikkhuṁ ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena ajjhāciṇṇena āpattiyā codenti—

Because of that insanity and psychosis, the monks accused the monk Gagga of an offense, saying,
358

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti?

“Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?”
359

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He replied,
360

“अहंa·haṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिंa·ho·siṃ चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

“ahaṁ kho, āvuso, ummattako ahosiṁ cittavipariyāsakato.

“I was insane and suffering from psychosis.
361

तेनte·na मेme उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena me ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that insanity and psychosis, I did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
362

नाहंnā·haṃ तंtaṃ सरामि,sa·rā·mi मूळ्हेनmū·ḷhe·na मेme एतंe·taṃ कतन्”ति।ka·tan

Nāhaṁ taṁ sarāmi, mūḷhena me etaṁ katan”ti.

I don’t remember it. I did it because I was insane.”
363

एवम्पिe·vam·pi नंnaṃ वुच्चमानाvuc·ca·mā·nā चोदेन्तेव—co·den·te·va

Evampi naṁ vuccamānā codenteva—

But even though he said this, they kept on accusing him,
364

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti?

“Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?”
365

सोso अमूळ्होa·mū·ḷho सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ याचति।yā·ca·ti

So amūḷho saṅghaṁ amūḷhavinayaṁ yācati.

Because he is now sane, he is asking the Sangha for resolution because of past insanity.
366

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho गग्गस्सgag·gas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no अमूळ्हस्सa·mū·ḷhas·sa अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ ददेय्य।da·dey·ya

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho gaggassa bhikkhuno amūḷhassa amūḷhavinayaṁ dadeyya.

If the Sangha is ready, then, because the monk Gagga is now sane, the Sangha should grant him resolution because of past insanity.
367

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
368

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
369

अयंa·yaṃ गग्गोgag·go भिक्खुbhik·khu उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिa·ho·si चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

Ayaṁ gaggo bhikkhu ummattako ahosi cittavipariyāsakato.

The monk Gagga has been insane and suffering from psychosis.
370

तेनte·na उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that insanity and psychosis, he did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
371

भिक्खूbhik·khū गग्गंgag·gaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na अज्झाचिण्णेनaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇe·na आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā चोदेन्ति—co·den·ti

Bhikkhū gaggaṁ bhikkhuṁ ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena ajjhāciṇṇena āpattiyā codenti—

Because of that insanity and psychosis, the monks accused the monk Gagga of an offense, saying,
372

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti?

“Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?”
373

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He replied,
374

“अहंa·haṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिंa·ho·siṃ चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

“ahaṁ kho, āvuso, ummattako ahosiṁ cittavipariyāsakato.

“I was insane and suffering from psychosis.
375

तेनte·na मेme उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena me ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that insanity and psychosis, I did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
376

नाहंnā·haṃ तंtaṃ सरामिsa·rā·mi मूळ्हेनmū·ḷhe·na मेme एतंe·taṃ कतन्”ति।ka·tan

Nāhaṁ taṁ sarāmi mūḷhena me etaṁ katan”ti.

I don’t remember it. I did it because I was insane.”
377

एवम्पिe·vam·pi नंnaṃ वुच्चमानाvuc·ca·mā·nā चोदेन्तेव—co·den·te·va

Evampi naṁ vuccamānā codenteva—

But even though he said this, they kept on accusing him,
378

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti?

“Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?”
379

सोso अमूळ्होa·mū·ḷho सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ याचति।yā·ca·ti

So amūḷho saṅghaṁ amūḷhavinayaṁ yācati.

Because he is now sane, he is asking the Sangha for resolution because of past insanity.
380

सङ्घोsaṅ·gho गग्गस्सgag·gas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no अमूळ्हस्सa·mū·ḷhas·sa अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ देति।de·ti

Saṅgho gaggassa bhikkhuno amūḷhassa amūḷhavinayaṁ deti.

Because the monk Gagga is now sane, the Sangha grants him resolution because of past insanity.
381

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti गग्गस्सgag·gas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no अमूळ्हस्सa·mū·ḷhas·sa अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa दानं,dā·naṃ सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati gaggassa bhikkhuno amūḷhassa amūḷhavinayassa dānaṁ, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves of granting to the monk Gagga, who is now sane, resolution because of past insanity should remain silent.
382

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
383

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi …पे…pe

Dutiyampi etamatthaṁ vadāmi …pe…

For the second time, I speak on this matter. …
384

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi …पे…।pe

tatiyampi etamatthaṁ vadāmi …pe….

For the third time, I speak on this matter. …
385

दिन्नोdin·no सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na गग्गस्सgag·gas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no अमूळ्हस्सa·mū·ḷhas·sa अमूळ्हविनयो।a·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yo

Dinno saṅghena gaggassa bhikkhuno amūḷhassa amūḷhavinayo.

Because the monk Gagga is now sane, the Sangha has granted him resolution because of past insanity.
386

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’
387

तीणिमानि,tī·ṇi·mā·ni भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधम्मिकानिa·dham·mi·kā·ni अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa दानानि,dā·nā·ni तीणिtī·ṇi धम्मिकानि।dham·mi·kā·ni

Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, adhammikāni amūḷhavinayassa dānāni, tīṇi dhammikāni.

There are three illegitimate and three legitimate grantings of resolution because of past insanity.
388

कतमानिka·ta·mā·ni तीणिtī·ṇi अधम्मिकानिa·dham·mi·kā·ni अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa दानानि?dā·nā·ni

Katamāni tīṇi adhammikāni amūḷhavinayassa dānāni?

What are the three illegitimate grantings of resolution because of past insanity?
389

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नोā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āpattiṁ āpanno hoti.

It may be that a monk has committed an offense.
390

तमेनंta·me·naṃ चोदेतिco·de·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वा,vā सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वा,vā एकपुग्गलोe·ka·pug·ga·lo वा—vā

Tamenaṁ codeti saṅgho vā, sambahulā vā, ekapuggalo vā—

The Sangha, several monks, or a single monk accuses him, saying,
391

‘सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता’ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’ti?

‘Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?’
392

सोso सरमानोवsa·ra·mā·no·va एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So saramānova evaṁ vadeti—

Although he remembers, he says
393

‘नna खोkho अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so सरामिsa·rā·mi एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता’ति।ā·paj·ji·tā

‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, sarāmi evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’ti.

he doesn’t.
394

तस्सtas·sa सङ्घोsaṅ·gho अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ देति।de·ti

Tassa saṅgho amūḷhavinayaṁ deti.

If the Sangha grants him resolution because of past insanity,
395

अधम्मिकंa·dham·mi·kaṃ अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa दानं।dā·naṃ

Adhammikaṁ amūḷhavinayassa dānaṁ.

then that granting is illegitimate.
396

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नोā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āpattiṁ āpanno hoti.

It may be that a monk has committed an offense.
397

तमेनंta·me·naṃ चोदेतिco·de·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वा,vā सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वा,vā एकपुग्गलोe·ka·pug·ga·lo वा—vā

Tamenaṁ codeti saṅgho vā, sambahulā vā, ekapuggalo vā—

The Sangha, several monks, or a single monk accuses him, saying,
398

‘सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता’ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’ti?

‘Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?’
399

सोso सरमानोवsa·ra·mā·no·va एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So saramānova evaṁ vadeti—

Although he remembers, he says,
400

‘सरामिsa·rā·mi खोkho अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so यथासुपिनन्तेना’ति।ya·thā·su·pi·nan·te·nā

‘sarāmi kho ahaṁ, āvuso, yathāsupinantenā’ti.

‘I remember as if in a dream.’
401

तस्सtas·sa सङ्घोsaṅ·gho अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ देति।de·ti

Tassa saṅgho amūḷhavinayaṁ deti.

If the Sangha grants him resolution because of past insanity,
402

अधम्मिकंa·dham·mi·kaṃ अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa दानं।dā·naṃ

Adhammikaṁ amūḷhavinayassa dānaṁ.

then that granting is illegitimate.
403

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नोā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu āpattiṁ āpanno hoti.

It may be that a monk has committed an offense.
404

तमेनंta·me·naṃ चोदेतिco·de·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वा,vā सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वा,vā एकपुग्गलोe·ka·pug·ga·lo वा—vā

Tamenaṁ codeti saṅgho vā, sambahulā vā, ekapuggalo vā—

The Sangha, several monks, or a single monk accuses him, saying,
405

‘सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता’ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’ti?

‘Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?’
406

सोso अनुम्मत्तकोa·num·mat·ta·ko उम्मत्तकालयंum·mat·ta·kā·la·yaṃ करोति—ka·ro·ti

So anummattako ummattakālayaṁ karoti—

Although he’s sane, he acts insane, saying,
407

‘अहम्पिa·ham·pi खोkho एवंe·vaṃ करोमि।ka·ro·mi

‘ahampi kho evaṁ karomi.

‘I do this,
408

तुम्हेपिtum·he·pi एवंe·vaṃ करोथ।ka·ro·tha

Tumhepi evaṁ karotha.

and so do you.
409

मय्हम्पिmay·ham·pi एतंe·taṃ कप्पति।kap·pa·ti

Mayhampi etaṁ kappati.

This is allowable for me,
410

तुम्हाकम्पेतंtum·hā·kam·pe·taṃ कप्पती’ति।kap·pa·tī

Tumhākampetaṁ kappatī’ti.

and also for you.’
411

तस्सtas·sa सङ्घोsaṅ·gho अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ देति।de·ti

Tassa saṅgho amūḷhavinayaṁ deti.

If the Sangha grants him resolution because of past insanity,
412

अधम्मिकंa·dham·mi·kaṃ अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa दानं।dā·naṃ

Adhammikaṁ amūḷhavinayassa dānaṁ.

then that granting is illegitimate.
413

इमानिi·mā·ni तीणिtī·ṇi अधम्मिकानिa·dham·mi·kā·ni अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa दानानि।dā·nā·ni

Imāni tīṇi adhammikāni amūḷhavinayassa dānāni.

(Pāli only)
414

कतमानिka·ta·mā·ni तीणिtī·ṇi धम्मिकानिdham·mi·kā·ni अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa दानानि?dā·nā·ni

Katamāni tīṇi dhammikāni amūḷhavinayassa dānāni?

And what are the three legitimate grantings of resolution because of past insanity?
415

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko होतिho·ti चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ummattako hoti cittavipariyāsakato.

It may be that a monk has been insane and suffering from psychosis.
416

तेनte·na उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ होतिho·ti भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ hoti bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, he did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
417

तमेनंta·me·naṃ चोदेतिco·de·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वा,vā सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वा,vā एकपुग्गलोe·ka·pug·ga·lo वा—vā

Tamenaṁ codeti saṅgho vā, sambahulā vā, ekapuggalo vā—

The Sangha, several monks, or a single monk accuses him, saying,
418

‘सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता’ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’ti?

‘Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?’
419

सोso अस्सरमानोवas·sa·ra·mā·no·va एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So assaramānova evaṁ vadeti—

Not remembering, he says
420

‘नna खोkho अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so सरामिsa·rā·mi एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता’ति।ā·paj·ji·tā

‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, sarāmi evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’ti.

he doesn’t.
421

तस्सtas·sa सङ्घोsaṅ·gho अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ देति।de·ti

Tassa saṅgho amūḷhavinayaṁ deti.

If the Sangha grants him resolution because of past insanity,
422

धम्मिकंdham·mi·kaṃ अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa दानं।dā·naṃ

Dhammikaṁ amūḷhavinayassa dānaṁ.

then that granting is legitimate.
423

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko होतिho·ti चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ummattako hoti cittavipariyāsakato.

It may be that a monk has been insane and suffering from psychosis.
424

तेनte·na उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ होतिho·ti भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ hoti bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, he did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
425

तमेनंta·me·naṃ चोदेतिco·de·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वा,vā सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वा,vā एकपुग्गलोe·ka·pug·ga·lo वा—vā

Tamenaṁ codeti saṅgho vā, sambahulā vā, ekapuggalo vā—

The Sangha, several monks, or a single monk accuses him, saying,
426

‘सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता’ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’ti?

‘Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?’
427

सोso अस्सरमानोवas·sa·ra·mā·no·va एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So assaramānova evaṁ vadeti—

Not remembering, he says,
428

‘सरामिsa·rā·mi खोkho अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so यथासुपिनन्तेना’ति।ya·thā·su·pi·nan·te·nā

‘sarāmi kho ahaṁ, āvuso, yathāsupinantenā’ti.

‘I remember as if in a dream.’
429

तस्सtas·sa सङ्घोsaṅ·gho अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ देति।de·ti

Tassa saṅgho amūḷhavinayaṁ deti.

If the Sangha grants him resolution because of past insanity,
430

धम्मिकंdham·mi·kaṃ अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa दानं।dā·naṃ

Dhammikaṁ amūḷhavinayassa dānaṁ.

then that granting is legitimate.
431

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko होतिho·ti चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ummattako hoti cittavipariyāsakato.

It may be that a monk has been insane and suffering from psychosis.
432

तेनte·na उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ होतिho·ti भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ hoti bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, he did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
433

तमेनंta·me·naṃ चोदेतिco·de·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वा,vā सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वा,vā एकपुग्गलोe·ka·pug·ga·lo वा—vā

Tamenaṁ codeti saṅgho vā, sambahulā vā, ekapuggalo vā—

The Sangha, several monks, or a single monk accuses him, saying,
434

‘सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता’ति?ā·paj·ji·tā

‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’ti?

‘Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?’
435

सोso उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko उम्मत्तकालयंum·mat·ta·kā·la·yaṃ करोति—ka·ro·ti

So ummattako ummattakālayaṁ karoti—

Being insane, he acts insane, saying,
436

‘अहम्पिa·ham·pi एवंe·vaṃ करोमि।ka·ro·mi

‘ahampi evaṁ karomi.

‘I do this,
437

तुम्हेपिtum·he·pi एवंe·vaṃ करोथ।ka·ro·tha

Tumhepi evaṁ karotha.

and so do you.
438

मय्हम्पिmay·ham·pi एतंe·taṃ कप्पति।kap·pa·ti

Mayhampi etaṁ kappati.

This is allowable for me,
439

तुम्हाकम्पेतंtum·hā·kam·pe·taṃ कप्पती’ति।kap·pa·tī

Tumhākampetaṁ kappatī’ti.

and also for you.’
440

तस्सtas·sa सङ्घोsaṅ·gho अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ देति।de·ti

Tassa saṅgho amūḷhavinayaṁ deti.

If the Sangha grants him resolution because of past insanity,
441

धम्मिकंdham·mi·kaṃ अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa दानं।dā·naṃ

Dhammikaṁ amūḷhavinayassa dānaṁ.

then that granting is legitimate.”
442

इमानिi·mā·ni तीणिtī·ṇi धम्मिकानिdham·mi·kā·ni अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa दानानी”ति।dā·nā·nī

Imāni tīṇi dhammikāni amūḷhavinayassa dānānī”ti.

(Pāli only)
443

4। पटिञ्ञातकरणpa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇa

4. Paṭiññātakaraṇa

4. Acting according to what has been admitted
444

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पटिञ्ञायap·pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ya भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ कम्मानिkam·mā·ni करोन्ति—ka·ron·ti

Tena kho pana samayena chabbaggiyā bhikkhū appaṭiññāya bhikkhūnaṁ kammāni karonti—

At one time the monks from the group of six did legal procedures—
445

तज्जनीयम्पि,taj·ja·nī·yam·pi नियस्सम्पि,ni·yas·sam·pi पब्बाजनीयम्पि,pab·bā·ja·nī·yam·pi पटिसारणीयम्पि,pa·ṭi·sā·ra·ṇī·yam·pi उक्खेपनीयम्पि।uk·khe·pa·nī·yam·pi

tajjanīyampi, niyassampi, pabbājanīyampi, paṭisāraṇīyampi, ukkhepanīyampi.

censure, demotion, banishment, reconciliation, and ejection—against other monks without their admission.
446

येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पिच्छाap·pic·chā …पे…pe तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Ye te bhikkhū appicchā …pe… te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

The monks of few desires complained and criticized them,
447

“कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma छब्बग्गियाchab·bag·gi·yā भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पटिञ्ञायap·pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ya भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ कम्मानिkam·mā·ni करिस्सन्ति—ka·ris·san·ti

“kathañhi nāma chabbaggiyā bhikkhū appaṭiññāya bhikkhūnaṁ kammāni karissanti—

“How can the monks from the group of six do this?”
448

तज्जनीयम्पि,taj·ja·nī·yam·pi नियस्सम्पि,ni·yas·sam·pi पब्बाजनीयम्पि,pab·bā·ja·nī·yam·pi पटिसारणीयम्पि,pa·ṭi·sā·ra·ṇī·yam·pi उक्खेपनीयम्पी”ति।uk·khe·pa·nī·yam·pī

tajjanīyampi, niyassampi, pabbājanīyampi, paṭisāraṇīyampi, ukkhepanīyampī”ti.

(Pāli only)
449

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुंā·ro·ce·suṃ …पे…pe

Atha kho te bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ …pe…

They told the Buddha. …
450

“सच्चंsac·caṃ किर,ki·ra भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…pe

“saccaṁ kira, bhikkhave …pe…

“Is it true, monks, that the monks from the group of six are doing this?”
451

“सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”तिbha·ga·vā …पे…pe

“saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti …pe…

“It’s true, sir.” …
452

विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā …पे…pe

vigarahitvā …pe…

After rebuking them …
453

धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
454

“न,na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अप्पटिञ्ञायap·pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ya भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ कम्मंkam·maṃ कातब्बं—kā·tab·baṃ

“na, bhikkhave, appaṭiññāya bhikkhūnaṁ kammaṁ kātabbaṁ—

“You shouldn’t do legal procedures—
455

तज्जनीयंtaj·ja·nī·yaṃ वा,vā नियस्संni·yas·saṃ वा,vā पब्बाजनीयंpab·bā·ja·nī·yaṃ वा,vā पटिसारणीयंpa·ṭi·sā·ra·ṇī·yaṃ वा,vā उक्खेपनीयंuk·khe·pa·nī·yaṃ वा।vā

tajjanīyaṁ vā, niyassaṁ vā, pabbājanīyaṁ vā, paṭisāraṇīyaṁ vā, ukkhepanīyaṁ vā.

censure, demotion, banishment, reconciliation, or ejection—against monks without their admission.
456

योyo करेय्य,ka·rey·ya आपत्तिā·pat·ti दुक्कटस्स।duk·ka·ṭas·sa

Yo kareyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa.

If you do, you commit an offense of wrong conduct.
457

एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधम्मिकंa·dham·mi·kaṃ होतिho·ti पटिञ्ञातकरणं,pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇaṃ एवंe·vaṃ धम्मिकं।dham·mi·kaṃ

Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, adhammikaṁ hoti paṭiññātakaraṇaṁ, evaṁ dhammikaṁ.

(Pāli only)
458

कथञ्च,ka·thañ·ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधम्मिकंa·dham·mi·kaṃ होतिho·ti पटिञ्ञातकरणं?pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Kathañca, bhikkhave, adhammikaṁ hoti paṭiññātakaraṇaṁ?

And how’s acting according to what’s been admitted illegitimate?
459

भिक्खुbhik·khu पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ अज्झापन्नोaj·jhā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

Bhikkhu pārājikaṁ ajjhāpanno hoti.

It may be that a monk has committed an offense entailing expulsion.
460

तमेनंta·me·naṃ चोदेतिco·de·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वा,vā सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वा,vā एकपुग्गलोe·ka·pug·ga·lo वा—vā

Tamenaṁ codeti saṅgho vā, sambahulā vā, ekapuggalo vā—

The Sangha, several monks, or a single monk accuses him, saying,
461

‘पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā अज्झापन्नो’ति?aj·jhā·pan·no

‘pārājikaṁ āyasmā ajjhāpanno’ti?

‘Venerable, you’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.’
462

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He says,
463

‘नna खोkho अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ अज्झापन्नो,aj·jhā·pan·no सङ्घादिसेसंsaṅ·ghā·di·se·saṃ अज्झापन्नो’ति।aj·jhā·pan·no

‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, pārājikaṁ ajjhāpanno, saṅghādisesaṁ ajjhāpanno’ti.

‘I haven’t committed an offense entailing expulsion, but one entailing suspension.’
464

तंtaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho सङ्घादिसेसेनsaṅ·ghā·di·se·se·na कारेति।kā·re·ti

Taṁ saṅgho saṅghādisesena kāreti.

If the Sangha makes him act according to an offense entailing suspension,
465

अधम्मिकंa·dham·mi·kaṃ पटिञ्ञातकरणं।pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Adhammikaṁ paṭiññātakaraṇaṁ.

then that acting according to what’s been admitted is illegitimate.
466

भिक्खुbhik·khu पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ अज्झापन्नोaj·jhā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

Bhikkhu pārājikaṁ ajjhāpanno hoti.

It may be that a monk has committed an offense entailing expulsion.
467

तमेनंta·me·naṃ चोदेतिco·de·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वा,vā सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वा,vā एकपुग्गलोe·ka·pug·ga·lo वा—vā

Tamenaṁ codeti saṅgho vā, sambahulā vā, ekapuggalo vā—

The Sangha, several monks, or a single monk accuses him, saying,
468

‘पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā अज्झापन्नो’ति?aj·jhā·pan·no

‘pārājikaṁ āyasmā ajjhāpanno’ti?

‘Venerable, you’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.’
469

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He says,
470

‘नna खोkho अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ अज्झापन्नो,aj·jhā·pan·no थुल्लच्चयंthul·lac·ca·yaṃ …पे…pe

‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, pārājikaṁ ajjhāpanno, thullaccayaṁ …pe…

‘I haven’t committed an offense entailing expulsion, but a serious offense …
471

पाचित्तियंpā·cit·ti·yaṃ …पे…pe

pācittiyaṁ …pe…

but an offense entailing confession …
472

पाटिदेसनीयंpā·ṭi·de·sa·nī·yaṃ …पे…pe

pāṭidesanīyaṁ …pe…

but an offense entailing acknowledgment …
473

दुक्कटंduk·ka·ṭaṃ …पे…pe

dukkaṭaṁ …pe…

but an offense of wrong conduct …
474

दुब्भासितंdub·bhā·si·taṃ अज्झापन्नो’ति।aj·jhā·pan·no

dubbhāsitaṁ ajjhāpanno’ti.

but an offense of wrong speech.’
475

तंtaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho दुब्भासितेनdub·bhā·si·te·na कारेति।kā·re·ti

Taṁ saṅgho dubbhāsitena kāreti.

If the Sangha makes him act according to an offense of wrong speech,
476

अधम्मिकंa·dham·mi·kaṃ पटिञ्ञातकरणं।pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Adhammikaṁ paṭiññātakaraṇaṁ.

then that acting according to what’s been admitted is illegitimate.
477

भिक्खुbhik·khu सङ्घादिसेसंsaṅ·ghā·di·se·saṃ …पे…pe

Bhikkhu saṅghādisesaṁ …pe…

It may be that a monk has committed an offense entailing suspension …
478

थुल्लच्चयंthul·lac·ca·yaṃ …पे…pe

thullaccayaṁ …pe…

a serious offense …
479

पाचित्तियंpā·cit·ti·yaṃ …पे…pe

pācittiyaṁ …pe…

an offense entailing confession …
480

पाटिदेसनीयंpā·ṭi·de·sa·nī·yaṃ …पे…pe

pāṭidesanīyaṁ …pe…

an offense entailing acknowledgment …
481

दुक्कटंduk·ka·ṭaṃ …पे…pe

dukkaṭaṁ …pe…

an offense of wrong conduct …
482

दुब्भासितंdub·bhā·si·taṃ अज्झापन्नोaj·jhā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

dubbhāsitaṁ ajjhāpanno hoti.

an offense of wrong speech.
483

तमेनंta·me·naṃ चोदेतिco·de·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वा,vā सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वा,vā एकपुग्गलोe·ka·pug·ga·lo वा—vā

Tamenaṁ codeti saṅgho vā, sambahulā vā, ekapuggalo vā—

The Sangha, several monks, or a single monk accuses him, saying,
484

‘दुब्भासितंdub·bhā·si·taṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā अज्झापन्नो’ति?aj·jhā·pan·no

‘dubbhāsitaṁ āyasmā ajjhāpanno’ti?

‘Venerable, you’ve committed an offense of wrong speech.’
485

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He says,
486

‘नna खोkho अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so दुब्भासितंdub·bhā·si·taṃ अज्झापन्नो,aj·jhā·pan·no पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ अज्झापन्नो’ति।aj·jhā·pan·no

‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, dubbhāsitaṁ ajjhāpanno, pārājikaṁ ajjhāpanno’ti.

‘I haven’t committed an offense of wrong speech, but an offense entailing expulsion.’
487

तंtaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho पाराजिकेनpā·rā·ji·ke·na कारेति।kā·re·ti

Taṁ saṅgho pārājikena kāreti.

If the Sangha makes him act according to an offense entailing expulsion,
488

अधम्मिकंa·dham·mi·kaṃ पटिञ्ञातकरणं।pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Adhammikaṁ paṭiññātakaraṇaṁ.

then that acting according to what’s been admitted is illegitimate.
489

भिक्खुbhik·khu दुब्भासितंdub·bhā·si·taṃ अज्झापन्नोaj·jhā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

Bhikkhu dubbhāsitaṁ ajjhāpanno hoti.

It may be that a monk has committed an offense of wrong speech.
490

तमेनंta·me·naṃ चोदेतिco·de·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वा,vā सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वा,vā एकपुग्गलोe·ka·pug·ga·lo वा—vā

Tamenaṁ codeti saṅgho vā, sambahulā vā, ekapuggalo vā—

The Sangha, several monks, or a single monk accuses him, saying,
491

‘दुब्भासितंdub·bhā·si·taṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā अज्झापन्नो’ति?aj·jhā·pan·no

‘dubbhāsitaṁ āyasmā ajjhāpanno’ti?

‘Venerable, you’ve committed an offense of wrong speech.’
492

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He says,
493

‘नna खोkho अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so दुब्भासितंdub·bhā·si·taṃ अज्झापन्नो,aj·jhā·pan·no सङ्घादिसेसंsaṅ·ghā·di·se·saṃ …पे…pe

‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, dubbhāsitaṁ ajjhāpanno, saṅghādisesaṁ …pe…

‘I haven’t committed an offense of wrong speech, but an offense entailing suspension …
494

थुल्लच्चयंthul·lac·ca·yaṃ …पे…pe

thullaccayaṁ …pe…

but a serious offense …
495

पाचित्तियंpā·cit·ti·yaṃ …पे…pe

pācittiyaṁ …pe…

but an offense entailing confession …
496

पाटिदेसनीयंpā·ṭi·de·sa·nī·yaṃ …पे…pe

pāṭidesanīyaṁ …pe…

but an offense entailing acknowledgment …
497

दुक्कटंduk·ka·ṭaṃ अज्झापन्नो’ति।aj·jhā·pan·no

dukkaṭaṁ ajjhāpanno’ti.

but an offense of wrong conduct.’
498

तंtaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho दुक्कटेनduk·ka·ṭe·na कारेति।kā·re·ti

Taṁ saṅgho dukkaṭena kāreti.

If the Sangha makes him act according to an offense of wrong conduct,
499

अधम्मिकंa·dham·mi·kaṃ पटिञ्ञातकरणं।pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Adhammikaṁ paṭiññātakaraṇaṁ.

then that acting according to what’s been admitted is illegitimate.
500

एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधम्मिकंa·dham·mi·kaṃ होतिho·ti पटिञ्ञातकरणं।pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, adhammikaṁ hoti paṭiññātakaraṇaṁ.

(Pāli only)
501

कथञ्च,ka·thañ·ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve धम्मिकंdham·mi·kaṃ होतिho·ti पटिञ्ञातकरणं?pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Kathañca, bhikkhave, dhammikaṁ hoti paṭiññātakaraṇaṁ?

And how’s acting according to what’s been admitted legitimate?
502

भिक्खुbhik·khu पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ अज्झापन्नोaj·jhā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

Bhikkhu pārājikaṁ ajjhāpanno hoti.

It may be that a monk has committed an offense entailing expulsion.
503

तमेनंta·me·naṃ चोदेतिco·de·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वा,vā सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वा,vā एकपुग्गलोe·ka·pug·ga·lo वा—vā

Tamenaṁ codeti saṅgho vā, sambahulā vā, ekapuggalo vā—

The Sangha, several monks, or a single monk accuses him, saying,
504

‘पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā अज्झापन्नो’ति?aj·jhā·pan·no

‘pārājikaṁ āyasmā ajjhāpanno’ti?

‘Venerable, you’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.’
505

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He says,
506

‘आम,ā·ma आवुसो,ā·vu·so पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ अज्झापन्नो’ति।aj·jhā·pan·no

‘āma, āvuso, pārājikaṁ ajjhāpanno’ti.

‘Yes, I’ve committed an offense entailing expulsion.’
507

तंtaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho पाराजिकेनpā·rā·ji·ke·na कारेति।kā·re·ti

Taṁ saṅgho pārājikena kāreti.

If the Sangha makes him act according to an offense entailing expulsion,
508

धम्मिकंdham·mi·kaṃ पटिञ्ञातकरणं।pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Dhammikaṁ paṭiññātakaraṇaṁ.

then that acting according to what’s been admitted is legitimate.
509

भिक्खुbhik·khu सङ्घादिसेसंsaṅ·ghā·di·se·saṃ …पे…pe

Bhikkhu saṅghādisesaṁ …pe…

It may be that a monk has committed an offense entailing suspension …
510

थुल्लच्चयंthul·lac·ca·yaṃ …पे…pe

thullaccayaṁ …pe…

a serious offense …
511

पाचित्तियंpā·cit·ti·yaṃ …पे…pe

pācittiyaṁ …pe…

an offense entailing confession …
512

पाटिदेसनीयंpā·ṭi·de·sa·nī·yaṃ …पे…pe

pāṭidesanīyaṁ …pe…

an offense entailing acknowledgment …
513

दुक्कटंduk·ka·ṭaṃ …पे…pe

dukkaṭaṁ …pe…

an offense of wrong conduct …
514

दुब्भासितंdub·bhā·si·taṃ अज्झापन्नोaj·jhā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

dubbhāsitaṁ ajjhāpanno hoti.

an offense of wrong speech.
515

तमेनंta·me·naṃ चोदेतिco·de·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho वा,vā सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā वा,vā एकपुग्गलोe·ka·pug·ga·lo वा—vā

Tamenaṁ codeti saṅgho vā, sambahulā vā, ekapuggalo vā—

The Sangha, several monks, or a single monk accuses him, saying,
516

‘दुब्भासितंdub·bhā·si·taṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā अज्झापन्नो’ति?aj·jhā·pan·no

‘dubbhāsitaṁ āyasmā ajjhāpanno’ti?

‘Venerable, you’ve committed an offense of wrong speech.’
517

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He says,
518

‘आम,ā·ma आवुसो,ā·vu·so दुब्भासितंdub·bhā·si·taṃ अज्झापन्नो’ति।aj·jhā·pan·no

‘āma, āvuso, dubbhāsitaṁ ajjhāpanno’ti.

‘Yes, I’ve committed an offense of wrong speech.’
519

तंtaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho दुब्भासितेनdub·bhā·si·te·na कारेति।kā·re·ti

Taṁ saṅgho dubbhāsitena kāreti.

If the Sangha makes him act according to an offense wrong speech,
520

धम्मिकंdham·mi·kaṃ पटिञ्ञातकरणं।pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Dhammikaṁ paṭiññātakaraṇaṁ.

then that acting according to what’s been admitted is legitimate.”
521

एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve धम्मिकंdham·mi·kaṃ होतिho·ti पटिञ्ञातकरणन्”ति।pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇan

Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, dhammikaṁ hoti paṭiññātakaraṇan”ti.

(Pāli only)
522

5। येभुय्यसिकाye·bhuy·ya·si·kā

5. Yebhuyyasikā

5. Majority decision
523

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूbhik·khū सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe भण्डनजाताbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā कलहजाताka·la·ha·jā·tā विवादापन्नाvi·vā·dā·pan·nā अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ मुखसत्तीहिmu·kha·sat·tī·hi वितुदन्ताvi·tu·dan·tā विहरन्ति,vi·ha·ran·ti नna सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुं।vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū saṅghamajjhe bhaṇḍanajātā kalahajātā vivādāpannā aññamaññaṁ mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharanti, na sakkonti taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ.

At one time the monks were arguing and disputing in the midst of the Sangha, attacking one another verbally, and they were unable to resolve that legal issue.
524

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
525

“अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ येभुय्यसिकायye·bhuy·ya·si·kā·ya वूपसमेतुं।vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ

“Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, evarūpaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ yebhuyyasikāya vūpasametuṁ.

“I allow you to resolve such legal issues by majority decision.
526

पञ्चहङ्गेहिpañ·ca·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to भिक्खुbhik·khu सलाकग्गाहापकोsa·lā·kag·gā·hā·pa·ko सम्मन्नितब्बो—sam·man·ni·tab·bo

Pañcahaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu salākaggāhāpako sammannitabbo—

You should appoint a monk who has five qualities as the manager of the vote:
527

योyo नna छन्दागतिंchan·dā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna दोसागतिंdo·sā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna मोहागतिंmo·hā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna भयागतिंbha·yā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya गहितागहितञ्चga·hi·tā·ga·hi·tañ·ca जानेय्य।jā·ney·ya

yo na chandāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na dosāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na mohāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na bhayāgatiṁ gaccheyya, gahitāgahitañca jāneyya.

he’s not biased by favoritism, ill will, confusion, or fear, and he knows who has and who hasn’t voted.
528

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मन्नितब्बो।sam·man·ni·tab·bo

Evañca pana, bhikkhave, sammannitabbo.

And he should be appointed like this.
529

पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ भिक्खुbhik·khu याचितब्बो,yā·ci·tab·bo याचित्वाyā·cit·vā ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Paṭhamaṁ bhikkhu yācitabbo, yācitvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

First a monk should be asked, and then a competent and capable monk should inform the Sangha:
530

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
531

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ सलाकग्गाहापकंsa·lā·kag·gā·hā·pa·kaṃ सम्मन्नेय्य।sam·man·ney·ya

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ salākaggāhāpakaṁ sammanneyya.

If the Sangha is ready, it should appoint monk so-and-so as the manager of the vote.
532

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
533

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
534

सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ सलाकग्गाहापकंsa·lā·kag·gā·hā·pa·kaṃ सम्मन्नति।sam·man·na·ti

Saṅgho itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ salākaggāhāpakaṁ sammannati.

The Sangha appoints monk so-and-so as the manager of the vote.
535

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सलाकग्गाहापकस्सsa·lā·kag·gā·hā·pa·kas·sa सम्मुति,sam·mu·ti सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati itthannāmassa bhikkhuno salākaggāhāpakassa sammuti, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves of appointing monk so-and-so as the manager of the vote should remain silent.
536

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
537

सम्मतोsam·ma·to सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu सलाकग्गाहापको।sa·lā·kag·gā·hā·pa·ko

Sammato saṅghena itthannāmo bhikkhu salākaggāhāpako.

The Sangha has appointed monk so-and-so as the manager of the vote.
538

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’
539

दसयिमे,da·sa·yi·me भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधम्मिकाa·dham·mi·kā सलाकग्गाहा,sa·lā·kag·gā·hā दसda·sa धम्मिका।dham·mi·kā

Dasayime, bhikkhave, adhammikā salākaggāhā, dasa dhammikā.

There are ten reasons why a vote is illegitimate:
540

कतमेka·ta·me दसda·sa अधम्मिकाa·dham·mi·kā सलाकग्गाहा?sa·lā·kag·gā·hā

Katame dasa adhammikā salākaggāhā?

(Pāli only)
541

ओरमत्तकञ्चo·ra·mat·ta·kañ·ca अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ होति,ho·ti नna चca गतिगतंga·ti·ga·taṃ होति,ho·ti नna चca सरितसारितंsa·ri·ta·sā·ri·taṃ होति,ho·ti जानातिjā·nā·ti अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī बहुतराति,ba·hu·ta·rā·ti अप्पेवap·pe·va नामnā·ma अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī बहुतराba·hu·ta·rā अस्सूति,as·sū·ti जानातिjā·nā·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho भिज्जिस्सतीति,bhij·jis·sa·tī·ti अप्पेवap·pe·va नामnā·ma सङ्घोsaṅ·gho भिज्जेय्याति,bhij·jey·yā·ti अधम्मेनa·dham·me·na गण्हन्ति,gaṇ·han·ti वग्गाvag·gā गण्हन्ति,gaṇ·han·ti नna चca यथादिट्ठियाya·thā·diṭ·ṭhi·yā गण्हन्ति—gaṇ·han·ti

Oramattakañca adhikaraṇaṁ hoti, na ca gatigataṁ hoti, na ca saritasāritaṁ hoti, jānāti adhammavādī bahutarāti, appeva nāma adhammavādī bahutarā assūti, jānāti saṅgho bhijjissatīti, appeva nāma saṅgho bhijjeyyāti, adhammena gaṇhanti, vaggā gaṇhanti, na ca yathādiṭṭhiyā gaṇhanti—

it’s only a minor legal issue; the full process for settling it hasn’t run its course; they haven’t tried to remember offenses and remind about offenses; the manager knows that those who speak contrary to the Teaching are in the majority; the manager expects that those who speak contrary to the Teaching will be in the majority; the manager knows that the Sangha will split; the manager expects that the Sangha will split; they vote illegitimately; they vote with an incomplete assembly; they don’t vote according to their own views.
542

इमेi·me दसda·sa अधम्मिकाa·dham·mi·kā सलाकग्गाहा।sa·lā·kag·gā·hā

ime dasa adhammikā salākaggāhā.

(Pāli only)
543

कतमेka·ta·me दसda·sa धम्मिकाdham·mi·kā सलाकग्गाहा?sa·lā·kag·gā·hā

Katame dasa dhammikā salākaggāhā?

And there are ten reasons why a vote is legitimate:
544

नna चca ओरमत्तकंo·ra·mat·ta·kaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ होति,ho·ti गतिगतञ्चga·ti·ga·tañ·ca होति,ho·ti सरितसारितञ्चsa·ri·ta·sā·ri·tañ·ca होति,ho·ti जानातिjā·nā·ti धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī बहुतराति,ba·hu·ta·rā·ti अप्पेवap·pe·va नामnā·ma धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī बहुतराba·hu·ta·rā अस्सूति,as·sū·ti जानातिjā·nā·ti सङ्घोsaṅ·gho नna भिज्जिस्सतीति,bhij·jis·sa·tī·ti अप्पेवap·pe·va नामnā·ma सङ्घोsaṅ·gho नna भिज्जेय्याति,bhij·jey·yā·ti धम्मेनdham·me·na गण्हन्ति,gaṇ·han·ti समग्गाsa·mag·gā गण्हन्ति,gaṇ·han·ti यथादिट्ठियाya·thā·diṭ·ṭhi·yā चca गण्हन्ति—gaṇ·han·ti

Na ca oramattakaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ hoti, gatigatañca hoti, saritasāritañca hoti, jānāti dhammavādī bahutarāti, appeva nāma dhammavādī bahutarā assūti, jānāti saṅgho na bhijjissatīti, appeva nāma saṅgho na bhijjeyyāti, dhammena gaṇhanti, samaggā gaṇhanti, yathādiṭṭhiyā ca gaṇhanti—

it’s not a minor legal issue; the full process for settling it has run its course; they’ve tried to remember offenses and remind about offenses; the manager knows that those who speak in accordance with the Teaching are in the majority; the manager expects that those who speak in accordance with the Teaching will be in the majority; the manager knows that the Sangha won’t split; the manager expects that the Sangha won’t split; they vote legitimately; they vote with a complete assembly; they vote according to their own views.”
545

इमेi·me दसda·sa धम्मिकाdham·mi·kā सलाकग्गाहा”ति।sa·lā·kag·gā·hā

ime dasa dhammikā salākaggāhā”ti.

(Pāli only)
546

6। तस्सपापियसिकाtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā

6. Tassapāpiyasikā

6. Further penalty
547

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na उपवाळोu·pa·vā·ḷo भिक्खुbhik·khu सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनुयुञ्जियमानोa·nu·yuñ·ji·ya·mā·no अवजानित्वाa·va·jā·nit·vā पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti पटिजानित्वाpa·ṭi·jā·nit·vā अवजानाति,a·va·jā·nā·ti अञ्ञेनञ्ञंañ·ñe·nañ·ñaṃ पटिचरति,pa·ṭi·ca·ra·ti सम्पजानमुसाsam·pa·jā·na·mu·sā भासति।bhā·sa·ti

Tena kho pana samayena upavāḷo bhikkhu saṅghamajjhe āpattiyā anuyuñjiyamāno avajānitvā paṭijānāti, paṭijānitvā avajānāti, aññenaññaṁ paṭicarati, sampajānamusā bhāsati.

On one occasion, when the monk Upavāḷa was being examined in the midst of the Sangha about an offense, he asserted things after denying them, denied things after asserting them, evaded the issue, and lied.
548

येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पिच्छाap·pic·chā …पे…pe तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Ye te bhikkhū appicchā …pe… te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

The monks of few desires complained and criticized him,
549

“कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma उपवाळोu·pa·vā·ḷo भिक्खुbhik·khu सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनुयुञ्जियमानोa·nu·yuñ·ji·ya·mā·no अवजानित्वाa·va·jā·nit·vā पटिजानिस्सति,pa·ṭi·jā·nis·sa·ti पटिजानित्वाpa·ṭi·jā·nit·vā अवजानिस्सति,a·va·jā·nis·sa·ti अञ्ञेनञ्ञंañ·ñe·nañ·ñaṃ पटिचरिस्सति,pa·ṭi·ca·ris·sa·ti सम्पजानमुसाsam·pa·jā·na·mu·sā भासिस्सती”ति।bhā·sis·sa·tī

“kathañhi nāma upavāḷo bhikkhu saṅghamajjhe āpattiyā anuyuñjiyamāno avajānitvā paṭijānissati, paṭijānitvā avajānissati, aññenaññaṁ paṭicarissati, sampajānamusā bhāsissatī”ti.

“How can the monk Upavāḷa act like this?”
550

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुंā·ro·ce·suṃ …पे…pe

Atha kho te bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ …pe…

They told the Buddha. …
551

“सच्चंsac·caṃ किर,ki·ra भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…pe

“saccaṁ kira, bhikkhave …pe…

“Is it true, monks, that the monk Upavāḷa is acting like this?”
552

“सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”तिbha·ga·vā …पे…pe

“saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti …pe…

“It’s true, sir.” …
553

विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā …पे…pe

vigarahitvā …pe…

After rebuking him …
554

धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
555

“तेनte·na हि,hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सङ्घोsaṅ·gho उपवाळस्सu·pa·vā·ḷas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करोतु।ka·ro·tu

“tena hi, bhikkhave, saṅgho upavāḷassa bhikkhuno tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ karotu.

“Well then, the Sangha should do a legal procedure of further penalty against the monk Upavāḷa.
556

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कातब्बं।kā·tab·baṃ

Evañca pana, bhikkhave, kātabbaṁ.

And it should be done like this.
557

पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ उपवाळोu·pa·vā·ḷo भिक्खुbhik·khu चोदेतब्बो,co·de·tab·bo चोदेत्वाco·det·vā सारेतब्बो,sā·re·tab·bo सारेत्वाsā·ret·vā आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आरोपेतब्बो,ā·ro·pe·tab·bo आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Paṭhamaṁ upavāḷo bhikkhu codetabbo, codetvā sāretabbo, sāretvā āpattiṁ āropetabbo, āpattiṁ āropetvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

First you should accuse the monk Upavāḷa. He should then be reminded of what he has done, before he’s charged with an offense. A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:
558

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
559

अयंa·yaṃ उपवाळोu·pa·vā·ḷo भिक्खुbhik·khu सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनुयुञ्जियमानोa·nu·yuñ·ji·ya·mā·no अवजानित्वाa·va·jā·nit·vā पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti पटिजानित्वाpa·ṭi·jā·nit·vā अवजानाति,a·va·jā·nā·ti अञ्ञेनञ्ञंañ·ñe·nañ·ñaṃ पटिचरति,pa·ṭi·ca·ra·ti सम्पजानमुसाsam·pa·jā·na·mu·sā भासति।bhā·sa·ti

Ayaṁ upavāḷo bhikkhu saṅghamajjhe āpattiyā anuyuñjiyamāno avajānitvā paṭijānāti, paṭijānitvā avajānāti, aññenaññaṁ paṭicarati, sampajānamusā bhāsati.

The monk Upavāḷa, while being examined in the midst of the Sangha about an offense, asserted things after denying them, denied things after asserting them, evaded the issue, and lied.
560

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho उपवाळस्सu·pa·vā·ḷas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करेय्य।ka·rey·ya

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho upavāḷassa bhikkhuno tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ kareyya.

If the Sangha is ready, it should do a legal procedure of further penalty against the monk Upavāḷa.
561

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
562

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
563

अयंa·yaṃ उपवाळोu·pa·vā·ḷo भिक्खुbhik·khu सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनुयुञ्जियमानोa·nu·yuñ·ji·ya·mā·no अवजानित्वाa·va·jā·nit·vā पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti पटिजानित्वाpa·ṭi·jā·nit·vā अवजानाति,a·va·jā·nā·ti अञ्ञेनञ्ञंañ·ñe·nañ·ñaṃ पटिचरति,pa·ṭi·ca·ra·ti सम्पजानमुसाsam·pa·jā·na·mu·sā भासति।bhā·sa·ti

Ayaṁ upavāḷo bhikkhu saṅghamajjhe āpattiyā anuyuñjiyamāno avajānitvā paṭijānāti, paṭijānitvā avajānāti, aññenaññaṁ paṭicarati, sampajānamusā bhāsati.

The monk Upavāḷa, while being examined in the midst of the Sangha about an offense, asserted things after denying them, denied things after asserting them, evaded the issue, and lied.
564

सङ्घोsaṅ·gho उपवाळस्सu·pa·vā·ḷas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करोति।ka·ro·ti

Saṅgho upavāḷassa bhikkhuno tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ karoti.

The Sangha does a legal procedure of further penalty against the monk Upavāḷa.
565

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti उपवाळस्सu·pa·vā·ḷas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मस्सtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·mas·sa करणं,ka·ra·ṇaṃ सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati upavāḷassa bhikkhuno tassapāpiyasikākammassa karaṇaṁ, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves of doing a legal procedure of further penalty against the monk Upavāḷa should remain silent.
566

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
567

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi …पे…pe

Dutiyampi etamatthaṁ vadāmi …pe…

For the second time, I speak on this matter. …
568

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi …पे…।pe

tatiyampi etamatthaṁ vadāmi …pe….

For the third time, I speak on this matter. …
569

कतंka·taṃ सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na उपवाळस्सu·pa·vā·ḷas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मं।tas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ

Kataṁ saṅghena upavāḷassa bhikkhuno tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ.

The Sangha has done a legal procedure of further penalty against the monk Upavāḷa.
570

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’
571

पञ्चिमानि,pañ·ci·mā·ni भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve धम्मिकानिdham·mi·kā·ni तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मस्सtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·mas·sa करणानि।ka·ra·ṇā·ni

Pañcimāni, bhikkhave, dhammikāni tassapāpiyasikākammassa karaṇāni.

There are five factors of a legitimate legal procedure of further penalty:
572

असुचिa·su·ci चca होति,ho·ti अलज्जीa·laj·jī च,ca सानुवादोsā·nu·vā·do च,ca तस्सtas·sa सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करोतिka·ro·ti धम्मेन,dham·me·na समग्गेन—sa·mag·ge·na

Asuci ca hoti, alajjī ca, sānuvādo ca, tassa saṅgho tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ karoti dhammena, samaggena—

the subject of the procedure is impure; he’s shameless; he has been accused; the procedure is legitimate; the procedure is done by a unanimous assembly.”
573

इमानिi·mā·ni खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve पञ्चpañ·ca धम्मिकानिdham·mi·kā·ni तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मस्सtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·mas·sa करणानि।ka·ra·ṇā·ni

imāni kho, bhikkhave, pañca dhammikāni tassapāpiyasikākammassa karaṇāni.

(Pāli only)
574

6।1। अधम्मकम्मद्वादसकa·dham·ma·kam·mad·vā·da·sa·ka

6.1. Adhammakammadvādasaka

The group of twelve on illegitimate legal procedures
575

तीहि,tī·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अङ्गेहिaṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतंsa·man·nā·ga·taṃ तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ अधम्मकम्मञ्चa·dham·ma·kam·mañ·ca होति,ho·ti अविनयकम्मञ्च,a·vi·na·ya·kam·mañ·ca दुवूपसन्तञ्च।du·vū·pa·san·tañ·ca

Tīhi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgataṁ tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ adhammakammañca hoti, avinayakammañca, duvūpasantañca.

“When a legal procedure of further penalty has three qualities, it’s illegitimate, contrary to the Monastic Law, and improperly disposed of:
576

असम्मुखाa·sam·mu·khā कतंka·taṃ होति,ho·ti अप्पटिपुच्छाकतंap·pa·ṭi·puc·chā·ka·taṃ होति,ho·ti अप्पटिञ्ञायap·pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ya कतंka·taṃ होतिho·ti …पे…pe

Asammukhā kataṁ hoti, appaṭipucchākataṁ hoti, appaṭiññāya kataṁ hoti …pe…

it’s done in the absence of the accused, it’s done without questioning the accused, it’s done without the admission of the accused.
577

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also illegitimate, contrary to the Monastic Law, and improperly disposed of: it’s done against one who hasn’t committed any offense, it’s done against one who’s committed an offense that isn’t clearable by confession, it’s done against one who’s confessed their offense.
578

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also illegitimate, contrary to the Monastic Law, and improperly disposed of: it’s done without having accused the person of their offense, it’s done without having reminded the person of their offense, it’s done without having charged the person with their offense.
579

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also illegitimate, contrary to the Monastic Law, and improperly disposed of: it’s done in the absence of the accused, it’s done illegitimately, it’s done by an incomplete assembly.
580

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also illegitimate, contrary to the Monastic Law, and improperly disposed of: it’s done without questioning the accused, it’s done illegitimately, it’s done by an incomplete assembly.
581

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also illegitimate, contrary to the Monastic Law, and improperly disposed of: it’s done without the admission of the accused, it’s done illegitimately, it’s done by an incomplete assembly.
582

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also illegitimate, contrary to the Monastic Law, and improperly disposed of: it’s done against one who hasn’t committed any offense, it’s done illegitimately, it’s done by an incomplete assembly.
583

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also illegitimate, contrary to the Monastic Law, and improperly disposed of: it’s done against one who’s committed an offense that isn’t clearable by confession, it’s done illegitimately, it’s done by an incomplete assembly.
584

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also illegitimate, contrary to the Monastic Law, and improperly disposed of: it’s done against one who’s confessed their offense, it’s done illegitimately, it’s done by an incomplete assembly.
585

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also illegitimate, contrary to the Monastic Law, and improperly disposed of: it’s done without having accused the person of their offense, it’s done illegitimately, it’s done by an incomplete assembly.
586

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also illegitimate, contrary to the Monastic Law, and improperly disposed of: it’s done without having reminded the person of their offense, it’s done illegitimately, it’s done by an incomplete assembly.
587

… अधम्मेनa·dham·me·na कतंka·taṃ होति,ho·ti वग्गेनvag·ge·na कतंka·taṃ होति—ho·ti

… adhammena kataṁ hoti, vaggena kataṁ hoti—

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also illegitimate, contrary to the Monastic Law, and improperly disposed of: it’s done without having charged the person with their offense, it’s done illegitimately, it’s done by an incomplete assembly.”
588

इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तीहङ्गेहिtī·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतंsa·man·nā·ga·taṃ तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ अधम्मकम्मञ्चa·dham·ma·kam·mañ·ca होति,ho·ti अविनयकम्मञ्च,a·vi·na·ya·kam·mañ·ca दुवूपसन्तञ्च।du·vū·pa·san·tañ·ca

imehi kho, bhikkhave, tīhaṅgehi samannāgataṁ tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ adhammakammañca hoti, avinayakammañca, duvūpasantañca.

(Pāli only)
589

6।2। धम्मकम्मद्वादसकdham·ma·kam·mad·vā·da·sa·ka

6.2. Dhammakammadvādasaka

The group of twelve on legitimate legal procedures
590

तीहि,tī·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अङ्गेहिaṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतंsa·man·nā·ga·taṃ तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ धम्मकम्मञ्चdham·ma·kam·mañ·ca होति,ho·ti विनयकम्मञ्च,vi·na·ya·kam·mañ·ca सुवूपसन्तञ्च।su·vū·pa·san·tañ·ca

Tīhi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgataṁ tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ dhammakammañca hoti, vinayakammañca, suvūpasantañca.

“When a legal procedure of further penalty has three qualities, it’s legitimate, in accordance with the Monastic Law, and properly disposed of:
591

सम्मुखाsam·mu·khā कतंka·taṃ होति,ho·ti पटिपुच्छाकतंpa·ṭi·puc·chā·ka·taṃ होति,ho·ti पटिञ्ञायpa·ṭiñ·ñā·ya कतंka·taṃ होतिho·ti …पे…pe

Sammukhā kataṁ hoti, paṭipucchākataṁ hoti, paṭiññāya kataṁ hoti …pe…

it’s done in the presence of the accused, it’s done with the questioning of the accused, it’s done with the admission of the accused.
592

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also legitimate, in accordance with the Monastic Law, and properly disposed of: it’s done against one who’s committed an offense, it’s done against one who’s committed an offense that’s clearable by confession, it’s done against one who hasn’t confessed their offense.
593

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also legitimate, in accordance with the Monastic Law, and properly disposed of: it’s done after having accused the person of their offense, it’s done after having reminded the person of their offense, it’s done after having charged the person with their offense.
594

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also legitimate, in accordance with the Monastic Law, and properly disposed of: it’s done in the presence of the accused, it’s done legitimately, it’s done by a unanimous assembly.
595

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also legitimate, in accordance with the Monastic Law, and properly disposed of: it’s done with the questioning of the accused, it’s done legitimately, it’s done by a unanimous assembly.
596

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also legitimate, in accordance with the Monastic Law, and properly disposed of: it’s done with the admission of the accused, it’s done legitimately, it’s done by a unanimous assembly.
597

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also legitimate, in accordance with the Monastic Law, and properly disposed of: it’s done against one who’s committed an offense, it’s done legitimately, it’s done by a unanimous assembly.
598

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also legitimate, in accordance with the Monastic Law, and properly disposed of: it’s done against one who’s committed an offense that’s clearable by confession, it’s done legitimately, it’s done by a unanimous assembly.
599

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also legitimate, in accordance with the Monastic Law, and properly disposed of: it’s done against one who hasn’t confessed their offense, it’s done legitimately, it’s done by a unanimous assembly.
600

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also legitimate, in accordance with the Monastic Law, and properly disposed of: it’s done after having accused the person of their offense, it’s done legitimately, it’s done by a unanimous assembly.
601

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also legitimate, in accordance with the Monastic Law, and properly disposed of: it’s done after having reminded the person of their offense, it’s done legitimately, it’s done by a unanimous assembly.
602

… धम्मेनdham·me·na कतंka·taṃ होति,ho·ti समग्गेनsa·mag·ge·na कतंka·taṃ होति—ho·ti

… dhammena kataṁ hoti, samaggena kataṁ hoti—

When a procedure of further penalty has another three qualities, it’s also legitimate, in accordance with the Monastic Law, and properly disposed of: it’s done after charging the person with their offense, it’s done legitimately, it’s done by a unanimous assembly.”
603

इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तीहङ्गेहिtī·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतंsa·man·nā·ga·taṃ तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ धम्मकम्मञ्चdham·ma·kam·mañ·ca होति,ho·ti विनयकम्मञ्च,vi·na·ya·kam·mañ·ca सुवूपसन्तञ्च।su·vū·pa·san·tañ·ca

imehi kho, bhikkhave, tīhaṅgehi samannāgataṁ tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ dhammakammañca hoti, vinayakammañca, suvūpasantañca.

(Pāli only)
604

6।3। आकङ्खमानछक्कā·kaṅ·kha·mā·na·chak·ka

6.3. Ākaṅkhamānachakka

The group of six on wishing
605

तीहि,tī·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अङ्गेहिaṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतस्सsa·man·nā·ga·tas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no आकङ्खमानोā·kaṅ·kha·mā·no सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करेय्य।ka·rey·ya

Tīhi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgatassa bhikkhuno ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ kareyya.

“When a monk has three qualities, the Sangha may, if it wishes, do a legal procedure of further penalty against him:
606

भण्डनकारकोbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·ko होतिho·ti कलहकारकोka·la·ha·kā·ra·ko विवादकारकोvi·vā·da·kā·ra·ko भस्सकारकोbhas·sa·kā·ra·ko सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारको;a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·ko

Bhaṇḍanakārako hoti kalahakārako vivādakārako bhassakārako saṅghe adhikaraṇakārako;

he’s quarrelsome, argumentative, and a creator of legal issues in the Sangha;
607

बालोbā·lo होतिho·ti अब्यत्तोab·yat·to आपत्तिबहुलोā·pat·ti·ba·hu·lo अनपदानो;a·na·pa·dā·no

bālo hoti abyatto āpattibahulo anapadāno;

he’s ignorant and incompetent, often committing offenses, and lacking in boundaries;
608

गिहिसंसट्ठोgi·hi·saṃ·saṭ·ṭho विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अननुलोमिकेहिa·na·nu·lo·mi·ke·hi गिहिसंसग्गेहि—gi·hi·saṃ·sag·ge·hi

gihisaṁsaṭṭho viharati ananulomikehi gihisaṁsaggehi—

he’s constantly and improperly socializing with householders.
609

इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तीहङ्गेहिtī·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतस्सsa·man·nā·ga·tas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no आकङ्खमानोā·kaṅ·kha·mā·no सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करेय्य।ka·rey·ya

imehi kho, bhikkhave, tīhaṅgehi samannāgatassa bhikkhuno ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ kareyya.

(Pāli only)
610

अपरेहिपि,a·pa·re·hi·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तीहङ्गेहिtī·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतस्सsa·man·nā·ga·tas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no आकङ्खमानोā·kaṅ·kha·mā·no सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करेय्य।ka·rey·ya

Aparehipi, bhikkhave, tīhaṅgehi samannāgatassa bhikkhuno ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ kareyya.

When a monk has another three qualities, the Sangha may, if it wishes, do a procedure of further penalty against him:
611

अधिसीलेa·dhi·sī·le सीलविपन्नोsī·la·vi·pan·no होति,ho·ti अज्झाचारेaj·jhā·cā·re आचारविपन्नोā·cā·ra·vi·pan·no होति,ho·ti अतिदिट्ठियाa·ti·diṭ·ṭhi·yā दिट्ठिविपन्नोdiṭ·ṭhi·vi·pan·no होति—ho·ti

Adhisīle sīlavipanno hoti, ajjhācāre ācāravipanno hoti, atidiṭṭhiyā diṭṭhivipanno hoti—

he has failed in the higher morality; he has failed in the higher conduct; he has failed in the higher view.
612

इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…।pe

imehi kho, bhikkhave …pe….

(Pāli only)
613

अपरेहिपि,a·pa·re·hi·pi भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…pe

Aparehipi, bhikkhave …pe…

When a monk has another three qualities, the Sangha may, if it wishes, do a procedure of further penalty against him:
614

बुद्धस्सbud·dhas·sa अवण्णंa·vaṇ·ṇaṃ भासति,bhā·sa·ti धम्मस्सdham·mas·sa अवण्णंa·vaṇ·ṇaṃ भासति,bhā·sa·ti सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa अवण्णंa·vaṇ·ṇaṃ भासति—bhā·sa·ti

buddhassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, dhammassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, saṅghassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati—

he disparages the Buddha; he disparages the Teaching; he disparages the Sangha.
615

इमेहिi·me·hi खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तीहङ्गेहिtī·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतस्सsa·man·nā·ga·tas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no आकङ्खमानोā·kaṅ·kha·mā·no सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करेय्य।ka·rey·ya

imehi kho, bhikkhave, tīhaṅgehi samannāgatassa bhikkhuno ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ kareyya.

(Pāli only)
616

तिण्णं,tiṇ·ṇaṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ आकङ्खमानोā·kaṅ·kha·mā·no सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करेय्य।ka·rey·ya

Tiṇṇaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ kareyya.

The Sangha may, if it wishes, do a procedure of further penalty against three kinds of monks:
617

एकोe·ko भण्डनकारकोbhaṇ·ḍa·na·kā·ra·ko होतिho·ti …पे…pe

Eko bhaṇḍanakārako hoti …pe…

those who are quarrelsome, argumentative,
618

सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अधिकरणकारको;a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·kā·ra·ko

saṅghe adhikaraṇakārako;

and creators of legal issues in the Sangha;
619

एकोe·ko बालोbā·lo होतिho·ti अब्यत्तोab·yat·to आपत्तिबहुलोā·pat·ti·ba·hu·lo अनपदानो;a·na·pa·dā·no

eko bālo hoti abyatto āpattibahulo anapadāno;

those who are ignorant and incompetent, often committing offenses, and lacking in boundaries;
620

एकोe·ko गिहिसंसट्ठोgi·hi·saṃ·saṭ·ṭho विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अननुलोमिकेहिa·na·nu·lo·mi·ke·hi गिहिसंसग्गेहि—gi·hi·saṃ·sag·ge·hi

eko gihisaṁsaṭṭho viharati ananulomikehi gihisaṁsaggehi—

those who are constantly and improperly socializing with householders.
621

इमेसंi·me·saṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तिण्णंtiṇ·ṇaṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ आकङ्खमानोā·kaṅ·kha·mā·no सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करेय्य।ka·rey·ya

imesaṁ kho, bhikkhave, tiṇṇaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ kareyya.

(Pāli only)
622

अपरेसम्पि,a·pa·re·sam·pi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तिण्णंtiṇ·ṇaṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ आकङ्खमानोā·kaṅ·kha·mā·no सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करेय्य।ka·rey·ya

Aparesampi, bhikkhave, tiṇṇaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ kareyya.

The Sangha may, if it wishes, do a procedure of further penalty against three other kinds of monks:
623

एकोe·ko अधिसीलेa·dhi·sī·le सीलविपन्नोsī·la·vi·pan·no होति,ho·ti एकोe·ko अज्झाचारेaj·jhā·cā·re आचारविपन्नोā·cā·ra·vi·pan·no होति,ho·ti एकोe·ko अतिदिट्ठियाa·ti·diṭ·ṭhi·yā दिट्ठिविपन्नोdiṭ·ṭhi·vi·pan·no होति—ho·ti

Eko adhisīle sīlavipanno hoti, eko ajjhācāre ācāravipanno hoti, eko atidiṭṭhiyā diṭṭhivipanno hoti—

those who’ve failed in the higher morality; those who’ve failed in the higher conduct; those who’ve failed in the higher view.
624

इमेसंi·me·saṃ खो,kho भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…।pe

imesaṁ kho, bhikkhave …pe….

(Pāli only)
625

अपरेसम्पि,a·pa·re·sam·pi भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…pe

Aparesampi, bhikkhave …pe…

The Sangha may, if it wishes, do a procedure of further penalty against three other kinds of monks:
626

एकोe·ko बुद्धस्सbud·dhas·sa अवण्णंa·vaṇ·ṇaṃ भासति,bhā·sa·ti एकोe·ko धम्मस्सdham·mas·sa अवण्णंa·vaṇ·ṇaṃ भासति,bhā·sa·ti एकोe·ko सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa अवण्णंa·vaṇ·ṇaṃ भासति—bhā·sa·ti

eko buddhassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, eko dhammassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati, eko saṅghassa avaṇṇaṁ bhāsati—

those who disparage the Buddha; those who disparage the Teaching; those who disparage the Sangha.”
627

इमेसंi·me·saṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तिण्णंtiṇ·ṇaṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ आकङ्खमानोā·kaṅ·kha·mā·no सङ्घोsaṅ·gho तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करेय्य।ka·rey·ya

imesaṁ kho, bhikkhave, tiṇṇaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ ākaṅkhamāno saṅgho tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ kareyya.

(Pāli only)
628

6।4। अट्ठारसवत्तaṭ·ṭhā·ra·sa·vat·ta

6.4. Aṭṭhārasavatta

The eighteen kinds of conduct
629

तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मकतेन,tas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·ma·ka·te·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सम्माsam·mā वत्तितब्बं।vat·ti·tab·baṃ

Tassapāpiyasikākammakatena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā sammā vattitabbaṁ.

“A monk who’s had a legal procedure of further penalty done against him should conduct himself properly.
630

तत्रायंtat·rā·yaṃ सम्मावत्तना—sam·mā·vat·ta·nā

Tatrāyaṁ sammāvattanā—

This is the proper conduct:
631

नna उपसम्पादेतब्बं,u·pa·sam·pā·de·tab·baṃ

Na upasampādetabbaṁ,

He shouldn’t give the full ordination.
632

नna निस्सयोnis·sa·yo दातब्बो,dā·tab·bo

na nissayo dātabbo,

He shouldn’t give formal support.
633

नna सामणेरोsā·ma·ṇe·ro उपट्ठापेतब्बो,u·paṭ·ṭhā·pe·tab·bo

na sāmaṇero upaṭṭhāpetabbo,

He shouldn’t have a novice monk attend on him.
634

नna भिक्खुनोवादकसम्मुतिbhik·khu·no·vā·da·ka·sam·mu·ti सादितब्बा,sā·di·tab·bā

na bhikkhunovādakasammuti sāditabbā,

He shouldn’t accept being appointed as an instructor of the nuns.
635

सम्मतेनपिsam·ma·te·na·pi भिक्खुनियोbhik·khu·ni·yo नna ओवदितब्बाo·va·di·tab·bā …पे…pe

sammatenapi bhikkhuniyo na ovaditabbā …pe…

Even if appointed, he shouldn’t instruct the nuns.
636

He shouldn’t commit the same offense as the offense for which the Sangha did the procedure of further penalty against him.
637

He shouldn’t commit an offense similar to the offense for which the Sangha did the procedure of further penalty against him.
638

He shouldn’t commit an offense worse than the offense for which the Sangha did the procedure of further penalty against him.
639

He shouldn’t criticize the procedure.
640

He shouldn’t criticize those who did the procedure.
641

He shouldn’t cancel the observance-day procedure of a regular monk.
642

He shouldn’t cancel the invitation of a regular monk.
643

He shouldn’t direct a regular monk.
644

He shouldn’t give instructions to a regular monk.
645

He shouldn’t ask a regular monk for permission to correct him.
646

He shouldn’t accuse a regular monk of an offense.
647

He shouldn’t remind a regular monk of an offense.
648

नna भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi सम्पयोजेतब्बन्”ति।sam·pa·yo·je·tab·ban

na bhikkhūhi sampayojetabban”ti.

He shouldn’t associate inappropriately with other monks.”
649

अथa·tha खोkho सङ्घोsaṅ·gho उपवाळस्सu·pa·vā·ḷas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ अकासि।a·kā·si

Atha kho saṅgho upavāḷassa bhikkhuno tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ akāsi.

The Sangha then did a legal procedure of further penalty against the monk Upavāḷa.
650

7। तिणवत्थारकti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ka

7. Tiṇavatthāraka

7. Covering over as if with grass
651

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ होतिho·ti भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhūnaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ hoti bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

At one time, while the monks were arguing and disputing, they did and said many things unworthy of monastics.
652

अथa·tha खोkho तेसंte·saṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एतदहोसि—e·ta·da·ho·si

Atha kho tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ etadahosi—

They considered this and thought,
653

“अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ खोkho भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

“amhākaṁ kho bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

(Pāli only)
654

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्य।saṃ·vat·tey·ya

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyya.

“If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism.
655

कथंka·thaṃ नुnu खोkho अम्हेहिam·he·hi पटिपज्जितब्बन्”ति?pa·ṭi·paj·ji·tab·ban

Kathaṁ nu kho amhehi paṭipajjitabban”ti?

So what should we do now?”
656

भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुं।ā·ro·ce·suṃ

Bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ.

They told the Buddha.
657

“इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ होतिho·ti भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

“Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ hoti bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

“It may be, monks, that monks who are arguing and disputing do and say many things unworthy of monastics.
658

तत्रtat·ra चेce भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एवंe·vaṃ होति—ho·ti

Tatra ce bhikkhūnaṁ evaṁ hoti—

If they consider this and think,
659

‘अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ खोkho भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं;bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

‘amhākaṁ kho bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ;

(Pāli only)
660

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्या’ति,saṃ·vat·tey·yā अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na वूपसमेतुं।vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ

sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyyā’ti, anujānāmi, bhikkhave, evarūpaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ tiṇavatthārakena vūpasametuṁ.

‘If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism,’ then I allow you to resolve that legal issue by covering over as if with grass.
661

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वूपसमेतब्बं।vū·pa·sa·me·tab·baṃ

Evañca pana, bhikkhave, vūpasametabbaṁ.

And it should be resolved like this.
662

सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va एकज्झंe·kaj·jhaṃ सन्निपतितब्बं,san·ni·pa·ti·tab·baṃ सन्निपतित्वाsan·ni·pa·tit·vā ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Sabbeheva ekajjhaṁ sannipatitabbaṁ, sannipatitvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

Everyone should gather in one place. A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:
663

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
664

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics.
665

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्य।saṃ·vat·tey·ya

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyya.

If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism.
666

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na वूपसमेय्य,vū·pa·sa·mey·ya ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तन्’ति।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·tan

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ tiṇavatthārakena vūpasameyya, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttan’ti.

If the Sangha is ready, it should resolve this legal issue by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.’
667

एकतोपक्खिकानंe·ka·to·pak·khi·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सकोsa·ko पक्खोpak·kho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena sako pakkho ñāpetabbo—

The monks belonging to one side should then be informed by a competent and capable monk belonging to their own side:
668

‘सुणन्तुsu·ṇan·tu मेme आयस्मन्ता।ā·yas·man·tā

‘Suṇantu me āyasmantā.

‘Please, venerables, I ask you to listen.
669

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics.
670

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्य।saṃ·vat·tey·ya

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyya.

If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism.
671

यदायस्मन्तानंya·dā·yas·man·tā·naṃ पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ अहंa·haṃ याyā चेवce·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti याyā चca अत्तनोat·ta·no आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti आयस्मन्तानञ्चेवā·yas·man·tā·nañ·ce·va अत्थाय,at·thā·ya अत्तनोat·ta·no चca अत्थाय,at·thā·ya सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na देसेय्यं,de·sey·yaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तन्’ति।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·tan

Yadāyasmantānaṁ pattakallaṁ, ahaṁ yā ceva āyasmantānaṁ āpatti, yā ca attano āpatti, āyasmantānañceva atthāya, attano ca atthāya, saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena deseyyaṁ, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttan’ti.

If the venerables are ready, then, for your benefit and for my own, I will confess in the midst of the Sangha both your and my own offenses by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.’
672

अथापरेसंa·thā·pa·re·saṃ एकतोपक्खिकानंe·ka·to·pak·khi·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सकोsa·ko पक्खोpak·kho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Athāparesaṁ ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena sako pakkho ñāpetabbo—

And the monks belonging to the other side should be informed by a competent and capable monk belonging to their own side:
673

‘सुणन्तुsu·ṇan·tu मेme आयस्मन्ता।ā·yas·man·tā

‘Suṇantu me āyasmantā.

‘Please, venerables, I ask you to listen.
674

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics.
675

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्य।saṃ·vat·tey·ya

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyya.

If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism.
676

यदायस्मन्तानंya·dā·yas·man·tā·naṃ पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ अहंa·haṃ याyā चेवce·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti याyā चca अत्तनोat·ta·no आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti आयस्मन्तानञ्चेवā·yas·man·tā·nañ·ce·va अत्थाय,at·thā·ya अत्तनोat·ta·no चca अत्थाय,at·thā·ya सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na देसेय्यं,de·sey·yaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तन्’ति।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·tan

Yadāyasmantānaṁ pattakallaṁ, ahaṁ yā ceva āyasmantānaṁ āpatti, yā ca attano āpatti, āyasmantānañceva atthāya, attano ca atthāya, saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena deseyyaṁ, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttan’ti.

If the venerables are ready, then, for your benefit and for my own, I will confess in the midst of the Sangha both your and my own offenses by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.’
677

अथापरेसंa·thā·pa·re·saṃ एकतोपक्खिकानंe·ka·to·pak·khi·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Athāparesaṁ ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

A competent and capable monk belonging to one side should then inform the Sangha:
678

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
679

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics.
680

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्य।saṃ·vat·tey·ya

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyya.

If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism.
681

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ अहंa·haṃ याyā चेवce·va इमेसंi·me·saṃ आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti याyā चca अत्तनोat·ta·no आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti इमेसञ्चेवi·me·sañ·ce·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ अत्थाय,at·thā·ya अत्तनोat·ta·no चca अत्थाय,at·thā·ya सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na देसेय्यं,de·sey·yaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तं।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·taṃ

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, ahaṁ yā ceva imesaṁ āyasmantānaṁ āpatti, yā ca attano āpatti, imesañceva āyasmantānaṁ atthāya, attano ca atthāya, saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena deseyyaṁ, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttaṁ.

If the Sangha is ready, then, for the benefit of these venerables and myself, I will confess in the midst of the Sangha both their and my own offenses by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.
682

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
683

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
684

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics.
685

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्य।saṃ·vat·tey·ya

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyya.

If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism.
686

अहंa·haṃ याyā चेवce·va इमेसंi·me·saṃ आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti याyā चca अत्तनोat·ta·no आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti इमेसञ्चेवi·me·sañ·ce·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ अत्थाय,at·thā·ya अत्तनोat·ta·no चca अत्थाय,at·thā·ya सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na देसेमि,de·se·mi ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तं।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·taṃ

Ahaṁ yā ceva imesaṁ āyasmantānaṁ āpatti, yā ca attano āpatti, imesañceva āyasmantānaṁ atthāya, attano ca atthāya, saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena desemi, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttaṁ.

For the benefit of these venerables and myself, I confess in the midst of the Sangha both their and my own offenses by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.
687

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ इमासंi·mā·saṃ आपत्तीनंā·pat·tī·naṃ सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na देसना,de·sa·nā ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तं,gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·taṃ सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati amhākaṁ imāsaṁ āpattīnaṁ saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena desanā, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttaṁ, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves of confessing our offenses in the midst of the Sangha by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders, should remain silent.
688

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
689

देसिताde·si·tā अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ इमाi·mā आपत्तियोā·pat·ti·yo सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेन,ti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तं।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·taṃ

Desitā amhākaṁ imā āpattiyo saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttaṁ.

We have confessed our offenses in the midst of the Sangha by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.
690

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’
691

अथापरेसंa·thā·pa·re·saṃ एकतोपक्खिकानंe·ka·to·pak·khi·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Athāparesaṁ ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

And a competent and capable monk belonging to the other side should inform the Sangha:
692

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
693

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics.
694

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्य।saṃ·vat·tey·ya

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyya.

If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism.
695

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ अहंa·haṃ याyā चेवce·va इमेसंi·me·saṃ आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti याyā चca अत्तनोat·ta·no आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti इमेसञ्चेवi·me·sañ·ce·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ अत्थाय,at·thā·ya अत्तनोat·ta·no चca अत्थाय,at·thā·ya सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na देसेय्यं,de·sey·yaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तं।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·taṃ

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, ahaṁ yā ceva imesaṁ āyasmantānaṁ āpatti, yā ca attano āpatti, imesañceva āyasmantānaṁ atthāya, attano ca atthāya, saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena deseyyaṁ, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttaṁ.

If the Sangha is ready, then, for the benefit of these venerables and myself, I will confess in the midst of the Sangha both their and my own offenses by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.
696

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
697

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
698

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics.
699

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्य।saṃ·vat·tey·ya

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyya.

If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism.
700

अहंa·haṃ याyā चेवce·va इमेसंi·me·saṃ आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti याyā चca अत्तनोat·ta·no आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti इमेसञ्चेवi·me·sañ·ce·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ अत्थाय,at·thā·ya अत्तनोat·ta·no चca अत्थाय,at·thā·ya सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na देसेमि,de·se·mi ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तं।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·taṃ

Ahaṁ yā ceva imesaṁ āyasmantānaṁ āpatti, yā ca attano āpatti, imesañceva āyasmantānaṁ atthāya, attano ca atthāya, saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena desemi, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttaṁ.

For the benefit of these venerables and myself, I confess in the midst of the Sangha both their and my own offenses by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.
701

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ इमासंi·mā·saṃ आपत्तीनंā·pat·tī·naṃ सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na देसना,de·sa·nā ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तं,gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·taṃ सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati amhākaṁ imāsaṁ āpattīnaṁ saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena desanā, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttaṁ, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves of confessing our offenses in the midst of the Sangha by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders, should remain silent.
702

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
703

देसिताde·si·tā अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ इमाi·mā आपत्तियोā·pat·ti·yo सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेन,ti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तं।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·taṃ

Desitā amhākaṁ imā āpattiyo saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttaṁ.

We have confessed our offenses in the midst of the Sangha by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.
704

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’
705

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū ताहिtā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi वुट्ठिताvuṭ·ṭhi·tā होन्ति,hon·ti ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तं,gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·taṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā दिट्ठाविकम्मं,diṭ·ṭhā·vi·kam·maṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā येye नna तत्थtat·tha होन्ती”ति।hon·tī

Evañca pana, bhikkhave, te bhikkhū tāhi āpattīhi vuṭṭhitā honti, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttaṁ, ṭhapetvā diṭṭhāvikammaṁ, ṭhapetvā ye na tattha hontī”ti.

In this way those monks are cleared of those offenses, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders, and except for those monks who voice their disapproval and those who are absent.”
706

8। अधिकरणa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa

8. Adhikaraṇa

8. Legal issues
707

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na भिक्खूपिbhik·khū·pi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi विवदन्ति,vi·va·dan·ti भिक्खूपिbhik·khū·pi भिक्खुनीहिbhik·khu·nī·hi विवदन्ति,vi·va·dan·ti भिक्खुनियोपिbhik·khu·ni·yo·pi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi विवदन्ति,vi·va·dan·ti छन्नोपिchan·no·pi भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खुनीनंbhik·khu·nī·naṃ अनुपखज्जa·nu·pa·khaj·ja भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ विवदति,vi·va·da·ti भिक्खुनीनंbhik·khu·nī·naṃ पक्खंpak·khaṃ गाहेति।gā·he·ti

Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhūpi bhikkhūhi vivadanti, bhikkhūpi bhikkhunīhi vivadanti, bhikkhuniyopi bhikkhūhi vivadanti, channopi bhikkhu bhikkhunīnaṁ anupakhajja bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ vivadati, bhikkhunīnaṁ pakkhaṁ gāheti.

On one occasion monks were disputing with monks, monks with nuns, and nuns with monks. Standing with the nuns, the monk Channa disputed with the monks, making others side with the nuns.
708

येye तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū अप्पिच्छाap·pic·chā …पे…pe तेte उज्झायन्तिuj·jhā·yan·ti खिय्यन्तिkhiy·yan·ti विपाचेन्ति—vi·pā·cen·ti

Ye te bhikkhū appicchā …pe… te ujjhāyanti khiyyanti vipācenti—

The monks of few desires … complained and criticized him,
709

“कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma छन्नोchan·no भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खुनीनंbhik·khu·nī·naṃ अनुपखज्जa·nu·pa·khaj·ja भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ विवदिस्सति,vi·va·dis·sa·ti भिक्खुनीनंbhik·khu·nī·naṃ पक्खंpak·khaṃ गाहेस्सतीति।gā·hes·sa·tī·ti

“kathañhi nāma channo bhikkhu bhikkhunīnaṁ anupakhajja bhikkhūhi saddhiṁ vivadissati, bhikkhunīnaṁ pakkhaṁ gāhessatīti.

“How can the monk Channa act like this?”
710

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुंā·ro·ce·suṃ …पे…pe

Atha kho te bhikkhū bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ …pe…

They told the Buddha. …
711

सच्चंsac·caṃ किर,ki·ra भिक्खवेbhik·kha·ve …पे…pe

saccaṁ kira, bhikkhave …pe…

“Is it true, monks, that the monk Channa is acting like this?”
712

सच्चं,sac·caṃ भगवा”तिbha·ga·vā …पे…pe

saccaṁ, bhagavā”ti …pe…

“It’s true, sir.” …
713

विगरहित्वाvi·ga·ra·hit·vā …पे…pe

vigarahitvā …pe…

After rebuking him …
714

धम्मिंdham·miṃ कथंka·thaṃ कत्वाkat·vā भिक्खूbhik·khū आमन्तेसि—ā·man·te·si

dhammiṁ kathaṁ katvā bhikkhū āmantesi—

the Buddha gave a teaching and addressed the monks:
715

Definitions
716

“चत्तारिमानि,cat·tā·ri·mā·ni भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणानि—a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇā·ni विवादाधिकरणं,vi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अनुवादाधिकरणं,a·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ आपत्ताधिकरणं,ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ किच्चाधिकरणं।kic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

“Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇāni— vivādādhikaraṇaṁ, anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ, āpattādhikaraṇaṁ, kiccādhikaraṇaṁ.

“Monks, there are four kinds of legal issues: legal issues arising from disputes; legal issues arising from accusations; legal issues arising from offenses; legal issues arising from business.
717

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ विवादाधिकरणं?vi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Tattha katamaṁ vivādādhikaraṇaṁ?

What’s a legal issue arising from a dispute?
718

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū विवदन्ति—vi·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū vivadanti—

It may be that monks are disputing, saying,
719

धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti वाvā अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti वा,vā विनयोतिvi·na·yo·ti वाvā अविनयोतिa·vi·na·yo·ti वा,vā भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वाvā अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वा,vā आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वाvā अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वा,vā पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वाvā अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वा,vā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अनापत्तीतिa·nā·pat·tī·ti वा,vā लहुकाla·hu·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā गरुकाga·ru·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा,vā सावसेसाsā·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अनवसेसाa·na·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा,vā दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा?vā

dhammoti vā adhammoti vā, vinayoti vā avinayoti vā, bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatenāti vā abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatenāti vā, āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti vā anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti vā, paññattaṁ tathāgatenāti vā apaññattaṁ tathāgatenāti vā, āpattīti vā anāpattīti vā, lahukā āpattīti vā garukā āpattīti vā, sāvasesā āpattīti vā anavasesā āpattīti vā, duṭṭhullā āpattīti vā aduṭṭhullā āpattīti vā?

‘This is the Teaching’, ‘This is contrary to the Teaching’, ‘This is the Monastic Law’, ‘This is contrary to the Monastic Law’, ‘This was spoken by the Buddha’, ‘This wasn’t spoken by the Buddha’, ‘This was practiced by the Buddha’, ‘This wasn’t practiced by the Buddha’, ‘This was laid down by the Buddha’, ‘This wasn’t laid down by the Buddha’, ‘This is an offense’, ‘This isn’t an offense’, ‘This is a light offense’, ‘This is a heavy offense’, ‘This is a curable offense’, ‘This is an incurable offense’, ‘This is a grave offense’, or ‘This is a minor offense.’
720

यंyaṃ तत्थtat·tha भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do नानावादोnā·nā·vā·do अञ्ञथावादोañ·ña·thā·vā·do विपच्चतायvi·pac·ca·tā·ya वोहारोvo·hā·ro मेधगं—me·dha·gaṃ

Yaṁ tattha bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo nānāvādo aññathāvādo vipaccatāya vohāro medhagaṁ—

In regard to this, whatever there is of quarreling, arguing, conflict, disputing, variety in opinion, difference in opinion, heated speech, or strife—
721

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti विवादाधिकरणं।vi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

idaṁ vuccati vivādādhikaraṇaṁ.

this is called a legal issue arising from a dispute.
722

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ अनुवादाधिकरणं?a·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Tattha katamaṁ anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ?

What’s a legal issue arising from an accusation?
723

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अनुवदन्तिa·nu·va·dan·ti सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā वाvā आचारविपत्तियाā·cā·ra·vi·pat·ti·yā वाvā दिट्ठिविपत्तियाdiṭ·ṭhi·vi·pat·ti·yā वाvā आजीवविपत्तियाā·jī·va·vi·pat·ti·yā वा।vā

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū bhikkhuṁ anuvadanti sīlavipattiyā vā ācāravipattiyā vā diṭṭhivipattiyā vā ājīvavipattiyā vā.

It may be that monks accuse a monk of failure in morality, failure in conduct, failure in view, or failure in livelihood.
724

योyo तत्थtat·tha अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do अनुवदनाa·nu·va·da·nā अनुल्लपनाa·nul·la·pa·nā अनुभणनाa·nu·bha·ṇa·nā अनुसम्पवङ्कताa·nu·sam·pa·vaṅ·ka·tā अब्भुस्सहनताab·bhus·sa·ha·na·tā अनुबलप्पदानं—a·nu·ba·lap·pa·dā·naṃ

Yo tattha anuvādo anuvadanā anullapanā anubhaṇanā anusampavaṅkatā abbhussahanatā anubalappadānaṁ—

In regard to this, whatever there is of accusations, accusing, allegations, blame, taking sides because of friendship, taking part in the accusation, or supporting the accusation—
725

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti अनुवादाधिकरणं।a·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

idaṁ vuccati anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ.

this is called a legal issue arising from an accusation.
726

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ आपत्ताधिकरणं?ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Tattha katamaṁ āpattādhikaraṇaṁ?

What’s a legal issue arising from an offense?
727

पञ्चपिpañ·ca·pi आपत्तिक्खन्धाā·pat·tik·khan·dhā आपत्ताधिकरणं,ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सत्तपिsat·ta·pi आपत्तिक्खन्धाā·pat·tik·khan·dhā आपत्ताधिकरणं—ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Pañcapi āpattikkhandhā āpattādhikaraṇaṁ, sattapi āpattikkhandhā āpattādhikaraṇaṁ—

There are legal issues arising from offenses because of the five classes of offenses, and there are legal issues arising from offenses because of the seven classes of offenses—
728

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti आपत्ताधिकरणं।ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

idaṁ vuccati āpattādhikaraṇaṁ.

these are called legal issues arising from offenses.
729

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ किच्चाधिकरणं?kic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Tattha katamaṁ kiccādhikaraṇaṁ?

What’s a legal issue arising from business?
730

याyā सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa किच्चयता,kic·ca·ya·tā करणीयता,ka·ra·ṇī·ya·tā अपलोकनकम्मं,a·pa·lo·ka·na·kam·maṃ ञत्तिकम्मं,ñat·ti·kam·maṃ ञत्तिदुतियकम्मं,ñat·ti·du·ti·ya·kam·maṃ ञत्तिचतुत्थकम्मं—ñat·ti·ca·tut·tha·kam·maṃ

Yā saṅghassa kiccayatā, karaṇīyatā, apalokanakammaṁ, ñattikammaṁ, ñattidutiyakammaṁ, ñatticatutthakammaṁ—

Whatever is the duty or the business of the Sangha—a legal procedure consisting of getting permission, a legal procedure consisting of one motion, a legal procedure consisting of one motion and one announcement, a legal procedure consisting of one motion and three announcements—
731

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti किच्चाधिकरणं।kic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

idaṁ vuccati kiccādhikaraṇaṁ.

this is called a legal issue arising from business.”
732

The roots of legal issues arising from disputes
733

विवादाधिकरणस्सvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa किंkiṃ मूलं?mū·laṃ

Vivādādhikaraṇassa kiṁ mūlaṁ?

“What’s the root of legal issues arising from disputes?
734

छcha विवादमूलानिvi·vā·da·mū·lā·ni विवादाधिकरणस्सvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Cha vivādamūlāni vivādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

There are six roots of disputes that in turn are the root of legal issues arising from disputes.
735

तीणिपिtī·ṇi·pi अकुसलमूलानिa·ku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni विवादाधिकरणस्सvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं,mū·laṃ तीणिपिtī·ṇi·pi कुसलमूलानिku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni विवादाधिकरणस्सvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Tīṇipi akusalamūlāni vivādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ, tīṇipi kusalamūlāni vivādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

There are also three unwholesome and three wholesome roots of legal issues arising from disputes.
736

कतमानिka·ta·mā·ni छcha विवादमूलानिvi·vā·da·mū·lā·ni विवादाधिकरणस्सvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं?mū·laṃ

Katamāni cha vivādamūlāni vivādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ?

What are the six roots of disputes that in turn are the root of legal issues arising from disputes?
737

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu कोधनोko·dha·no होतिho·ti उपनाही।u·pa·nā·hī

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī.

It may be that a monk is angry and resentful.
738

योyo सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu कोधनोko·dha·no होतिho·ti उपनाही,u·pa·nā·hī सोso सत्थरिपिsat·tha·ri·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so धम्मेपिdham·me·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सङ्घेपिsaṅ·ghe·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सिक्खायपिsik·khā·ya·pi नna परिपूरकारीpa·ri·pū·ra·kā·rī होति।ho·ti

Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī, so sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghepi agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī hoti.

One who’s angry and resentful is disrespectful and undeferential toward the Teacher, the Teaching, and the Sangha, and he doesn’t fulfill the training.
739

योyo सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu सत्थरिपिsat·tha·ri·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so धम्मेपिdham·me·pi …पे…pe

Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi …pe…

Such a person
740

सङ्घेपिsaṅ·ghe·pi …पे…pe

saṅghepi …pe…

(Pāli only)
741

सिक्खायपिsik·khā·ya·pi नna परिपूरकारी,pa·ri·pū·ra·kā·rī सोso सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe विवादंvi·vā·daṃ जनेति।ja·ne·ti

sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī, so saṅghe vivādaṁ janeti.

creates disputes in the Sangha.
742

योyo होतिho·ti विवादोvi·vā·do बहुजनाहितायba·hu·ja·nā·hi·tā·ya बहुजनासुखायba·hu·ja·nā·su·khā·ya बहुनोba·hu·no जनस्सja·nas·sa अनत्थायa·nat·thā·ya अहितायa·hi·tā·ya दुक्खायduk·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

Yo hoti vivādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya bahuno janassa anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṁ.

Disputes are unbeneficial and a cause of unhappiness for humanity; they’re harmful, detrimental, and a cause of suffering for gods and humans.
743

एवरूपञ्चेe·va·rū·pañ·ce तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve विवादमूलंvi·vā·da·mū·laṃ अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ वाvā बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā वाvā समनुपस्सेय्याथ,sa·ma·nu·pas·sey·yā·tha तत्रtat·ra तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तस्सेवtas·se·va पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa पहानायpa·hā·nā·ya वायमेय्याथ।vā·ya·mey·yā·tha

Evarūpañce tumhe, bhikkhave, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā samanupasseyyātha, tatra tumhe, bhikkhave, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānāya vāyameyyātha.

Monks, when you see such a root of disputes either in yourself or in others, you should make an effort to get rid of it.
744

एवरूपञ्चेe·va·rū·pañ·ce तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve विवादमूलंvi·vā·da·mū·laṃ अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ वाvā बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā वाvā नna समनुपस्सेय्याथ,sa·ma·nu·pas·sey·yā·tha तत्रtat·ra तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तस्सेवtas·se·va पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनवस्सवायa·na·vas·sa·vā·ya पटिपज्जेय्याथ।pa·ṭi·paj·jey·yā·tha

Evarūpañce tumhe, bhikkhave, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā na samanupasseyyātha, tatra tumhe, bhikkhave, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavāya paṭipajjeyyātha.

If you don’t see such a root either in yourself or in others, you should practice so that it doesn’t emerge in the future.
745

एवमेतस्सe·va·me·tas·sa पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa पहानंpa·hā·naṃ होति।ho·ti

Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānaṁ hoti.

In this way that bad root of disputes is abandoned
746

एवमेतस्सe·va·me·tas·sa पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनवस्सवोa·na·vas·sa·vo होति।ho·ti

Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavo hoti.

and doesn’t emerge in the future.
747

पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu मक्खीmak·khī होतिho·ti पळासीpa·ḷā·sī …पे…pe

Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu makkhī hoti paḷāsī …pe…

Or it may be that a monk is denigrating and domineering,
748

इस्सुकीis·su·kī होतिho·ti मच्छरी,mac·cha·rī सठोsa·ṭho होतिho·ti मायावी,mā·yā·vī पापिच्छोpā·pic·cho होतिho·ti मिच्छादिट्ठी,mic·chā·diṭ·ṭhī सन्दिट्ठिपरामासीsan·diṭ·ṭhi·pa·rā·mā·sī होतिho·ti आधानग्गाहीā·dhā·nag·gā·hī दुप्पटिनिस्सग्गी।dup·pa·ṭi·nis·sag·gī

issukī hoti maccharī, saṭho hoti māyāvī, pāpiccho hoti micchādiṭṭhī, sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī.

envious and stingy, treacherous and deceitful, one who has bad desires and wrong views, or one who obstinately grasps his own views and only gives them up with difficulty.
749

योyo सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu सन्दिट्ठिपरामासीsan·diṭ·ṭhi·pa·rā·mā·sī होतिho·ti आधानग्गाहीā·dhā·nag·gā·hī दुप्पटिनिस्सग्गी,dup·pa·ṭi·nis·sag·gī सोso सत्थरिपिsat·tha·ri·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so धम्मेपिdham·me·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सङ्घेपिsaṅ·ghe·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सिक्खायपिsik·khā·ya·pi नna परिपूरकारीpa·ri·pū·ra·kā·rī होति।ho·ti

Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī, so sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghepi agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī hoti.

Such a monk is disrespectful and undeferential toward the Teacher, the Teaching, and the Sangha, and he doesn’t fulfill the training.
750

योyo सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu सत्थरिपिsat·tha·ri·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so धम्मेपिdham·me·pi …पे…pe

Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi …pe…

Such a person
751

सङ्घेपिsaṅ·ghe·pi …पे…pe

saṅghepi …pe…

(Pāli only)
752

सिक्खायपिsik·khā·ya·pi नna परिपूरकारी,pa·ri·pū·ra·kā·rī सोso सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe विवादंvi·vā·daṃ जनेति।ja·ne·ti

sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī, so saṅghe vivādaṁ janeti.

creates disputes in the Sangha.
753

योyo होतिho·ti विवादोvi·vā·do बहुजनाहितायba·hu·ja·nā·hi·tā·ya बहुजनासुखायba·hu·ja·nā·su·khā·ya बहुनोba·hu·no जनस्सja·nas·sa अनत्थायa·nat·thā·ya अहितायa·hi·tā·ya दुक्खायduk·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

Yo hoti vivādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya bahuno janassa anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṁ.

Disputes are unbeneficial and a cause of unhappiness for humanity; they’re harmful, detrimental, and a cause of suffering for gods and humans.
754

एवरूपञ्चेe·va·rū·pañ·ce तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve विवादमूलंvi·vā·da·mū·laṃ अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ वाvā बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā वाvā समनुपस्सेय्याथ,sa·ma·nu·pas·sey·yā·tha तत्रtat·ra तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तस्सेवtas·se·va पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa पहानायpa·hā·nā·ya वायमेय्याथ।vā·ya·mey·yā·tha

Evarūpañce tumhe, bhikkhave, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā samanupasseyyātha, tatra tumhe, bhikkhave, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānāya vāyameyyātha.

Monks, when you see such a root of disputes either in yourself or in others, you should make an effort to get rid of it.
755

एवरूपञ्चेe·va·rū·pañ·ce तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve विवादमूलंvi·vā·da·mū·laṃ अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ वाvā बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā वाvā नna समनुपस्सेय्याथ,sa·ma·nu·pas·sey·yā·tha तत्रtat·ra तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तस्सेवtas·se·va पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनवस्सवायa·na·vas·sa·vā·ya पटिपज्जेय्याथ।pa·ṭi·paj·jey·yā·tha

Evarūpañce tumhe, bhikkhave, vivādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā na samanupasseyyātha, tatra tumhe, bhikkhave, tasseva pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavāya paṭipajjeyyātha.

If you don’t see such a root either in yourself or in others, you should practice so that it doesn’t emerge in the future.
756

एवमेतस्सe·va·me·tas·sa पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa पहानंpa·hā·naṃ होति।ho·ti

Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa pahānaṁ hoti.

In this way that bad root of disputes is abandoned
757

एवमेतस्सe·va·me·tas·sa पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa विवादमूलस्सvi·vā·da·mū·las·sa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनवस्सवोa·na·vas·sa·vo होति।ho·ti

Evametassa pāpakassa vivādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavo hoti.

and doesn’t emerge in the future.
758

इमानिi·mā·ni छcha विवादमूलानिvi·vā·da·mū·lā·ni विवादाधिकरणस्सvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Imāni cha vivādamūlāni vivādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

(Pāli only)
759

कतमानिka·ta·mā·ni तीणिtī·ṇi अकुसलमूलानिa·ku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni विवादाधिकरणस्सvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं?mū·laṃ

Katamāni tīṇi akusalamūlāni vivādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ?

What are the three unwholesome roots of legal issues arising from disputes?
760

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū लुद्धचित्ताlud·dha·cit·tā विवदन्ति,vi·va·dan·ti दुट्ठचित्ताduṭ·ṭha·cit·tā विवदन्ति,vi·va·dan·ti मूळ्हचित्ताmū·ḷha·cit·tā विवदन्ति—vi·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū luddhacittā vivadanti, duṭṭhacittā vivadanti, mūḷhacittā vivadanti—

It may be that monks dispute with a mind of greed, ill will, or delusion, saying,
761

धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti वाvā अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti वा,vā विनयोतिvi·na·yo·ti वाvā अविनयोतिa·vi·na·yo·ti वा,vā भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वाvā अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वा,vā आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वाvā अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वा,vā पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वाvā अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वा,vā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अनापत्तीतिa·nā·pat·tī·ti वा,vā लहुकाla·hu·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā गरुकाga·ru·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा,vā सावसेसाsā·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अनवसेसाa·na·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा,vā दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा।vā

dhammoti vā adhammoti vā, vinayoti vā avinayoti vā, bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatenāti vā abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatenāti vā, āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti vā anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti vā, paññattaṁ tathāgatenāti vā apaññattaṁ tathāgatenāti vā, āpattīti vā anāpattīti vā, lahukā āpattīti vā garukā āpattīti vā, sāvasesā āpattīti vā anavasesā āpattīti vā, duṭṭhullā āpattīti vā aduṭṭhullā āpattīti vā.

‘This is the Teaching’, ‘This is contrary to the Teaching’, ‘This is the Monastic Law’, ‘This is contrary to the Monastic Law’, ‘This was spoken by the Buddha’, ‘This wasn’t spoken by the Buddha’, ‘This was practiced by the Buddha’, ‘This wasn’t practiced by the Buddha’, ‘This was laid down by the Buddha’, ‘This wasn’t laid down by the Buddha’, ‘This is an offense’, ‘This isn’t an offense’, ‘This is a light offense’, ‘This is a heavy offense’, ‘This is a curable offense’, ‘This is an incurable offense’, ‘This is a grave offense’, or ‘This is a minor offense.’
762

इमानिi·mā·ni तीणिtī·ṇi अकुसलमूलानिa·ku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni विवादाधिकरणस्सvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Imāni tīṇi akusalamūlāni vivādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

(Pāli only)
763

कतमानिka·ta·mā·ni तीणिtī·ṇi कुसलमूलानिku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni विवादाधिकरणस्सvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं?mū·laṃ

Katamāni tīṇi kusalamūlāni vivādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ?

What are the three wholesome roots of legal issues arising from disputes?
764

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū अलुद्धचित्ताa·lud·dha·cit·tā विवदन्ति,vi·va·dan·ti अदुट्ठचित्ताa·duṭ·ṭha·cit·tā विवदन्ति,vi·va·dan·ti अमूळ्हचित्ताa·mū·ḷha·cit·tā विवदन्ति—vi·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū aluddhacittā vivadanti, aduṭṭhacittā vivadanti, amūḷhacittā vivadanti—

It may be that monks dispute with a mind free from greed, ill will, and delusion, saying,
765

धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti वाvā अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti वाvā …पे…pe

dhammoti vā adhammoti vā …pe…

‘This is the Teaching’, ‘This is contrary to the Teaching’ …
766

दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा।vā

duṭṭhullā āpattīti vā aduṭṭhullā āpattīti vā.

‘This is a grave offense’, or ‘This is a minor offense.’”
767

इमानिi·mā·ni तीणिtī·ṇi कुसलमूलानिku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni विवादाधिकरणस्सvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Imāni tīṇi kusalamūlāni vivādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

(Pāli only)
768

The roots of legal issues arising from accusations
769

“अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa किंkiṃ मूलं?mū·laṃ

“Anuvādādhikaraṇassa kiṁ mūlaṁ?

“What’s the root of legal issues arising from accusations?
770

छcha अनुवादमूलानिa·nu·vā·da·mū·lā·ni अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Cha anuvādamūlāni anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

There are six roots of accusations that in turn are the root of legal issues arising from accusations.
771

तीणिपिtī·ṇi·pi अकुसलमूलानिa·ku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं,mū·laṃ तीणिपिtī·ṇi·pi कुसलमूलानिku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं,mū·laṃ कायोपिkā·yo·pi अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं,mū·laṃ वाचापिvā·cā·pi अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Tīṇipi akusalamūlāni anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ, tīṇipi kusalamūlāni anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ, kāyopi anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ, vācāpi anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

There are also three unwholesome and three wholesome roots of legal issues arising from accusations. The body, too, is a root of legal issues arising from accusations, as is speech.
772

कतमानिka·ta·mā·ni छcha अनुवादमूलानिa·nu·vā·da·mū·lā·ni अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं?mū·laṃ

Katamāni cha anuvādamūlāni anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ?

What are the six roots of accusations that in turn are the root of legal issues arising from accusations?
773

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu कोधनोko·dha·no होतिho·ti उपनाही।u·pa·nā·hī

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī.

It may be that a monk is angry and resentful.
774

योyo सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu कोधनोko·dha·no होतिho·ti उपनाही,u·pa·nā·hī सोso सत्थरिपिsat·tha·ri·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so धम्मेपिdham·me·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सङ्घेपिsaṅ·ghe·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सिक्खायपिsik·khā·ya·pi नna परिपूरकारीpa·ri·pū·ra·kā·rī होति।ho·ti

Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kodhano hoti upanāhī, so sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghepi agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī hoti.

One who’s angry and resentful is disrespectful and undeferential toward the Teacher, the Teaching, and the Sangha, and he doesn’t fulfill the training.
775

योyo सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu सत्थरिपिsat·tha·ri·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so धम्मेपिdham·me·pi …पे…pe

Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi …pe…

Such a person
776

सङ्घेपिsaṅ·ghe·pi …पे…pe

saṅghepi …pe…

(Pāli only)
777

सिक्खायपिsik·khā·ya·pi नna परिपूरकारी,pa·ri·pū·ra·kā·rī सोso सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अनुवादंa·nu·vā·daṃ जनेति।ja·ne·ti

sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī, so saṅghe anuvādaṁ janeti.

makes accusations in the Sangha.
778

योyo होतिho·ti अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do बहुजनाहितायba·hu·ja·nā·hi·tā·ya बहुजनासुखायba·hu·ja·nā·su·khā·ya बहुनोba·hu·no जनस्सja·nas·sa अनत्थायa·nat·thā·ya अहितायa·hi·tā·ya दुक्खायduk·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

Yo hoti anuvādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya bahuno janassa anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṁ.

Accusations are unbeneficial and a cause of unhappiness for humanity; they’re harmful, detrimental, and a cause of suffering for gods and humans.
779

एवरूपञ्चेe·va·rū·pañ·ce तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अनुवादमूलंa·nu·vā·da·mū·laṃ अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ वाvā बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā वाvā समनुपस्सेय्याथ,sa·ma·nu·pas·sey·yā·tha तत्रtat·ra तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तस्सेवtas·se·va पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa अनुवादमूलस्सa·nu·vā·da·mū·las·sa पहानायpa·hā·nā·ya वायमेय्याथ।vā·ya·mey·yā·tha

Evarūpañce tumhe, bhikkhave, anuvādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā samanupasseyyātha, tatra tumhe, bhikkhave, tasseva pāpakassa anuvādamūlassa pahānāya vāyameyyātha.

Monks, when you see such a root of accusations either in yourself or in others, you should make an effort to get rid of it.
780

एवरूपञ्चेe·va·rū·pañ·ce तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अनुवादमूलंa·nu·vā·da·mū·laṃ अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ वाvā बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā वाvā नna समनुपस्सेय्याथ,sa·ma·nu·pas·sey·yā·tha तत्रtat·ra तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तस्सेवtas·se·va पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa अनुवादमूलस्सa·nu·vā·da·mū·las·sa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनवस्सवायa·na·vas·sa·vā·ya पटिपज्जेय्याथ।pa·ṭi·paj·jey·yā·tha

Evarūpañce tumhe, bhikkhave, anuvādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā na samanupasseyyātha, tatra tumhe, bhikkhave, tasseva pāpakassa anuvādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavāya paṭipajjeyyātha.

If you don’t see such a root either in yourself or in others, you should practice so that it doesn’t emerge in the future.
781

एवमेतस्सe·va·me·tas·sa पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa अनुवादमूलस्सa·nu·vā·da·mū·las·sa पहानंpa·hā·naṃ होति।ho·ti

Evametassa pāpakassa anuvādamūlassa pahānaṁ hoti.

In this way that bad root of accusations is abandoned
782

एवमेतस्सe·va·me·tas·sa पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa अनुवादमूलस्सa·nu·vā·da·mū·las·sa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनवस्सवोa·na·vas·sa·vo होति।ho·ti

Evametassa pāpakassa anuvādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavo hoti.

and doesn’t emerge in the future.
783

पुनpu·na चपरं,ca·pa·raṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu मक्खीmak·khī होतिho·ti पळासीpa·ḷā·sī …पे…pe

Puna caparaṁ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu makkhī hoti paḷāsī …pe…

Or it may be that a monk is denigrating and domineering,
784

इस्सुकीis·su·kī होतिho·ti मच्छरी,mac·cha·rī सठोsa·ṭho होतिho·ti मायावी,mā·yā·vī पापिच्छोpā·pic·cho होतिho·ti मिच्छादिट्ठी,mic·chā·diṭ·ṭhī सन्दिट्ठिपरामासीsan·diṭ·ṭhi·pa·rā·mā·sī होतिho·ti आधानग्गाहीā·dhā·nag·gā·hī दुप्पटिनिस्सग्गी।dup·pa·ṭi·nis·sag·gī

issukī hoti maccharī, saṭho hoti māyāvī, pāpiccho hoti micchādiṭṭhī, sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī.

envious and stingy, treacherous and deceitful, one who has bad desires and wrong views, or one who obstinately grasps his own views and only gives them up with difficulty.
785

योyo सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu सन्दिट्ठिपरामासीsan·diṭ·ṭhi·pa·rā·mā·sī होतिho·ti आधानग्गाहीā·dhā·nag·gā·hī दुप्पटिनिस्सग्गी,dup·pa·ṭi·nis·sag·gī सोso सत्थरिपिsat·tha·ri·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so धम्मेपिdham·me·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सङ्घेपिsaṅ·ghe·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so सिक्खायपिsik·khā·ya·pi नna परिपूरकारीpa·ri·pū·ra·kā·rī होति।ho·ti

Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī hoti ādhānaggāhī duppaṭinissaggī, so sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi agāravo viharati appatisso, saṅghepi agāravo viharati appatisso, sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī hoti.

Such a monk is disrespectful and undeferential toward the Teacher, the Teaching, and the Sangha, and he doesn’t fulfill the training.
786

योyo सो,so भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu सत्थरिपिsat·tha·ri·pi अगारवोa·gā·ra·vo विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti अप्पतिस्सो,ap·pa·tis·so धम्मेपिdham·me·pi …पे…pe

Yo so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sattharipi agāravo viharati appatisso, dhammepi …pe…

Such a person
787

सङ्घेपिsaṅ·ghe·pi …पे…pe

saṅghepi …pe…

(Pāli only)
788

सिक्खायपिsik·khā·ya·pi नna परिपूरकारी,pa·ri·pū·ra·kā·rī सोso सङ्घेsaṅ·ghe अनुवादंa·nu·vā·daṃ जनेति।ja·ne·ti

sikkhāyapi na paripūrakārī, so saṅghe anuvādaṁ janeti.

makes accusations in the Sangha.
789

योyo होतिho·ti अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do बहुजनाहितायba·hu·ja·nā·hi·tā·ya बहुजनासुखायba·hu·ja·nā·su·khā·ya बहुनोba·hu·no जनस्सja·nas·sa अनत्थायa·nat·thā·ya अहितायa·hi·tā·ya दुक्खायduk·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

Yo hoti anuvādo bahujanāhitāya bahujanāsukhāya bahuno janassa anatthāya ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānaṁ.

Accusations are unbeneficial and a cause of unhappiness for humanity; they’re harmful, detrimental, and a cause of suffering for gods and humans.
790

एवरूपञ्चेe·va·rū·pañ·ce तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अनुवादमूलंa·nu·vā·da·mū·laṃ अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ वाvā बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā वाvā समनुपस्सेय्याथ,sa·ma·nu·pas·sey·yā·tha तत्रtat·ra तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तस्सेवtas·se·va पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa अनुवादमूलस्सa·nu·vā·da·mū·las·sa पहानायpa·hā·nā·ya वायमेय्याथ।vā·ya·mey·yā·tha

Evarūpañce tumhe, bhikkhave, anuvādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā samanupasseyyātha, tatra tumhe, bhikkhave, tasseva pāpakassa anuvādamūlassa pahānāya vāyameyyātha.

Monks, when you see such a root of accusations either in yourself or in others, you should make an effort to get rid of it.
791

एवरूपञ्चेe·va·rū·pañ·ce तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अनुवादमूलंa·nu·vā·da·mū·laṃ अज्झत्तंaj·jhat·taṃ वाvā बहिद्धाba·hid·dhā वाvā नna समनुपस्सेय्याथ,sa·ma·nu·pas·sey·yā·tha तत्रtat·ra तुम्हे,tum·he भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तस्सेवtas·se·va पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa अनुवादमूलस्सa·nu·vā·da·mū·las·sa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनवस्सवायa·na·vas·sa·vā·ya पटिपज्जेय्याथ।pa·ṭi·paj·jey·yā·tha

Evarūpañce tumhe, bhikkhave, anuvādamūlaṁ ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā na samanupasseyyātha, tatra tumhe, bhikkhave, tasseva pāpakassa anuvādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavāya paṭipajjeyyātha.

If you don’t see such a root either in yourself or in others, you should practice so that it doesn’t emerge in the future.
792

एवमेतस्सe·va·me·tas·sa पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa अनुवादमूलस्सa·nu·vā·da·mū·las·sa पहानंpa·hā·naṃ होति।ho·ti

Evametassa pāpakassa anuvādamūlassa pahānaṁ hoti.

In this way that bad root of accusations is abandoned
793

एवमेतस्सe·va·me·tas·sa पापकस्सpā·pa·kas·sa अनुवादमूलस्सa·nu·vā·da·mū·las·sa आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ अनवस्सवोa·na·vas·sa·vo होति।ho·ti

Evametassa pāpakassa anuvādamūlassa āyatiṁ anavassavo hoti.

and doesn’t emerge in the future.
794

इमानिi·mā·ni छcha अनुवादमूलानिa·nu·vā·da·mū·lā·ni अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Imāni cha anuvādamūlāni anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

(Pāli only)
795

कतमानिka·ta·mā·ni तीणिtī·ṇi अकुसलमूलानिa·ku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं?mū·laṃ

Katamāni tīṇi akusalamūlāni anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ?

What are the three unwholesome roots of legal issues arising from accusations?
796

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ लुद्धचित्ताlud·dha·cit·tā अनुवदन्ति,a·nu·va·dan·ti दुट्ठचित्ताduṭ·ṭha·cit·tā अनुवदन्ति,a·nu·va·dan·ti मूळ्हचित्ताmū·ḷha·cit·tā अनुवदन्ति—a·nu·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū bhikkhuṁ luddhacittā anuvadanti, duṭṭhacittā anuvadanti, mūḷhacittā anuvadanti—

It may be that monks, because of greed, ill will, or delusion, accuse a monk of
797

सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā आचारविपत्तियाā·cā·ra·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā दिट्ठिविपत्तियाdiṭ·ṭhi·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā आजीवविपत्तियाā·jī·va·vi·pat·ti·yā वा।vā

sīlavipattiyā vā, ācāravipattiyā vā, diṭṭhivipattiyā vā, ājīvavipattiyā vā.

failure in morality, conduct, view, or livelihood.
798

इमानिi·mā·ni तीणिtī·ṇi अकुसलमूलानिa·ku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Imāni tīṇi akusalamūlāni anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

(Pāli only)
799

कतमानिka·ta·mā·ni तीणिtī·ṇi कुसलमूलानिku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं?mū·laṃ

Katamāni tīṇi kusalamūlāni anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ?

What are the three wholesome roots of legal issues arising from accusations?
800

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अलुद्धचित्ताa·lud·dha·cit·tā अनुवदन्ति,a·nu·va·dan·ti अदुट्ठचित्ताa·duṭ·ṭha·cit·tā अनुवदन्ति,a·nu·va·dan·ti अमूळ्हचित्ताa·mū·ḷha·cit·tā अनुवदन्ति—a·nu·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū bhikkhuṁ aluddhacittā anuvadanti, aduṭṭhacittā anuvadanti, amūḷhacittā anuvadanti—

It may be that monks, because of non-greed, non-ill will, and non-delusion, accuse a monk of
801

सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā आचारविपत्तियाā·cā·ra·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā दिट्ठिविपत्तियाdiṭ·ṭhi·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā आजीवविपत्तियाā·jī·va·vi·pat·ti·yā वा।vā

sīlavipattiyā vā, ācāravipattiyā vā, diṭṭhivipattiyā vā, ājīvavipattiyā vā.

failure in morality, conduct, view, or livelihood.
802

इमानिi·mā·ni तीणिtī·ṇi कुसलमूलानिku·sa·la·mū·lā·ni अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Imāni tīṇi kusalamūlāni anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

(Pāli only)
803

कतमोka·ta·mo कायोkā·yo अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं?mū·laṃ

Katamo kāyo anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ?

How’s the body a root of legal issues arising from accusations?
804

इधेकच्चोi·dhe·kac·co दुब्बण्णोdub·baṇ·ṇo होति,ho·ti दुद्दस्सिको,dud·das·si·ko ओकोटिमको,o·ko·ṭi·ma·ko बह्वाबाधो,bah·vā·bā·dho काणोkā·ṇo वा,vā कुणीku·ṇī वा,vā खञ्जोkhañ·jo वा,vā पक्खहतोpak·kha·ha·to वा,vā येनye·na नंnaṃ अनुवदन्ति।a·nu·va·dan·ti

Idhekacco dubbaṇṇo hoti, duddassiko, okoṭimako, bahvābādho, kāṇo vā, kuṇī vā, khañjo vā, pakkhahato vā, yena naṁ anuvadanti.

It may be that someone is ugly, unsightly, a dwarf, sickly, blind in one eye, crooked-limbed, lame, or paralyzed, and they blame him for that.
805

अयंa·yaṃ कायोkā·yo अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Ayaṁ kāyo anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

(Pāli only)
806

कतमाka·ta·mā वाचाvā·cā अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं?mū·laṃ

Katamā vācā anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ?

How’s speech a root of legal issues arising from accusations?
807

इधेकच्चोi·dhe·kac·co दुब्बचोdub·ba·co होति,ho·ti मम्मनो,mam·ma·no एळगलवाचो,e·ḷa·ga·la·vā·co यायyā·ya नंnaṃ अनुवदन्ति।a·nu·va·dan·ti

Idhekacco dubbaco hoti, mammano, eḷagalavāco, yāya naṁ anuvadanti.

It may be that someone is difficult to correct, or he stutters or dribbles while speaking, and they blame him for that.”
808

अयंa·yaṃ वाचाvā·cā अनुवादाधिकरणस्सa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Ayaṁ vācā anuvādādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

(Pāli only)
809

The roots of legal issues arising from offenses and business
810

आपत्ताधिकरणस्सā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa किंkiṃ मूलं?mū·laṃ

Āpattādhikaraṇassa kiṁ mūlaṁ?

“What’s the root of legal issues arising from offenses?
811

छcha आपत्तिसमुट्ठानाā·pat·ti·sa·muṭ·ṭhā·nā आपत्ताधिकरणस्सā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Cha āpattisamuṭṭhānā āpattādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

There are six originations of offenses that in turn are the root of legal issues arising from offenses.
812

अत्थापत्तिat·thā·pat·ti कायतोkā·ya·to समुट्ठाति,sa·muṭ·ṭhā·ti नna वाचतो,vā·ca·to नna चित्ततो।cit·ta·to

Atthāpatti kāyato samuṭṭhāti, na vācato, na cittato.

There are offenses that originate from body, but not from speech or mind.
813

अत्थापत्तिat·thā·pat·ti वाचतोvā·ca·to समुट्ठाति,sa·muṭ·ṭhā·ti नna कायतो,kā·ya·to नna चित्ततो।cit·ta·to

Atthāpatti vācato samuṭṭhāti, na kāyato, na cittato.

There are offenses that originate from speech, but not from body or mind.
814

अत्थापत्तिat·thā·pat·ti कायतोkā·ya·to चca वाचतोvā·ca·to चca समुट्ठाति,sa·muṭ·ṭhā·ti नna चित्ततो।cit·ta·to

Atthāpatti kāyato ca vācato ca samuṭṭhāti, na cittato.

There are offenses that originate from body and speech, but not from mind.
815

अत्थापत्तिat·thā·pat·ti कायतोkā·ya·to चca चित्ततोcit·ta·to चca समुट्ठाति,sa·muṭ·ṭhā·ti नna वाचतो।vā·ca·to

Atthāpatti kāyato ca cittato ca samuṭṭhāti, na vācato.

There are offenses that originate from body and mind, but not from speech.
816

अत्थापत्तिat·thā·pat·ti वाचतोvā·ca·to चca चित्ततोcit·ta·to चca समुट्ठाति,sa·muṭ·ṭhā·ti नna कायतो।kā·ya·to

Atthāpatti vācato ca cittato ca samuṭṭhāti, na kāyato.

There are offenses that originate from speech and mind, but not from body.
817

अत्थापत्तिat·thā·pat·ti कायतोkā·ya·to चca वाचतोvā·ca·to चca चित्ततोcit·ta·to चca समुट्ठाति।sa·muṭ·ṭhā·ti

Atthāpatti kāyato ca vācato ca cittato ca samuṭṭhāti.

There are offenses that originate from body, speech, and mind.
818

इमेi·me छcha आपत्तिसमुट्ठानाā·pat·ti·sa·muṭ·ṭhā·nā आपत्ताधिकरणस्सā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa मूलं।mū·laṃ

Ime cha āpattisamuṭṭhānā āpattādhikaraṇassa mūlaṁ.

(Pāli only)
819

किच्चाधिकरणस्सkic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa किंkiṃ मूलं?mū·laṃ

Kiccādhikaraṇassa kiṁ mūlaṁ?

What’s the root of legal issues arising from business?
820

किच्चाधिकरणस्सkic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa एकंe·kaṃ मूलं—mū·laṃ

Kiccādhikaraṇassa ekaṁ mūlaṁ—

There’s one root of legal issues arising from business:
821

सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

saṅgho.

the Sangha.”
822

Ethical qualities of legal issues arising from disputes
823

विवादाधिकरणंvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कुसलं,ku·sa·laṃ अकुसलं,a·ku·sa·laṃ अब्याकतं।ab·yā·ka·taṃ

Vivādādhikaraṇaṁ kusalaṁ, akusalaṁ, abyākataṁ.

“Is a legal issue arising from a dispute wholesome, unwholesome, or indeterminate?
824

विवादाधिकरणंvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सियाsi·yā कुसलं,ku·sa·laṃ सियाsi·yā अकुसलं,a·ku·sa·laṃ सियाsi·yā अब्याकतं।ab·yā·ka·taṃ

Vivādādhikaraṇaṁ siyā kusalaṁ, siyā akusalaṁ, siyā abyākataṁ.

A legal issue arising from a dispute may be wholesome, unwholesome, or indeterminate.
825

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ विवादाधिकरणंvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कुसलं?ku·sa·laṃ

Tattha katamaṁ vivādādhikaraṇaṁ kusalaṁ?

What’s a wholesome legal issue arising from a dispute?
826

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū कुसलचित्ताku·sa·la·cit·tā विवदन्ति—vi·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū kusalacittā vivadanti—

It may be that monks dispute with a wholesome mind, saying,
827

धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti वाvā अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti वाvā …पे…pe

dhammoti vā adhammoti vā …pe…

‘This is the Teaching’, ‘This is contrary to the Teaching’ …
828

दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा।vā

duṭṭhullā āpattīti vā aduṭṭhullā āpattīti vā.

‘This is a grave offense’, or ‘This is a minor offense.’
829

यंyaṃ तत्थtat·tha भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do नानावादोnā·nā·vā·do अञ्ञथावादोañ·ña·thā·vā·do विपच्चतायvi·pac·ca·tā·ya वोहारोvo·hā·ro मेधगं—me·dha·gaṃ

Yaṁ tattha bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo nānāvādo aññathāvādo vipaccatāya vohāro medhagaṁ—

In regard to this, whatever there is of quarreling, arguing, conflict, disputing, variety in opinion, difference in opinion, heated speech, or strife—
830

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti विवादाधिकरणंvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कुसलं।ku·sa·laṃ

idaṁ vuccati vivādādhikaraṇaṁ kusalaṁ.

this is called a wholesome legal issue arising from a dispute.
831

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ विवादाधिकरणंvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अकुसलं?a·ku·sa·laṃ

Tattha katamaṁ vivādādhikaraṇaṁ akusalaṁ?

What’s an unwholesome legal issue arising from a dispute?
832

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū अकुसलचित्ताa·ku·sa·la·cit·tā विवदन्ति—vi·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū akusalacittā vivadanti—

It may be that monks dispute with an unwholesome mind, saying,
833

धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti वाvā अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti वाvā …पे…pe

dhammoti vā adhammoti vā …pe…

‘This is the Teaching’, ‘This is contrary to the Teaching’ …
834

दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा।vā

duṭṭhullā āpattīti vā aduṭṭhullā āpattīti vā.

‘This is a grave offense’, or ‘This is a minor offense.’
835

यंyaṃ तत्थtat·tha भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do नानावादोnā·nā·vā·do अञ्ञथावादोañ·ña·thā·vā·do विपच्चतायvi·pac·ca·tā·ya वोहारोvo·hā·ro मेधगं—me·dha·gaṃ

Yaṁ tattha bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo nānāvādo aññathāvādo vipaccatāya vohāro medhagaṁ—

In regard to this, whatever there is of quarreling, arguing, conflict, disputing, variety in opinion, difference in opinion, heated speech, or strife—
836

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti विवादाधिकरणंvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अकुसलं।a·ku·sa·laṃ

idaṁ vuccati vivādādhikaraṇaṁ akusalaṁ.

this is called an unwholesome legal issue arising from a dispute.
837

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ विवादाधिकरणंvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अब्याकतं?ab·yā·ka·taṃ

Tattha katamaṁ vivādādhikaraṇaṁ abyākataṁ?

What’s an indeterminate legal issue arising from a dispute?
838

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū अब्याकतचित्ताab·yā·ka·ta·cit·tā विवदन्ति—vi·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū abyākatacittā vivadanti—

It may be that monks dispute with an indeterminate mind, saying,
839

धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti वाvā अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti वाvā …पे…pe

dhammoti vā adhammoti vā …pe…

‘This is the Teaching’, ‘This is contrary to the Teaching’ …
840

दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा।vā

duṭṭhullā āpattīti vā aduṭṭhullā āpattīti vā.

‘This is a grave offense’, or ‘This is a minor offense.’
841

यंyaṃ तत्थtat·tha भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do नानावादोnā·nā·vā·do अञ्ञथावादोañ·ña·thā·vā·do विपच्चतायvi·pac·ca·tā·ya वोहारोvo·hā·ro मेधगं—me·dha·gaṃ

Yaṁ tattha bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo nānāvādo aññathāvādo vipaccatāya vohāro medhagaṁ—

In regard to this, whatever there is of quarreling, arguing, conflict, disputing, variety in opinion, difference in opinion, heated speech, or strife—
842

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti विवादाधिकरणंvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अब्याकतं।ab·yā·ka·taṃ

idaṁ vuccati vivādādhikaraṇaṁ abyākataṁ.

this is called an indeterminate legal issue arising from a dispute.”
843

Ethical qualities of legal issues arising from accusations
844

अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कुसलं,ku·sa·laṃ अकुसलं,a·ku·sa·laṃ अब्याकतं।ab·yā·ka·taṃ

Anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ kusalaṁ, akusalaṁ, abyākataṁ.

“Is a legal issue arising from an accusation wholesome, unwholesome, or indeterminate?
845

अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सियाsi·yā कुसलं,ku·sa·laṃ सियाsi·yā अकुसलं,a·ku·sa·laṃ सियाsi·yā अब्याकतं।ab·yā·ka·taṃ

Anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ siyā kusalaṁ, siyā akusalaṁ, siyā abyākataṁ.

A legal issue arising from an accusation may be wholesome, unwholesome, or indeterminate.
846

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कुसलं?ku·sa·laṃ

Tattha katamaṁ anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ kusalaṁ?

What’s a wholesome legal issue arising from an accusation?
847

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ कुसलचित्ताku·sa·la·cit·tā अनुवदन्ति—a·nu·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū bhikkhuṁ kusalacittā anuvadanti—

It may be that monks with wholesome minds accuse a monk
848

सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā आचारविपत्तियाā·cā·ra·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā दिट्ठिविपत्तियाdiṭ·ṭhi·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā आजीवविपत्तियाā·jī·va·vi·pat·ti·yā वा।vā

sīlavipattiyā vā, ācāravipattiyā vā, diṭṭhivipattiyā vā, ājīvavipattiyā vā.

of failure in morality, conduct, view, or livelihood.
849

योyo तत्थtat·tha अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do अनुवदनाa·nu·va·da·nā अनुल्लपनाa·nul·la·pa·nā अनुभणनाa·nu·bha·ṇa·nā अनुसम्पवङ्कताa·nu·sam·pa·vaṅ·ka·tā अब्भुस्सहनताab·bhus·sa·ha·na·tā अनुबलप्पदानं—a·nu·ba·lap·pa·dā·naṃ

Yo tattha anuvādo anuvadanā anullapanā anubhaṇanā anusampavaṅkatā abbhussahanatā anubalappadānaṁ—

In regard to this, whatever there is of accusations, accusing, allegations, blame, taking sides because of friendship, taking part in the accusation, or supporting the accusation—
850

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कुसलं।ku·sa·laṃ

idaṁ vuccati anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ kusalaṁ.

this is called a wholesome legal issue arising from an accusation.
851

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अकुसलं?a·ku·sa·laṃ

Tattha katamaṁ anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ akusalaṁ?

What’s an unwholesome legal issue arising from an accusation?
852

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अकुसलचित्ताa·ku·sa·la·cit·tā अनुवदन्ति—a·nu·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū bhikkhuṁ akusalacittā anuvadanti—

It may be that monks with unwholesome minds accuse a monk
853

सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā आचारविपत्तियाā·cā·ra·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā दिट्ठिविपत्तियाdiṭ·ṭhi·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā आजीवविपत्तियाā·jī·va·vi·pat·ti·yā वा।vā

sīlavipattiyā vā, ācāravipattiyā vā, diṭṭhivipattiyā vā, ājīvavipattiyā vā.

of failure in morality, conduct, view, or livelihood.
854

योyo तत्थtat·tha अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do अनुवदनाa·nu·va·da·nā अनुल्लपनाa·nul·la·pa·nā अनुभणनाa·nu·bha·ṇa·nā अनुसम्पवङ्कताa·nu·sam·pa·vaṅ·ka·tā अब्भुस्सहनताab·bhus·sa·ha·na·tā अनुबलप्पदानं—a·nu·ba·lap·pa·dā·naṃ

Yo tattha anuvādo anuvadanā anullapanā anubhaṇanā anusampavaṅkatā abbhussahanatā anubalappadānaṁ—

In regard to this, whatever there is of accusations, accusing, allegations, blame, taking sides because of friendship, taking part in the accusation, or supporting the accusation—
855

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अकुसलं।a·ku·sa·laṃ

idaṁ vuccati anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ akusalaṁ.

this is called an unwholesome legal issue arising from an accusation.
856

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अब्याकतं?ab·yā·ka·taṃ

Tattha katamaṁ anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ abyākataṁ?

What’s an indeterminate legal issue arising from an accusation?
857

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अब्याकतचित्ताab·yā·ka·ta·cit·tā अनुवदन्ति—a·nu·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū bhikkhuṁ abyākatacittā anuvadanti—

It may be that monks with indeterminate minds accuse a monk
858

सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā आचारविपत्तियाā·cā·ra·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā दिट्ठिविपत्तियाdiṭ·ṭhi·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā आजीवविपत्तियाā·jī·va·vi·pat·ti·yā वा।vā

sīlavipattiyā vā, ācāravipattiyā vā, diṭṭhivipattiyā vā, ājīvavipattiyā vā.

of failure in morality, conduct, view, or livelihood.
859

योyo तत्थtat·tha अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do अनुवदनाa·nu·va·da·nā अनुल्लपनाa·nul·la·pa·nā अनुभणनाa·nu·bha·ṇa·nā अनुसम्पवङ्कताa·nu·sam·pa·vaṅ·ka·tā अब्भुस्सहनताab·bhus·sa·ha·na·tā अनुबलप्पदानं—a·nu·ba·lap·pa·dā·naṃ

Yo tattha anuvādo anuvadanā anullapanā anubhaṇanā anusampavaṅkatā abbhussahanatā anubalappadānaṁ—

In regard to this, whatever there is of accusations, accusing, allegations, blame, taking sides because of friendship, taking part in the accusation, or supporting the accusation—
860

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अब्याकतं।ab·yā·ka·taṃ

idaṁ vuccati anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ abyākataṁ.

this is called an indeterminate legal issue arising from an accusation.”
861

Ethical qualities of legal issues arising from offenses
862

आपत्ताधिकरणंā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कुसलं,ku·sa·laṃ अकुसलं,a·ku·sa·laṃ अब्याकतं?ab·yā·ka·taṃ

Āpattādhikaraṇaṁ kusalaṁ, akusalaṁ, abyākataṁ?

“Is a legal issue arising from an offense wholesome, unwholesome, or indeterminate?
863

आपत्ताधिकरणंā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सियाsi·yā अकुसलं,a·ku·sa·laṃ सियाsi·yā अब्याकतं;ab·yā·ka·taṃ

Āpattādhikaraṇaṁ siyā akusalaṁ, siyā abyākataṁ;

A legal issue arising from an offense may be unwholesome or indeterminate.
864

नत्थिnat·thi आपत्ताधिकरणंā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कुसलं।ku·sa·laṃ

natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṁ kusalaṁ.

There are no wholesome legal issues arising from an offense.
865

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ आपत्ताधिकरणंā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अकुसलं?a·ku·sa·laṃ

Tattha katamaṁ āpattādhikaraṇaṁ akusalaṁ?

What’s an unwholesome legal issue arising from an offense?
866

यंyaṃ जानन्तोjā·nan·to सञ्जानन्तोsañ·jā·nan·to चेच्चcec·ca अभिवितरित्वाa·bhi·vi·ta·rit·vā वीतिक्कमो—vī·tik·ka·mo

Yaṁ jānanto sañjānanto cecca abhivitaritvā vītikkamo—

When one transgresses, knowing, perceiving, having intended, having decided—
867

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti आपत्ताधिकरणंā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अकुसलं।a·ku·sa·laṃ

idaṁ vuccati āpattādhikaraṇaṁ akusalaṁ.

this is called an unwholesome legal issue arising from an offense.
868

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ आपत्ताधिकरणंā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अब्याकतं?ab·yā·ka·taṃ

Tattha katamaṁ āpattādhikaraṇaṁ abyākataṁ?

What’s an indeterminate legal issue arising from an offense?
869

यंyaṃ अजानन्तोa·jā·nan·to असञ्जानन्तोa·sañ·jā·nan·to अचेच्चa·cec·ca अनभिवितरित्वाa·na·bhi·vi·ta·rit·vā वीतिक्कमो—vī·tik·ka·mo

Yaṁ ajānanto asañjānanto acecca anabhivitaritvā vītikkamo—

When one transgresses, not knowing, not perceiving, not having intended, not having decided—
870

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti आपत्ताधिकरणंā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अब्याकतं।ab·yā·ka·taṃ

idaṁ vuccati āpattādhikaraṇaṁ abyākataṁ.

this is called an indeterminate legal issue arising from an offense.”
871

Ethical qualities of legal issues arising from business
872

किच्चाधिकरणंkic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कुसलं,ku·sa·laṃ अकुसलं,a·ku·sa·laṃ अब्याकतं?ab·yā·ka·taṃ

Kiccādhikaraṇaṁ kusalaṁ, akusalaṁ, abyākataṁ?

“Is a legal issue arising from business wholesome, unwholesome, or indeterminate?
873

किच्चाधिकरणंkic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सियाsi·yā कुसलं,ku·sa·laṃ सियाsi·yā अकुसलं,a·ku·sa·laṃ सियाsi·yā अब्याकतं।ab·yā·ka·taṃ

Kiccādhikaraṇaṁ siyā kusalaṁ, siyā akusalaṁ, siyā abyākataṁ.

A legal issue arising from business may be wholesome, unwholesome, or indeterminate.
874

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ किच्चाधिकरणंkic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कुसलं?ku·sa·laṃ

Tattha katamaṁ kiccādhikaraṇaṁ kusalaṁ?

What’s a wholesome legal issue arising from business?
875

यंyaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho कुसलचित्तोku·sa·la·cit·to कम्मंkam·maṃ करोति—ka·ro·ti

Yaṁ saṅgho kusalacitto kammaṁ karoti—

When the Sangha does a legal procedure with a wholesome mind—
876

अपलोकनकम्मं,a·pa·lo·ka·na·kam·maṃ ञत्तिकम्मं,ñat·ti·kam·maṃ ञत्तिदुतियकम्मं,ñat·ti·du·ti·ya·kam·maṃ ञत्तिचतुत्थकम्मं—ñat·ti·ca·tut·tha·kam·maṃ

apalokanakammaṁ, ñattikammaṁ, ñattidutiyakammaṁ, ñatticatutthakammaṁ—

whether a procedure consisting of getting permission, a procedure consisting of one motion, a procedure consisting of one motion and one announcement, or a procedure consisting of one motion and three announcements—
877

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti किच्चाधिकरणंkic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कुसलं।ku·sa·laṃ

idaṁ vuccati kiccādhikaraṇaṁ kusalaṁ.

this is called a wholesome legal issue arising from business.
878

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ किच्चाधिकरणंkic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अकुसलं?a·ku·sa·laṃ

Tattha katamaṁ kiccādhikaraṇaṁ akusalaṁ?

What’s an unwholesome legal issue arising from business?
879

यंyaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho अकुसलचित्तोa·ku·sa·la·cit·to कम्मंkam·maṃ करोति—ka·ro·ti

Yaṁ saṅgho akusalacitto kammaṁ karoti—

When the Sangha does a legal procedure with an unwholesome mind—
880

अपलोकनकम्मं,a·pa·lo·ka·na·kam·maṃ ञत्तिकम्मं,ñat·ti·kam·maṃ ञत्तिदुतियकम्मं,ñat·ti·du·ti·ya·kam·maṃ ञत्तिचतुत्थकम्मं—ñat·ti·ca·tut·tha·kam·maṃ

apalokanakammaṁ, ñattikammaṁ, ñattidutiyakammaṁ, ñatticatutthakammaṁ—

whether a procedure consisting of getting permission, a procedure consisting of one motion, a procedure consisting of one motion and one announcement, or a procedure consisting of one motion and three announcements—
881

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti किच्चाधिकरणंkic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अकुसलं।a·ku·sa·laṃ

idaṁ vuccati kiccādhikaraṇaṁ akusalaṁ.

this is called an unwholesome legal issue arising from business.
882

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ किच्चाधिकरणंkic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अब्याकतं?ab·yā·ka·taṃ

Tattha katamaṁ kiccādhikaraṇaṁ abyākataṁ?

What’s an indeterminate legal issue arising from business?
883

यंyaṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho अब्याकतचित्तोab·yā·ka·ta·cit·to कम्मंkam·maṃ करोति—ka·ro·ti

Yaṁ saṅgho abyākatacitto kammaṁ karoti—

When the Sangha does a legal procedure with an indeterminate mind—
884

अपलोकनकम्मं,a·pa·lo·ka·na·kam·maṃ ञत्तिकम्मं,ñat·ti·kam·maṃ ञत्तिदुतियकम्मं,ñat·ti·du·ti·ya·kam·maṃ ञत्तिचतुत्थकम्मं—ñat·ti·ca·tut·tha·kam·maṃ

apalokanakammaṁ, ñattikammaṁ, ñattidutiyakammaṁ, ñatticatutthakammaṁ—

whether a procedure consisting of getting permission, a procedure consisting of one motion, a procedure consisting of one motion and one announcement, or a procedure consisting of one motion and three announcements—
885

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चतिvuc·ca·ti किच्चाधिकरणंkic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अब्याकतं।ab·yā·ka·taṃ

idaṁ vuccati kiccādhikaraṇaṁ abyākataṁ.

this is called an indeterminate legal issue arising from business.”
886

Relationship between disputes and legal issues
887

विवादोvi·vā·do विवादाधिकरणं,vi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ विवादोvi·vā·do नोno अधिकरणं,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno विवादो,vi·vā·do अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va विवादोvi·vā·do च।ca

Vivādo vivādādhikaraṇaṁ, vivādo no adhikaraṇaṁ, adhikaraṇaṁ no vivādo, adhikaraṇañceva vivādo ca.

“Are there disputes that are also legal issues arising from disputes? Are there disputes that aren’t legal issues? Are there legal issues that aren’t disputes? Are there legal issues that are also disputes?
888

सियाsi·yā विवादोvi·vā·do विवादाधिकरणं,vi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सियाsi·yā विवादोvi·vā·do नोno अधिकरणं,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सियाsi·yā अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno विवादो,vi·vā·do सियाsi·yā अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va विवादोvi·vā·do च।ca

Siyā vivādo vivādādhikaraṇaṁ, siyā vivādo no adhikaraṇaṁ, siyā adhikaraṇaṁ no vivādo, siyā adhikaraṇañceva vivādo ca.

There are disputes that are also legal issues arising from disputes. There are disputes that aren’t legal issues. There are legal issues that aren’t disputes. There are legal issues that are also disputes.
889

तत्थtat·tha कतमोka·ta·mo विवादोvi·vā·do विवादाधिकरणं?vi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Tattha katamo vivādo vivādādhikaraṇaṁ?

How’s there a dispute that’s also a legal issue arising from disputes?
890

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū विवदन्ति—vi·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū vivadanti—

It may be that monks are disputing, saying,
891

धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti वाvā अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti वाvā …पे…pe

dhammoti vā adhammoti vā …pe…

‘This is the Teaching’, ‘This is contrary to the Teaching’ …
892

दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा।vā

duṭṭhullā āpattīti vā aduṭṭhullā āpattīti vā.

‘This is a grave offense’, or ‘This is a minor offense.’
893

यंyaṃ तत्थtat·tha भण्डनंbhaṇ·ḍa·naṃ कलहोka·la·ho विग्गहोvig·ga·ho विवादोvi·vā·do नानावादोnā·nā·vā·do अञ्ञथावादोañ·ña·thā·vā·do विपच्चतायvi·pac·ca·tā·ya वोहारोvo·hā·ro मेधगं—me·dha·gaṃ

Yaṁ tattha bhaṇḍanaṁ kalaho viggaho vivādo nānāvādo aññathāvādo vipaccatāya vohāro medhagaṁ—

In regard to this, whatever there is of quarreling, arguing, conflict, disputing, variety in opinion, difference in opinion, heated speech, or strife—
894

अयंa·yaṃ विवादोvi·vā·do विवादाधिकरणं।vi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

ayaṁ vivādo vivādādhikaraṇaṁ.

this is a dispute that’s also a legal issue arising from a dispute.
895

तत्थtat·tha कतमोka·ta·mo विवादोvi·vā·do नोno अधिकरणं?a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Tattha katamo vivādo no adhikaraṇaṁ?

How’s there a dispute that isn’t a legal issue?
896

मातापिmā·tā·pi पुत्तेनput·te·na विवदति,vi·va·da·ti पुत्तोपिput·to·pi मातराmā·ta·rā विवदति,vi·va·da·ti पितापिpi·tā·pi पुत्तेनput·te·na विवदति,vi·va·da·ti पुत्तोपिput·to·pi पितराpi·ta·rā विवदति,vi·va·da·ti भातापिbhā·tā·pi भातराbhā·ta·rā विवदति,vi·va·da·ti भातापिbhā·tā·pi भगिनियाbha·gi·ni·yā विवदति,vi·va·da·ti भगिनीपिbha·gi·nī·pi भातराbhā·ta·rā विवदति,vi·va·da·ti सहायोपिsa·hā·yo·pi सहायेनsa·hā·ye·na विवदति—vi·va·da·ti

Mātāpi puttena vivadati, puttopi mātarā vivadati, pitāpi puttena vivadati, puttopi pitarā vivadati, bhātāpi bhātarā vivadati, bhātāpi bhaginiyā vivadati, bhaginīpi bhātarā vivadati, sahāyopi sahāyena vivadati—

A mother disputes with her offspring; an offspring with their mother; a father with his offspring; an offspring with their father; a brother with his brother; a brother with his sister; a sister with her brother; a friend with their friend—
897

अयंa·yaṃ विवादोvi·vā·do नोno अधिकरणं।a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

ayaṁ vivādo no adhikaraṇaṁ.

these are disputes that aren’t legal issues.
898

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno विवादो?vi·vā·do

Tattha katamaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ no vivādo?

How’s there a legal issue that isn’t a dispute?
899

अनुवादाधिकरणं,a·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ आपत्ताधिकरणं,ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ किच्चाधिकरणं—kic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ, āpattādhikaraṇaṁ, kiccādhikaraṇaṁ—

A legal issue arising from an accusation, a legal issue arising from an offense, a legal issue arising from business—
900

इदंi·daṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno विवादो।vi·vā·do

idaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ no vivādo.

these are legal issues that aren’t disputes.
901

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va विवादोvi·vā·do च?ca

Tattha katamaṁ adhikaraṇañceva vivādo ca?

How’s there a legal issue that’s also a dispute?
902

विवादाधिकरणंvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va विवादोvi·vā·do च।ca

Vivādādhikaraṇaṁ adhikaraṇañceva vivādo ca.

A legal issue arising from a dispute is a legal issue and also a dispute.”
903

Relationship between accusations and legal issues
904

अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do अनुवादाधिकरणं,a·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do नोno अधिकरणं,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno अनुवादो,a·nu·vā·do अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do च।ca

Anuvādo anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ, anuvādo no adhikaraṇaṁ, adhikaraṇaṁ no anuvādo, adhikaraṇañceva anuvādo ca.

“Are there accusations that are also legal issues arising from accusations? Are there accusations that aren’t legal issues? Are there legal issues that aren’t accusations? Are there legal issues that are also accusations?
905

सियाsi·yā अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do अनुवादाधिकरणं,a·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सियाsi·yā अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do नोno अधिकरणं,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सियाsi·yā अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno अनुवादो,a·nu·vā·do सियाsi·yā अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do च।ca

Siyā anuvādo anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ, siyā anuvādo no adhikaraṇaṁ, siyā adhikaraṇaṁ no anuvādo, siyā adhikaraṇañceva anuvādo ca.

There are accusations that are also legal issues arising from accusations. There are accusations that aren’t legal issues. There are legal issues that aren’t accusations. There are legal issues that are also accusations.
906

तत्थtat·tha कतमोka·ta·mo अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do अनुवादाधिकरणं?a·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Tattha katamo anuvādo anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ?

How’s there an accusation that’s also a legal issue arising from an accusation?
907

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अनुवदन्ति—a·nu·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū bhikkhuṁ anuvadanti—

It may be that monks accuse a monk
908

सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā आचारविपत्तियाā·cā·ra·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā दिट्ठिविपत्तियाdiṭ·ṭhi·vi·pat·ti·yā वा,vā आजीवविपत्तियाā·jī·va·vi·pat·ti·yā वा।vā

sīlavipattiyā vā, ācāravipattiyā vā, diṭṭhivipattiyā vā, ājīvavipattiyā vā.

of failure in morality, conduct, view, or livelihood.
909

योyo तत्थtat·tha अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do अनुवदनाa·nu·va·da·nā अनुल्लपनाa·nul·la·pa·nā अनुभणनाa·nu·bha·ṇa·nā अनुसम्पवङ्कताa·nu·sam·pa·vaṅ·ka·tā अब्भुस्सहनताab·bhus·sa·ha·na·tā अनुबलप्पदानं—a·nu·ba·lap·pa·dā·naṃ

Yo tattha anuvādo anuvadanā anullapanā anubhaṇanā anusampavaṅkatā abbhussahanatā anubalappadānaṁ—

In regard to this, whatever there is of accusations, accusing, allegations, blame, taking sides because of friendship, taking part in the accusation, or supporting the accusation—
910

अयंa·yaṃ अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do अनुवादाधिकरणं।a·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

ayaṁ anuvādo anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ.

this is an accusation that’s also a legal issue arising from an accusation.
911

तत्थtat·tha कतमोka·ta·mo अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do नोno अधिकरणं?a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Tattha katamo anuvādo no adhikaraṇaṁ?

How’s there an accusation that isn’t a legal issue?
912

मातापिmā·tā·pi पुत्तंput·taṃ अनुवदति,a·nu·va·da·ti पुत्तोपिput·to·pi मातरंmā·ta·raṃ अनुवदति,a·nu·va·da·ti पितापिpi·tā·pi पुत्तंput·taṃ अनुवदति,a·nu·va·da·ti पुत्तोपिput·to·pi पितरंpi·ta·raṃ अनुवदति,a·nu·va·da·ti भातापिbhā·tā·pi भातरंbhā·ta·raṃ अनुवदति,a·nu·va·da·ti भातापिbhā·tā·pi भगिनिंbha·gi·niṃ अनुवदति,a·nu·va·da·ti भगिनीपिbha·gi·nī·pi भातरंbhā·ta·raṃ अनुवदति,a·nu·va·da·ti सहायोपिsa·hā·yo·pi सहायंsa·hā·yaṃ अनुवदति—a·nu·va·da·ti

Mātāpi puttaṁ anuvadati, puttopi mātaraṁ anuvadati, pitāpi puttaṁ anuvadati, puttopi pitaraṁ anuvadati, bhātāpi bhātaraṁ anuvadati, bhātāpi bhaginiṁ anuvadati, bhaginīpi bhātaraṁ anuvadati, sahāyopi sahāyaṁ anuvadati—

A mother accuses her offspring; an offspring their mother; a father his offspring; an offspring their father; a brother his brother; a brother his sister; a sister her brother; a friend their friend—
913

अयंa·yaṃ अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do नोno अधिकरणं।a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

ayaṁ anuvādo no adhikaraṇaṁ.

these are accusations that aren’t legal issues.
914

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno अनुवादो?a·nu·vā·do

Tattha katamaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ no anuvādo?

How’s there a legal issue that isn’t an accusation?
915

आपत्ताधिकरणं,ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ किच्चाधिकरणं,kic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ विवादाधिकरणं—vi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Āpattādhikaraṇaṁ, kiccādhikaraṇaṁ, vivādādhikaraṇaṁ—

A legal issue arising from an offense, a legal issue arising from business, a legal issue arising from a dispute—
916

इदंi·daṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno अनुवादो।a·nu·vā·do

idaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ no anuvādo.

these are legal issues that aren’t accusations.
917

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do च?ca

Tattha katamaṁ adhikaraṇañceva anuvādo ca?

How’s there a legal issue that’s also an accusation?
918

अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va अनुवादोa·nu·vā·do च।ca

Anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ adhikaraṇañceva anuvādo ca.

A legal issue arising from an accusation is a legal issue and also an accusation.”
919

Relationship between offenses and legal issues
920

आपत्तिā·pat·ti आपत्ताधिकरणं,ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ आपत्तिā·pat·ti नोno अधिकरणं,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va आपत्तिā·pat·ti च।ca

Āpatti āpattādhikaraṇaṁ, āpatti no adhikaraṇaṁ, adhikaraṇaṁ no āpatti, adhikaraṇañceva āpatti ca.

“Are there offenses that are also legal issues arising from offenses? Are there offenses that aren’t legal issues? Are there legal issues that aren’t offenses? Are there legal issues that are also offenses?
921

सियाsi·yā आपत्तिā·pat·ti आपत्ताधिकरणं,ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सियाsi·yā आपत्तिā·pat·ti नोno अधिकरणं,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सियाsi·yā अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti सियाsi·yā अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va आपत्तिā·pat·ti च।ca

Siyā āpatti āpattādhikaraṇaṁ, siyā āpatti no adhikaraṇaṁ, siyā adhikaraṇaṁ no āpatti, siyā adhikaraṇañceva āpatti ca.

There are offenses that are also legal issues arising from offenses. There are offenses that aren’t legal issues. There are legal issues that aren’t offenses. There are legal issues that are also offenses.
922

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ आपत्तिā·pat·ti आपत्ताधिकरणं?ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Tattha katamaṁ āpatti āpattādhikaraṇaṁ?

How’s there an offense that’s also a legal issue arising from an offense?
923

पञ्चपिpañ·ca·pi आपत्तिक्खन्धाā·pat·tik·khan·dhā आपत्ताधिकरणं,ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सत्तपिsat·ta·pi आपत्तिक्खन्धाā·pat·tik·khan·dhā आपत्ताधिकरणं—ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Pañcapi āpattikkhandhā āpattādhikaraṇaṁ, sattapi āpattikkhandhā āpattādhikaraṇaṁ—

There’s a legal issue arising from an offense because of the five classes of offenses, and there’s a legal issue arising from an offense because of the seven classes of offenses—
924

अयंa·yaṃ आपत्तिā·pat·ti आपत्ताधिकरणं।ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

ayaṁ āpatti āpattādhikaraṇaṁ.

these are offenses that are also legal issues arising from offenses.
925

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ आपत्तिā·pat·ti नोno अधिकरणं?a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Tattha katamaṁ āpatti no adhikaraṇaṁ?

How’s there an offense that isn’t a legal issue?
926

सोतापत्तिso·tā·pat·ti समापत्ति—sa·mā·pat·ti

Sotāpatti samāpatti—

The attainment of streamentry—
927

अयंa·yaṃ आपत्तिā·pat·ti नोno अधिकरणं।a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

ayaṁ āpatti no adhikaraṇaṁ.

this is an offense/attainment that isn’t a legal issue.
928

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno आपत्ति?ā·pat·ti

Tattha katamaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ no āpatti?

How’s there a legal issue that isn’t an offense?
929

किच्चाधिकरणं,kic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ विवादाधिकरणं,vi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अनुवादाधिकरणं—a·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Kiccādhikaraṇaṁ, vivādādhikaraṇaṁ, anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ—

A legal issue arising from business, a legal issue arising from a dispute, a legal issue arising from an accusation—
930

इदंi·daṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno आपत्ति।ā·pat·ti

idaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ no āpatti.

these are legal issues that aren’t offenses.
931

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va आपत्तिā·pat·ti च?ca

Tattha katamaṁ adhikaraṇañceva āpatti ca?

How’s there a legal issue that’s also an offense?
932

आपत्ताधिकरणंā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va आपत्तिā·pat·ti च।ca

Āpattādhikaraṇaṁ adhikaraṇañceva āpatti ca.

A legal issue arising from an offense is a legal issue and also an offense.”
933

Relationship between business and legal issues
934

किच्चंkic·caṃ किच्चाधिकरणं,kic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ किच्चंkic·caṃ नोno अधिकरणं,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno किच्चं,kic·caṃ अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va किच्चञ्च।kic·cañ·ca

Kiccaṁ kiccādhikaraṇaṁ, kiccaṁ no adhikaraṇaṁ, adhikaraṇaṁ no kiccaṁ, adhikaraṇañceva kiccañca.

“Is there business that’s also a legal issue arising from business? Is there business that isn’t a legal issue? Are there legal issues that aren’t business? Are there legal issues that are also business?
935

सियाsi·yā किच्चंkic·caṃ किच्चाधिकरणं,kic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सियाsi·yā किच्चंkic·caṃ नोno अधिकरणं,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सियाsi·yā अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno किच्चं,kic·caṃ सियाsi·yā अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va किच्चञ्च।kic·cañ·ca

Siyā kiccaṁ kiccādhikaraṇaṁ, siyā kiccaṁ no adhikaraṇaṁ, siyā adhikaraṇaṁ no kiccaṁ, siyā adhikaraṇañceva kiccañca.

There’s business that’s also a legal issue arising from business. There’s business that’s not a legal issue. There are legal issues that aren’t business. There are legal issues that are also business.
936

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ किच्चंkic·caṃ किच्चाधिकरणं?kic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Tattha katamaṁ kiccaṁ kiccādhikaraṇaṁ?

How’s there business that’s also a legal issue arising from business?
937

याyā सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa किच्चयता,kic·ca·ya·tā करणीयता,ka·ra·ṇī·ya·tā अपलोकनकम्मं,a·pa·lo·ka·na·kam·maṃ ञत्तिकम्मं,ñat·ti·kam·maṃ ञत्तिदुतियकम्मं,ñat·ti·du·ti·ya·kam·maṃ ञत्तिचतुत्थकम्मं—ñat·ti·ca·tut·tha·kam·maṃ

Yā saṅghassa kiccayatā, karaṇīyatā, apalokanakammaṁ, ñattikammaṁ, ñattidutiyakammaṁ, ñatticatutthakammaṁ—

Whatever is the duty or the business of the Sangha—a legal procedure consisting of getting permission, a legal procedure consisting of one motion, a legal procedure consisting of one motion and one announcement, a legal procedure consisting of one motion and three announcements—
938

इदंi·daṃ किच्चंkic·caṃ किच्चाधिकरणं।kic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

idaṁ kiccaṁ kiccādhikaraṇaṁ.

this is business that’s also a legal issue arising from business.
939

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ किच्चंkic·caṃ नोno अधिकरणं?a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Tattha katamaṁ kiccaṁ no adhikaraṇaṁ?

How’s there business that isn’t a legal issue?
940

आचरियकिच्चं,ā·ca·ri·ya·kic·caṃ उपज्झायकिच्चं,u·paj·jhā·ya·kic·caṃ समानुपज्झायकिच्चं,sa·mā·nu·paj·jhā·ya·kic·caṃ समानाचरियकिच्चं—sa·mā·nā·ca·ri·ya·kic·caṃ

Ācariyakiccaṁ, upajjhāyakiccaṁ, samānupajjhāyakiccaṁ, samānācariyakiccaṁ—

The duty to a teacher, the duty to a preceptor, the duty to a co-student, the duty to a co-pupil—
941

इदंi·daṃ किच्चंkic·caṃ नोno अधिकरणं।a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

idaṁ kiccaṁ no adhikaraṇaṁ.

these kinds of business aren’t legal issues.
942

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno किच्चं?kic·caṃ

Tattha katamaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ no kiccaṁ?

How’s there a legal issue that isn’t business?
943

विवादाधिकरणं,vi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अनुवादाधिकरणं,a·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ आपत्ताधिकरणं—ā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ

Vivādādhikaraṇaṁ, anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ, āpattādhikaraṇaṁ—

A legal issue arising from a dispute, a legal issue arising from an accusation, a legal issue arising from an offense—
944

इदंi·daṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ नोno किच्चं।kic·caṃ

idaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ no kiccaṁ.

these are legal issues that aren’t business.
945

तत्थtat·tha कतमंka·ta·maṃ अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va किच्चञ्च?kic·cañ·ca

Tattha katamaṁ adhikaraṇañceva kiccañca?

How’s there a legal issue that’s also business?
946

किच्चाधिकरणंkic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अधिकरणञ्चेवa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇañ·ce·va किच्चञ्च।kic·cañ·ca

Kiccādhikaraṇaṁ adhikaraṇañceva kiccañca.

A legal issue arising from business is a legal issue and also business.”
947

9। अधिकरणवूपसमनसमथa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·vū·pa·sa·ma·na·sa·ma·tha

9. Adhikaraṇavūpasamanasamatha

9. The resolution and settling of legal issues
948

9।1। सम्मुखाविनयsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ya

9.1. Sammukhāvinaya

Resolution face-to-face
949

विवादाधिकरणंvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कतिहिka·ti·hi समथेहिsa·ma·the·hi सम्मति?sam·ma·ti

Vivādādhikaraṇaṁ katihi samathehi sammati?

(Pāli only)
950

विवादाधिकरणंvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ द्वीहिdvī·hi समथेहिsa·ma·the·hi सम्मति—sam·ma·ti

Vivādādhikaraṇaṁ dvīhi samathehi sammati—

“There are two principles for settling a legal issue arising from a dispute:
951

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca येभुय्यसिकायye·bhuy·ya·si·kā·ya च।ca

sammukhāvinayena ca, yebhuyyasikāya ca.

resolution face-to-face and by majority decision.
952

सियाsi·yā विवादाधिकरणंvi·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ एकंe·kaṃ समथंsa·ma·thaṃ अनागम्मa·nā·gam·ma येभुय्यसिकं,ye·bhuy·ya·si·kaṃ एकेनe·ke·na समथेनsa·ma·the·na समेय्य—sa·mey·ya

Siyā vivādādhikaraṇaṁ ekaṁ samathaṁ anāgamma yebhuyyasikaṁ, ekena samathena sameyya—

Is it possible that a legal issue arising from a dispute should be settled not by majority decision,
953

सम्मुखाविनयेनाति?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·nā·ti

sammukhāvinayenāti?

but by resolution face-to-face?
954

सियातिस्सsi·yā·tis·sa वचनीयं।va·ca·nī·yaṃ

Siyātissa vacanīyaṁ.

It is.
955

यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय?vi·ya

Yathā kathaṁ viya?

How?
956

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū विवदन्ति—vi·va·dan·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū vivadanti—

It may be, monks, that monks are disputing, saying,
957

धम्मोतिdham·mo·ti वाvā अधम्मोतिa·dham·mo·ti वा,vā विनयोतिvi·na·yo·ti वाvā अविनयोतिa·vi·na·yo·ti वा,vā भासितंbhā·si·taṃ लपितंla·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वाvā अभासितंa·bhā·si·taṃ अलपितंa·la·pi·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वा,vā आचिण्णंā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वाvā अनाचिण्णंa·nā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वा,vā पञ्ञत्तंpañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वाvā अपञ्ञत्तंa·pañ·ñat·taṃ तथागतेनातिta·thā·ga·te·nā·ti वा,vā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अनापत्तीतिa·nā·pat·tī·ti वा,vā लहुकाla·hu·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā गरुकाga·ru·kā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा,vā सावसेसाsā·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अनवसेसाa·na·va·se·sā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा,vā दुट्ठुल्लाduṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वाvā अदुट्ठुल्लाa·duṭ·ṭhul·lā आपत्तीतिā·pat·tī·ti वा।vā

dhammoti vā adhammoti vā, vinayoti vā avinayoti vā, bhāsitaṁ lapitaṁ tathāgatenāti vā abhāsitaṁ alapitaṁ tathāgatenāti vā, āciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti vā anāciṇṇaṁ tathāgatenāti vā, paññattaṁ tathāgatenāti vā apaññattaṁ tathāgatenāti vā, āpattīti vā anāpattīti vā, lahukā āpattīti vā garukā āpattīti vā, sāvasesā āpattīti vā anavasesā āpattīti vā, duṭṭhullā āpattīti vā aduṭṭhullā āpattīti vā.

‘This is the Teaching’, ‘This is contrary to the Teaching’, ‘This is the Monastic Law’, ‘This is contrary to the Monastic Law’, ‘This was spoken by the Buddha’, ‘This wasn’t spoken by the Buddha’, ‘This was practiced by the Buddha’, ‘This wasn’t practiced by the Buddha’, ‘This was laid down by the Buddha’, ‘This wasn’t laid down by the Buddha’, ‘This is an offense’, ‘This isn’t an offense’, ‘This is a light offense’, ‘This is a heavy offense’, ‘This is a curable offense’, ‘This is an incurable offense’, ‘This is a grave offense’, or ‘This is a minor offense.’
958

तेte चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुं,vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Te ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhū sakkonti taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ, idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

If those monks are able to resolve that legal issue, this is called the resolution of a legal issue.
959

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
960

सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Sammukhāvinayena.

It’s been resolved face-to-face.
961

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
962

सङ्घसम्मुखता,saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता,vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā पुग्गलसम्मुखता।pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

Saṅghasammukhatā, dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā.

Face-to-face with the Sangha, the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned.
963

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha सङ्घसम्मुखता?saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā

Kā ca tattha saṅghasammukhatā?

This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Sangha:
964

यावतिकाyā·va·ti·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū कम्मप्पत्ताkam·map·pat·tā तेte आगताā·ga·tā होन्ति,hon·ti छन्दारहानंchan·dā·ra·hā·naṃ छन्दोchan·do आहटोā·ha·ṭo होति,ho·ti सम्मुखीभूताsam·mu·khī·bhū·tā नna पटिक्कोसन्ति—pa·ṭik·ko·san·ti

Yāvatikā bhikkhū kammappattā te āgatā honti, chandārahānaṁ chando āhaṭo hoti, sammukhībhūtā na paṭikkosanti—

the monks who should be present have arrived, consent has been brought for those who are eligible to give their consent, and no one present objects to the decision.
965

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha सङ्घसम्मुखता।saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha saṅghasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
966

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता?vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā

Kā ca tattha dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā?

This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Teaching and the Monastic Law:
967

येनye·na धम्मेनdham·me·na येनye·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na येनye·na सत्थुसासनेनsat·thu·sā·sa·ne·na तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति—vū·pa·sam·ma·ti

Yena dhammena yena vinayena yena satthusāsanena taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati—

the Teaching, the Monastic Law, the Teacher’s instruction—that by which that legal issue is resolved.
968

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता।vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
969

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता?pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

Kā ca tattha puggalasammukhatā?

This is the meaning of face-to-face with the persons concerned:
970

योyo चca विवदति,vi·va·da·ti येनye·na चca विवदति,vi·va·da·ti उभोu·bho अत्थपच्चत्थिकाat·tha·pac·cat·thi·kā सम्मुखीभूताsam·mu·khī·bhū·tā होन्ति—hon·ti

Yo ca vivadati, yena ca vivadati, ubho atthapaccatthikā sammukhībhūtā honti—

both sides—those who are disputing and those they’re disputing with—are present.
971

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता।pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha puggalasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
972

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कारकोkā·ra·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं;pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

Evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ kārako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ;

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if any of the participants reopen it, they commit an offense entailing confession for the reopening.
973

छन्ददायकोchan·da·dā·ya·ko खीयति,khī·ya·ti खीयनकंkhī·ya·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं।pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

chandadāyako khīyati, khīyanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ.

If anyone who gave their consent criticizes the resolution, they commit an offense entailing confession.
974

तेte चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū नna सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ तस्मिंtas·miṃ आवासेā·vā·se वूपसमेतुं,vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ तेहि,te·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूहि,bhik·khū·hi यस्मिंyas·miṃ आवासेā·vā·se सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā भिक्खू,bhik·khū सोso आवासोā·vā·so गन्तब्बो।gan·tab·bo

Te ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na sakkonti taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ tasmiṁ āvāse vūpasametuṁ, tehi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi, yasmiṁ āvāse sambahulā bhikkhū, so āvāso gantabbo.

If those monks are unable to resolve that legal issue in that monastery, they should go to another monastery that has a number of monks.
975

तेte चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ आवासंā·vā·saṃ गच्छन्ताgac·chan·tā अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुं,vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Te ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhū taṁ āvāsaṁ gacchantā antarāmagge sakkonti taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ, idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

If they’re able to resolve that legal issue while on their way, this is called the resolution of a legal issue.
976

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
977

सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Sammukhāvinayena.

It’s been resolved face-to-face.
978

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
979

सङ्घसम्मुखता,saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता,vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā पुग्गलसम्मुखता।pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

Saṅghasammukhatā, dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā.

Face-to-face with the Sangha, the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned.
980

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha सङ्घसम्मुखता?saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā

Kā ca tattha saṅghasammukhatā?

…
981

यावतिकाyā·va·ti·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū कम्मप्पत्ताkam·map·pat·tā तेte आगताā·ga·tā होन्ति,hon·ti छन्दारहानंchan·dā·ra·hā·naṃ छन्दोchan·do आहटोā·ha·ṭo होति,ho·ti सम्मुखीभूताsam·mu·khī·bhū·tā नna पटिक्कोसन्ति—pa·ṭik·ko·san·ti

Yāvatikā bhikkhū kammappattā te āgatā honti, chandārahānaṁ chando āhaṭo hoti, sammukhībhūtā na paṭikkosanti—

(Pāli only)
982

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha सङ्घसम्मुखता।saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha saṅghasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
983

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता?vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā

Kā ca tattha dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā?

(Pāli only)
984

येनye·na धम्मेनdham·me·na येनye·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na येनye·na सत्थुसासनेनsat·thu·sā·sa·ne·na तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति—vū·pa·sam·ma·ti

Yena dhammena yena vinayena yena satthusāsanena taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati—

(Pāli only)
985

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता।vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
986

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता?pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

Kā ca tattha puggalasammukhatā?

(Pāli only)
987

योyo चca विवदति,vi·va·da·ti येनye·na चca विवदति,vi·va·da·ti उभोu·bho अत्थपच्चत्थिकाat·tha·pac·cat·thi·kā सम्मुखीभूताsam·mu·khī·bhū·tā होन्ति—hon·ti

Yo ca vivadati, yena ca vivadati, ubho atthapaccatthikā sammukhībhūtā honti—

(Pāli only)
988

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता।pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha puggalasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
989

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कारकोkā·ra·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं;pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

Evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ kārako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ;

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if any of the participants reopen it, they commit an offense entailing confession for the reopening.
990

छन्ददायकोchan·da·dā·ya·ko खीयति,khī·ya·ti खीयनकंkhī·ya·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं।pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

chandadāyako khīyati, khīyanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ.

If anyone who gave their consent criticizes the resolution, they commit an offense entailing confession.
991

तेte चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ आवासंā·vā·saṃ आगच्छन्ताā·gac·chan·tā अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge नna सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुं,vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ तेहि,te·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूहि,bhik·khū·hi तंtaṃ आवासंā·vā·saṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā आवासिकाā·vā·si·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū एवमस्सुe·va·mas·su वचनीया—va·ca·nī·yā

Te ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhū taṁ āvāsaṁ āgacchantā antarāmagge na sakkonti taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ, tehi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi, taṁ āvāsaṁ gantvā āvāsikā bhikkhū evamassu vacanīyā—

If those monks are unable to resolve that legal issue while on their way, they should go to that other monastery and say to the resident monks,
992

‘इदंi·daṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ एवंe·vaṃ जातं,jā·taṃ एवंe·vaṃ समुप्पन्नं;sa·mup·pan·naṃ

‘idaṁ kho, āvuso, adhikaraṇaṁ evaṁ jātaṁ, evaṁ samuppannaṁ;

‘This legal issue has come about in such-and-such a way.
993

साधायस्मन्ताsā·dhā·yas·man·tā इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेन्तुvū·pa·sa·men·tu धम्मेनdham·me·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na सत्थुसासनेन,sat·thu·sā·sa·ne·na यथयिदंya·tha·yi·daṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सुवूपसन्तंsu·vū·pa·san·taṃ अस्सा’ति।as·sā

sādhāyasmantā imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasamentu dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena, yathayidaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ suvūpasantaṁ assā’ti.

Please resolve it, venerables, according to the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Teacher’s instruction, so that this legal issue may be properly disposed of.’
994

सचे,sa·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आवासिकाā·vā·si·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū वुड्ढतराvuḍ·ḍha·ta·rā होन्ति,hon·ti आगन्तुकाā·gan·tu·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū नवकतरा,na·va·ka·ta·rā तेहि,te·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आवासिकेहिā·vā·si·ke·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi आगन्तुकाā·gan·tu·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū एवमस्सुe·va·mas·su वचनीया—va·ca·nī·yā

Sace, bhikkhave, āvāsikā bhikkhū vuḍḍhatarā honti, āgantukā bhikkhū navakatarā, tehi, bhikkhave, āvāsikehi bhikkhūhi āgantukā bhikkhū evamassu vacanīyā—

If the resident monks are senior to the newly-arrived monks, the resident monks should say,
995

‘इङ्घiṅ·gha तुम्हे,tum·he आयस्मन्तो,ā·yas·man·to मुहुत्तंmu·hut·taṃ एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ होथ,ho·tha यावyā·va मयंma·yaṃ मन्तेमा’ति।man·te·mā

‘iṅgha tumhe, āyasmanto, muhuttaṁ ekamantaṁ hotha, yāva mayaṁ mantemā’ti.

‘Now, venerables, please go to one side for a moment while we discuss this matter.’
996

सचेsa·ce पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आवासिकाā·vā·si·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū नवकतराna·va·ka·ta·rā होन्ति,hon·ti आगन्तुकाā·gan·tu·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū वुड्ढतरा,vuḍ·ḍha·ta·rā तेहि,te·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आवासिकेहिā·vā·si·ke·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi आगन्तुकाā·gan·tu·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū एवमस्सुe·va·mas·su वचनीया—va·ca·nī·yā

Sace pana, bhikkhave, āvāsikā bhikkhū navakatarā honti, āgantukā bhikkhū vuḍḍhatarā, tehi, bhikkhave, āvāsikehi bhikkhūhi āgantukā bhikkhū evamassu vacanīyā—

If the newly-arrived monks are senior to the resident monks, the resident monks should say,
997

‘तेनte·na हिhi तुम्हे,tum·he आयस्मन्तो,ā·yas·man·to मुहुत्तंmu·hut·taṃ इधेवi·dhe·va तावtā·va होथ,ho·tha यावyā·va मयंma·yaṃ मन्तेमा’ति।man·te·mā

‘tena hi tumhe, āyasmanto, muhuttaṁ idheva tāva hotha, yāva mayaṁ mantemā’ti.

‘Well then, venerables, please wait right here for a moment while we discuss this matter.’
998

सचेsa·ce पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आवासिकानंā·vā·si·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ मन्तयमानानंman·ta·ya·mā·nā·naṃ एवंe·vaṃ होति—ho·ti

Sace pana, bhikkhave, āvāsikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ mantayamānānaṁ evaṁ hoti—

If, while discussing that matter, the resident monks think,
999

‘नna मयंma·yaṃ सक्कोमsak·ko·ma इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुंvū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ धम्मेनdham·me·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na सत्थुसासनेना’ति,sat·thu·sā·sa·ne·nā नna तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ आवासिकेहिā·vā·si·ke·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi सम्पटिच्छितब्बं।sam·pa·ṭic·chi·tab·baṃ

‘na mayaṁ sakkoma imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ dhammena vinayena satthusāsanenā’ti, na taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ āvāsikehi bhikkhūhi sampaṭicchitabbaṁ.

‘We’re unable to resolve this legal issue according to the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Teacher’s instruction,’ then they shouldn’t take on that legal issue.
1000

सचेsa·ce पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आवासिकानंā·vā·si·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ मन्तयमानानंman·ta·ya·mā·nā·naṃ एवंe·vaṃ होति—ho·ti

Sace pana, bhikkhave, āvāsikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ mantayamānānaṁ evaṁ hoti—

But if they think,
1001

‘सक्कोमsak·ko·ma मयंma·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुंvū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ धम्मेनdham·me·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na सत्थुसासनेना’ति।sat·thu·sā·sa·ne·nā

‘sakkoma mayaṁ imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ dhammena vinayena satthusāsanenā’ti.

‘We’re able to resolve this legal issue according to the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Teacher’s instruction,’
1002

तेहि,te·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आवासिकेहिā·vā·si·ke·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi आगन्तुकाā·gan·tu·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū एवमस्सुe·va·mas·su वचनीया—va·ca·nī·yā

Tehi, bhikkhave, āvāsikehi bhikkhūhi āgantukā bhikkhū evamassu vacanīyā—

then they should say to the newly-arrived monks,
1003

‘सचेsa·ce तुम्हे,tum·he आयस्मन्तो,ā·yas·man·to अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ यथाजातंya·thā·jā·taṃ यथासमुप्पन्नंya·thā·sa·mup·pan·naṃ आरोचेस्सथ,ā·ro·ces·sa·tha यथाya·thā चca मयंma·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेस्सामvū·pa·sa·mes·sā·ma धम्मेनdham·me·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na सत्थुसासनेनsat·thu·sā·sa·ne·na तथाta·thā सुवूपसन्तंsu·vū·pa·san·taṃ भविस्सति।bha·vis·sa·ti

‘sace tumhe, āyasmanto, amhākaṁ imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ yathājātaṁ yathāsamuppannaṁ ārocessatha, yathā ca mayaṁ imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasamessāma dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena tathā suvūpasantaṁ bhavissati.

‘If you’ll tell us how this legal issue came about, we’ll be able to dispose of it properly according to the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Teacher’s instruction.
1004

एवंe·vaṃ मयंma·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सम्पटिच्छिस्साम।sam·pa·ṭic·chis·sā·ma

Evaṁ mayaṁ imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ sampaṭicchissāma.

And so we’ll take it on.
1005

नोno चेce तुम्हे,tum·he आयस्मन्तो,ā·yas·man·to अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ यथाजातंya·thā·jā·taṃ यथासमुप्पन्नंya·thā·sa·mup·pan·naṃ आरोचेस्सथ,ā·ro·ces·sa·tha यथाya·thā चca मयंma·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेस्सामvū·pa·sa·mes·sā·ma धम्मेनdham·me·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na सत्थुसासनेनsat·thu·sā·sa·ne·na तथाta·thā नna सुवूपसन्तंsu·vū·pa·san·taṃ भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti नna मयंma·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सम्पटिच्छिस्सामा’ति।sam·pa·ṭic·chis·sā·mā

No ce tumhe, āyasmanto, amhākaṁ imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ yathājātaṁ yathāsamuppannaṁ ārocessatha, yathā ca mayaṁ imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasamessāma dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena tathā na suvūpasantaṁ bhavissati, na mayaṁ imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ sampaṭicchissāmā’ti.

If, however, you won’t tell us, we won’t be able to properly dispose of it. And so we won’t take it on.’
1006

एवंe·vaṃ सुपरिग्गहितंsu·pa·rig·ga·hi·taṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कत्वाkat·vā आवासिकेहिā·vā·si·ke·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सम्पटिच्छितब्बं।sam·pa·ṭic·chi·tab·baṃ

Evaṁ supariggahitaṁ kho, bhikkhave, katvā āvāsikehi bhikkhūhi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ sampaṭicchitabbaṁ.

Having properly examined it like this, the resident monks should take it on.
1007

तेहि,te·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve आगन्तुकेहिā·gan·tu·ke·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi आवासिकाā·vā·si·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū एवमस्सुe·va·mas·su वचनीया—va·ca·nī·yā

Tehi, bhikkhave, āgantukehi bhikkhūhi āvāsikā bhikkhū evamassu vacanīyā—

The newly-arrived monks should say this to the resident monks,
1008

‘यथाजातंya·thā·jā·taṃ यथासमुप्पन्नंya·thā·sa·mup·pan·naṃ मयंma·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ आरोचेस्साम।ā·ro·ces·sā·ma

‘yathājātaṁ yathāsamuppannaṁ mayaṁ imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ āyasmantānaṁ ārocessāma.

‘We’ll tell you how this legal issue came about.
1009

सचेsa·ce आयस्मन्ताā·yas·man·tā सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti एत्तकेनet·ta·ke·na वाvā एत्तकेनet·ta·ke·na वाvā अन्तरेनan·ta·re·na इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुंvū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ धम्मेनdham·me·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na सत्थुसासनेनsat·thu·sā·sa·ne·na तथाta·thā सुवूपसन्तंsu·vū·pa·san·taṃ भविस्सति।bha·vis·sa·ti

Sace āyasmantā sakkonti ettakena vā ettakena vā antarena imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena tathā suvūpasantaṁ bhavissati.

If you’re able to dispose of it properly by such and such means—according to the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Teacher’s instruction—
1010

एवंe·vaṃ मयंma·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ निय्यादेस्साम।niy·yā·des·sā·ma

Evaṁ mayaṁ imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ āyasmantānaṁ niyyādessāma.

then we’ll hand it over to you.
1011

नोno चेce आयस्मन्ताā·yas·man·tā सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti एत्तकेनet·ta·ke·na वाvā एत्तकेनet·ta·ke·na वाvā अन्तरेनan·ta·re·na इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुंvū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ धम्मेनdham·me·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na सत्थुसासनेनsat·thu·sā·sa·ne·na तथाta·thā नna सुवूपसन्तंsu·vū·pa·san·taṃ भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti नna मयंma·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ निय्यादेस्साम।niy·yā·des·sā·ma

No ce āyasmantā sakkonti ettakena vā ettakena vā antarena imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena tathā na suvūpasantaṁ bhavissati, na mayaṁ imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ āyasmantānaṁ niyyādessāma.

If you’re unable to properly dispose of it by such and such means, then we won’t hand it over to you.
1012

मयमेवma·ya·me·va इमस्सi·mas·sa अधिकरणस्सa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇas·sa सामिनोsā·mi·no भविस्सामा’ति।bha·vis·sā·mā

Mayameva imassa adhikaraṇassa sāmino bhavissāmā’ti.

We’ll take responsibility for it ourselves.’
1013

एवंe·vaṃ सुपरिग्गहितंsu·pa·rig·ga·hi·taṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कत्वाkat·vā आगन्तुकेहिā·gan·tu·ke·hi भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ आवासिकानंā·vā·si·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ निय्यादेतब्बं।niy·yā·de·tab·baṃ

Evaṁ supariggahitaṁ kho, bhikkhave, katvā āgantukehi bhikkhūhi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ āvāsikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ niyyādetabbaṁ.

Having properly examined it like this, the newly-arrived monks should hand it over to the resident monks.
1014

तेte चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुं,vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Te ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhū sakkonti taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ, idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

If those monks are able to resolve that legal issue, this is called the resolution of a legal issue.
1015

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
1016

सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Sammukhāvinayena.

It’s been resolved face-to-face.
1017

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
1018

सङ्घसम्मुखता,saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता,vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā पुग्गलसम्मुखताpug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā …पे…pe

Saṅghasammukhatā, dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā …pe…

Face-to-face with the Sangha, the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned. …
1019

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कारकोkā·ra·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं;pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ kārako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ;

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if any of the participants reopen it, they commit an offense entailing confession for the reopening.
1020

छन्ददायकोchan·da·dā·ya·ko खीयति,khī·ya·ti खीयनकंkhī·ya·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं।pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

chandadāyako khīyati, khīyanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ.

If anyone who gave their consent criticizes the resolution, they commit an offense entailing confession.”
1021

9।2। उब्बाहिकायवूपसमनub·bā·hi·kā·ya·vū·pa·sa·ma·na

9.2. Ubbāhikāyavūpasamana

Resolution by committee
1022

तेहिte·hi चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi तस्मिंtas·miṃ अधिकरणेa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇe विनिच्छियमानेvi·nic·chi·ya·mā·ne अनन्तानिa·nan·tā·ni चेवce·va भस्सानिbhas·sā·ni जायन्ति,jā·yan·ti नna चेकस्सce·kas·sa भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa अत्थोat·tho विञ्ञायति,viñ·ñā·ya·ti अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ उब्बाहिकायub·bā·hi·kā·ya वूपसमेतुं।vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ

Tehi ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi tasmiṁ adhikaraṇe vinicchiyamāne anantāni ceva bhassāni jāyanti, na cekassa bhāsitassa attho viññāyati, anujānāmi, bhikkhave, evarūpaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ ubbāhikāya vūpasametuṁ.

“If, monks, while they’re discussing that legal issue, there’s endless talk, but not a single statement that can be understood, then they should resolve that legal issue by means of a committee.
1023

दसहङ्गेहिda·sa·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to भिक्खुbhik·khu उब्बाहिकायub·bā·hi·kā·ya सम्मन्नितब्बो—sam·man·ni·tab·bo

Dasahaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu ubbāhikāya sammannitabbo—

A monk who has ten qualities may be appointed to that committee:
1024

सीलवाsī·la·vā होति,ho·ti पातिमोक्खसंवरसंवुतोpā·ti·mok·kha·saṃ·va·ra·saṃ·vu·to विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti आचारगोचरसम्पन्नोā·cā·ra·go·ca·ra·sam·pan·no अणुमत्तेसुa·ṇu·mat·te·su वज्जेसुvaj·je·su भयदस्सावी,bha·ya·das·sā·vī समादायsa·mā·dā·ya सिक्खतिsik·kha·ti सिक्खापदेसु;sik·khā·pa·de·su

sīlavā hoti, pātimokkhasaṁvarasaṁvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī, samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu;

He’s virtuous and restrained by the Monastic Code. His conduct is good, he associates with the right people, and he sees danger in minor faults. He undertakes and trains in the training rules.
1025

बहुस्सुतोba·hus·su·to होतिho·ti सुतधरोsu·ta·dha·ro सुतसन्निचयो,su·ta·san·ni·ca·yo येye तेte धम्माdham·mā आदिकल्याणाā·di·kal·yā·ṇā मज्झेकल्याणाmaj·jhe·kal·yā·ṇā परियोसानकल्याणाpa·ri·yo·sā·na·kal·yā·ṇā सात्थंsāt·thaṃ सब्यञ्जनंsab·yañ·ja·naṃ केवलपरिपुण्णंke·va·la·pa·ri·puṇ·ṇaṃ परिसुद्धंpa·ri·sud·dhaṃ ब्रह्मचरियंbrah·ma·ca·ri·yaṃ अभिवदन्ति,a·bhi·va·dan·ti तथारूपस्सta·thā·rū·pas·sa धम्माdham·mā बहुस्सुताba·hus·su·tā होन्ति,hon·ti धाताdhā·tā वचसाva·ca·sā परिचिताpa·ri·ci·tā मनसानुपेक्खिताma·na·sā·nu·pek·khi·tā दिट्ठियाdiṭ·ṭhi·yā सुप्पटिविद्धा;sup·pa·ṭi·vid·dhā

bahussuto hoti sutadharo sutasannicayo, ye te dhammā ādikalyāṇā majjhekalyāṇā pariyosānakalyāṇā sātthaṁ sabyañjanaṁ kevalaparipuṇṇaṁ parisuddhaṁ brahmacariyaṁ abhivadanti, tathārūpassa dhammā bahussutā honti, dhātā vacasā paricitā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā;

He has learned much, and he retains and accumulates what he has learned. Those teachings that are good in the beginning, good in the middle, and good in the end, that have a true goal and are well articulated, and that set out the perfectly complete and pure spiritual life—he has learned many such teachings, retained them in mind, recited them verbally, mentally investigated them, and penetrated them well by view.
1026

उभयानिu·bha·yā·ni खोkho पनस्सpa·nas·sa पातिमोक्खानिpā·ti·mok·khā·ni वित्थारेनvit·thā·re·na स्वागतानिsvā·ga·tā·ni होन्तिhon·ti सुविभत्तानिsu·vi·bhat·tā·ni सुप्पवत्तीनिsup·pa·vat·tī·ni सुविनिच्छितानिsu·vi·nic·chi·tā·ni सुत्तसोsut·ta·so अनुब्यञ्जनसो;a·nub·yañ·ja·na·so

ubhayāni kho panassa pātimokkhāni vitthārena svāgatāni honti suvibhattāni suppavattīni suvinicchitāni suttaso anubyañjanaso;

He has properly learned both Monastic Codes in detail; he has analyzed them well, thoroughly mastered them, and investigated them well, both in terms of the rules and their detailed exposition.
1027

विनयेvi·na·ye खोkho पनpa·na ठितोṭhi·to होतिho·ti असंहीरो;a·saṃ·hī·ro

vinaye kho pana ṭhito hoti asaṁhīro;

He is firmly committed to the Monastic Law.
1028

पटिबलोpa·ṭi·ba·lo होतिho·ti उभोu·bho अत्थपच्चत्थिकेat·tha·pac·cat·thi·ke अस्सासेतुंas·sā·se·tuṃ सञ्ञापेतुंsañ·ñā·pe·tuṃ निज्झापेतुंnij·jhā·pe·tuṃ पेक्खेतुंpek·khe·tuṃ पसादेतुं;pa·sā·de·tuṃ

paṭibalo hoti ubho atthapaccatthike assāsetuṁ saññāpetuṁ nijjhāpetuṁ pekkhetuṁ pasādetuṁ;

He is capable of making both sides relax, of persuading them, of convincing them, of making them see, of reconciling them.
1029

अधिकरणसमुप्पादवूपसमनकुसलोa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·sa·mup·pā·da·vū·pa·sa·ma·na·ku·sa·lo होति;ho·ti

adhikaraṇasamuppādavūpasamanakusalo hoti;

He is knowledgeable about the arising and resolution of legal issues.
1030

अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ जानाति;jā·nā·ti

adhikaraṇaṁ jānāti;

He knows the legal issues.
1031

अधिकरणसमुदयंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·sa·mu·da·yaṃ जानाति;jā·nā·ti

adhikaraṇasamudayaṁ jānāti;

He knows the origin of the legal issues.
1032

अधिकरणनिरोधंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·ni·ro·dhaṃ जानाति;jā·nā·ti

adhikaraṇanirodhaṁ jānāti;

He knows the ending of the legal issues.
1033

अधिकरणनिरोधगामिनिपटिपदंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·ni·ro·dha·gā·mi·ni·pa·ṭi·pa·daṃ जानाति।jā·nā·ti

adhikaraṇanirodhagāminipaṭipadaṁ jānāti.

He knows the way to the ending of the legal issues.
1034

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve इमेहिi·me·hi दसहङ्गेहिda·sa·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतंsa·man·nā·ga·taṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ उब्बाहिकायub·bā·hi·kā·ya सम्मन्नितुं।sam·man·ni·tuṃ

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, imehi dasahaṅgehi samannāgataṁ bhikkhuṁ ubbāhikāya sammannituṁ.

(Pāli only)
1035

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मन्नितब्बो।sam·man·ni·tab·bo

Evañca pana, bhikkhave, sammannitabbo.

And he should be appointed like this.
1036

पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ भिक्खुbhik·khu याचितब्बो,yā·ci·tab·bo याचित्वाyā·cit·vā ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Paṭhamaṁ bhikkhu yācitabbo, yācitvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

First a monk should be asked, and then a competent and capable monk should inform the Sangha:
1037

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1038

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ अधिकरणेa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇe विनिच्छियमानेvi·nic·chi·ya·mā·ne अनन्तानिa·nan·tā·ni चेवce·va भस्सानिbhas·sā·ni जायन्ति,jā·yan·ti नna चेकस्सce·kas·sa भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa अत्थोat·tho विञ्ञायति।viñ·ñā·ya·ti

Amhākaṁ imasmiṁ adhikaraṇe vinicchiyamāne anantāni ceva bhassāni jāyanti, na cekassa bhāsitassa attho viññāyati.

While we were discussing this legal issue, there was endless talk, but not a single statement that could be understood.
1039

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामञ्चit·than·nā·mañ·ca इत्थन्नामञ्चit·than·nā·mañ·ca भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ सम्मन्नेय्यsam·man·ney·ya उब्बाहिकायub·bā·hi·kā·ya इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुं।vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho itthannāmañca itthannāmañca bhikkhuṁ sammanneyya ubbāhikāya imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ.

If the Sangha is ready, it should appoint monks so-and-so and so-and-so to a committee to resolve this legal issue.
1040

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
1041

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1042

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ अधिकरणेa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇe विनिच्छियमानेvi·nic·chi·ya·mā·ne अनन्तानिa·nan·tā·ni चेवce·va भस्सानिbhas·sā·ni जायन्ति,jā·yan·ti नna चेकस्सce·kas·sa भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa अत्थोat·tho विञ्ञायति।viñ·ñā·ya·ti

Amhākaṁ imasmiṁ adhikaraṇe vinicchiyamāne anantāni ceva bhassāni jāyanti, na cekassa bhāsitassa attho viññāyati.

While we were discussing this legal issue, there was endless talk, but not a single statement that could be understood.
1043

सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामञ्चit·than·nā·mañ·ca इत्थन्नामञ्चit·than·nā·mañ·ca भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ सम्मन्नतिsam·man·na·ti उब्बाहिकायub·bā·hi·kā·ya इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुं।vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ

Saṅgho itthannāmañca itthannāmañca bhikkhuṁ sammannati ubbāhikāya imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ.

The Sangha appoints monks so-and-so and so-and-so to a committee to resolve this legal issue.
1044

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa चca इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa चca भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सम्मुतिsam·mu·ti उब्बाहिकायub·bā·hi·kā·ya इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुं,vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati itthannāmassa ca itthannāmassa ca bhikkhuno sammuti ubbāhikāya imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves of appointing monks so-and-so and so-and-so to a committee to resolve this legal issue should remain silent.
1045

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
1046

सम्मतोsam·ma·to सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo चca इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo चca भिक्खुbhik·khu उब्बाहिकायub·bā·hi·kā·ya इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुं।vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ

Sammato saṅghena itthannāmo ca itthannāmo ca bhikkhu ubbāhikāya imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ.

The Sangha has appointed monks so-and-so and so-and-so to a committee to resolve this legal issue.
1047

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’
1048

तेte चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ उब्बाहिकायub·bā·hi·kā·ya वूपसमेतुं,vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Te ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhū sakkonti taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ ubbāhikāya vūpasametuṁ, idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

If those monks are able to resolve that legal issue by means of a committee, this is called the resolution of a legal issue.
1049

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
1050

सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Sammukhāvinayena.

It’s been resolved face-to-face.
1051

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
1052

धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता,vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā पुग्गलसम्मुखताpug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā …पे…pe

Dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā …pe…

Face-to-face with the Sangha, the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Sangha: the monks who should be present have arrived, consent has been brought for those who are eligible to give their consent, and no one present objects to the decision. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Teaching and the Monastic Law: the Teaching, the Monastic Law, the Teacher’s instruction—that by which that legal issue is resolved. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the persons concerned: both sides—those who are disputing and those they’re disputing with—are present.
1053

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कारकोkā·ra·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं।pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ kārako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ.

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if any of the participants reopen it, they commit an offense entailing confession for the reopening.
1054

Dealing with obstructive monks
1055

तेहिte·hi चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi तस्मिंtas·miṃ अधिकरणेa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇe विनिच्छियमानेvi·nic·chi·ya·mā·ne तत्रास्सtat·rās·sa भिक्खुbhik·khu धम्मकथिको,dham·ma·ka·thi·ko तस्सtas·sa नेवne·va सुत्तंsut·taṃ आगतंā·ga·taṃ होति,ho·ti नोno सुत्तविभङ्गो,sut·ta·vi·bhaṅ·go सोso अत्थंat·thaṃ असल्लक्खेन्तोa·sal·lak·khen·to ब्यञ्जनच्छायायbyañ·ja·nac·chā·yā·ya अत्थंat·thaṃ पटिबाहति,pa·ṭi·bā·ha·ti ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū ञापेतब्बा—ñā·pe·tab·bā

Tehi ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi tasmiṁ adhikaraṇe vinicchiyamāne tatrāssa bhikkhu dhammakathiko, tassa neva suttaṁ āgataṁ hoti, no suttavibhaṅgo, so atthaṁ asallakkhento byañjanacchāyāya atthaṁ paṭibāhati, byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena te bhikkhū ñāpetabbā—

While those monks are discussing that legal issue, there may be a monk there who’s an expounder of the Teaching, but who doesn’t know the Monastic Code or its analysis. Not understanding the meaning, he obstructs it by obscuring it with the wording. A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:
1056

‘सुणन्तुsu·ṇan·tu मेme आयस्मन्ता।ā·yas·man·tā

‘Suṇantu me āyasmantā.

‘Please, venerables, I ask you to listen.
1057

अयंa·yaṃ इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu धम्मकथिको।dham·ma·ka·thi·ko

Ayaṁ itthannāmo bhikkhu dhammakathiko.

The monk so-and-so is an expounder of the Teaching,
1058

इमस्सi·mas·sa नेवne·va सुत्तंsut·taṃ आगतंā·ga·taṃ होति,ho·ti नोno सुत्तविभङ्गो।sut·ta·vi·bhaṅ·go

Imassa neva suttaṁ āgataṁ hoti, no suttavibhaṅgo.

but doesn’t know the Monastic Code or its analysis.
1059

सोso अत्थंat·thaṃ असल्लक्खेन्तोa·sal·lak·khen·to ब्यञ्जनच्छायायbyañ·ja·nac·chā·yā·ya अत्थंat·thaṃ पटिबाहति।pa·ṭi·bā·ha·ti

So atthaṁ asallakkhento byañjanacchāyāya atthaṁ paṭibāhati.

Not understanding the meaning, he obstructs it by obscuring it with the wording.
1060

यदायस्मन्तानंya·dā·yas·man·tā·naṃ पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ वुट्ठापेत्वाvuṭ·ṭhā·pet·vā अवसेसाa·va·se·sā इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेय्यामा’ति।vū·pa·sa·mey·yā·mā

Yadāyasmantānaṁ pattakallaṁ, itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ vuṭṭhāpetvā avasesā imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasameyyāmā’ti.

If the venerables are ready, we should ask monk so-and-so to leave, with the remainder of us resolving this legal issue.’
1061

तेte चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ वुट्ठापेत्वाvuṭ·ṭhā·pet·vā सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुं,vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Te ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhū taṁ bhikkhuṁ vuṭṭhāpetvā sakkonti taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ, idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

If, after that monk has left, those monks are able to resolve that legal issue, this is called the resolution of a legal issue.
1062

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
1063

सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Sammukhāvinayena.

It’s been resolved face-to-face.
1064

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
1065

धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता,vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā पुग्गलसम्मुखताpug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā …पे…pe

Dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā …pe…

Face-to-face with the Sangha, the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned. …
1066

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कारकोkā·ra·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं।pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ kārako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ.

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if any of the participants reopen it, they commit an offense entailing confession for the reopening.
1067

तेहिte·hi चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi तस्मिंtas·miṃ अधिकरणेa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇe विनिच्छियमानेvi·nic·chi·ya·mā·ne तत्रास्सtat·rās·sa भिक्खुbhik·khu धम्मकथिको,dham·ma·ka·thi·ko तस्सtas·sa सुत्तञ्हिsut·tañ·hi खोkho आगतंā·ga·taṃ होति,ho·ti नोno सुत्तविभङ्गो,sut·ta·vi·bhaṅ·go सोso अत्थंat·thaṃ असल्लक्खेन्तोa·sal·lak·khen·to ब्यञ्जनच्छायायbyañ·ja·nac·chā·yā·ya अत्थंat·thaṃ पटिबाहति,pa·ṭi·bā·ha·ti ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū ञापेतब्बा—ñā·pe·tab·bā

Tehi ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi tasmiṁ adhikaraṇe vinicchiyamāne tatrāssa bhikkhu dhammakathiko, tassa suttañhi kho āgataṁ hoti, no suttavibhaṅgo, so atthaṁ asallakkhento byañjanacchāyāya atthaṁ paṭibāhati, byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena te bhikkhū ñāpetabbā—

While those monks are discussing that legal issue, there may be a monk there who’s an expounder of the Teaching. He knows the Monastic Code, but not its analysis. Not understanding the meaning, he obstructs it by obscuring it with the wording. A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:
1068

‘सुणन्तुsu·ṇan·tu मेme आयस्मन्ता।ā·yas·man·tā

‘Suṇantu me āyasmantā.

‘Please, venerables, I ask you to listen.
1069

अयंa·yaṃ इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu धम्मकथिको।dham·ma·ka·thi·ko

Ayaṁ itthannāmo bhikkhu dhammakathiko.

The monk so-and-so is an expounder of the Teaching.
1070

इमस्सi·mas·sa सुत्तञ्हिsut·tañ·hi खोkho आगतंā·ga·taṃ होति,ho·ti नोno सुत्तविभङ्गो।sut·ta·vi·bhaṅ·go

Imassa suttañhi kho āgataṁ hoti, no suttavibhaṅgo.

He knows the Monastic Code, but not its analysis.
1071

सोso अत्थंat·thaṃ असल्लक्खेन्तोa·sal·lak·khen·to ब्यञ्जनच्छायायbyañ·ja·nac·chā·yā·ya अत्थंat·thaṃ पटिबाहति।pa·ṭi·bā·ha·ti

So atthaṁ asallakkhento byañjanacchāyāya atthaṁ paṭibāhati.

Not understanding the meaning, he obstructs it by obscuring it with the wording.
1072

यदायस्मन्तानंya·dā·yas·man·tā·naṃ पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ वुट्ठापेत्वाvuṭ·ṭhā·pet·vā अवसेसाa·va·se·sā इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेय्यामा’ति।vū·pa·sa·mey·yā·mā

Yadāyasmantānaṁ pattakallaṁ, itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ vuṭṭhāpetvā avasesā imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasameyyāmā’ti.

If the venerables are ready, we should ask monk so-and-so to leave, with the remainder of us resolving this legal issue.’
1073

तेte चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ वुट्ठापेत्वाvuṭ·ṭhā·pet·vā सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुं,vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Te ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhū taṁ bhikkhuṁ vuṭṭhāpetvā sakkonti taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametuṁ, idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

If, after that monk has left, those monks are able to resolve that legal issue, this is called the resolution of a legal issue.
1074

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
1075

सम्मुखाविनयेन।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na

Sammukhāvinayena.

It’s been resolved face-to-face.
1076

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
1077

धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता,vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā पुग्गलसम्मुखताpug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā …पे…pe

Dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā …pe…

Face-to-face with the Sangha, the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned. …
1078

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कारकोkā·ra·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं।pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ kārako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ.

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if any of the participants reopen it, they commit an offense entailing confession for the reopening.”
1079

9।3। येभुय्यसिकाविनयye·bhuy·ya·si·kā·vi·na·ya

9.3. Yebhuyyasikāvinaya

Resolution by majority decision
1080

तेte चे,ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū नna सक्कोन्तिsak·kon·ti तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ उब्बाहिकायub·bā·hi·kā·ya वूपसमेतुं,vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ तेहि,te·hi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूहिbhik·khū·hi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa निय्यादेतब्बं—niy·yā·de·tab·baṃ

Te ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na sakkonti taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ ubbāhikāya vūpasametuṁ, tehi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ saṅghassa niyyādetabbaṁ—

“If, monks, those monks are unable to resolve that legal issue by committee, they should hand it over to the Sangha, saying,
1081

‘नna मयं,ma·yaṃ भन्ते,bhan·te सक्कोमsak·ko·ma इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ उब्बाहिकायub·bā·hi·kā·ya वूपसमेतुं,vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ सङ्घोवsaṅ·gho·va इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतू’ति।vū·pa·sa·me·tū

‘na mayaṁ, bhante, sakkoma imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ ubbāhikāya vūpasametuṁ, saṅghova imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametū’ti.

‘Venerables, we’re unable to resolve this legal issue by committee. Can the Sangha please resolve it.’
1082

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ येभुय्यसिकायye·bhuy·ya·si·kā·ya वूपसमेतुं।vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, evarūpaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ yebhuyyasikāya vūpasametuṁ.

I allow such a legal issue to be resolved by majority decision.
1083

पञ्चहङ्गेहिpañ·ca·haṅ·ge·hi समन्नागतोsa·man·nā·ga·to भिक्खुbhik·khu सलाकग्गाहापकोsa·lā·kag·gā·hā·pa·ko सम्मन्नितब्बो—sam·man·ni·tab·bo

Pañcahaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu salākaggāhāpako sammannitabbo—

A monk who has five qualities should be appointed as the manager of the vote:
1084

योyo नna छन्दागतिंchan·dā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna दोसागतिंdo·sā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna मोहागतिंmo·hā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya नna भयागतिंbha·yā·ga·tiṃ गच्छेय्य,gac·chey·ya गहितागहितञ्चga·hi·tā·ga·hi·tañ·ca जानेय्यjā·ney·ya …पे…pe

yo na chandāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na dosāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na mohāgatiṁ gaccheyya, na bhayāgatiṁ gaccheyya, gahitāgahitañca jāneyya …pe…

he’s not biased by favoritism, ill will, confusion, or fear, and he knows who has and who hasn’t voted.
1085

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सम्मन्नितब्बो।sam·man·ni·tab·bo

evañca pana, bhikkhave, sammannitabbo.

And he should be appointed like this.
1086

पठमंpa·ṭha·maṃ भिक्खुbhik·khu याचितब्बो,yā·ci·tab·bo याचित्वाyā·cit·vā ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Paṭhamaṁ bhikkhu yācitabbo, yācitvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

First a monk should be asked, and then a competent and capable monk should inform the Sangha:
1087

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1088

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ सलाकग्गाहापकंsa·lā·kag·gā·hā·pa·kaṃ सम्मन्नेय्य।sam·man·ney·ya

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ salākaggāhāpakaṁ sammanneyya.

If the Sangha is ready, it should appoint monk so-and-so as the manager of the vote.
1089

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
1090

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1091

सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ सलाकग्गाहापकंsa·lā·kag·gā·hā·pa·kaṃ सम्मन्नति।sam·man·na·ti

Saṅgho itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ salākaggāhāpakaṁ sammannati.

The Sangha appoints monk so-and-so as the manager of the vote.
1092

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सलाकग्गाहापकस्सsa·lā·kag·gā·hā·pa·kas·sa सम्मुति,sam·mu·ti सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati itthannāmassa bhikkhuno salākaggāhāpakassa sammuti, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves of appointing monk so-and-so as the manager of the vote should remain silent.
1093

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
1094

सम्मतोsam·ma·to सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu सलाकग्गाहापको।sa·lā·kag·gā·hā·pa·ko

Sammato saṅghena itthannāmo bhikkhu salākaggāhāpako.

The Sangha has appointed monk so-and-so as the manager of the vote.
1095

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’
1096

तेनte·na सलाकग्गाहापकेनsa·lā·kag·gā·hā·pa·ke·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सलाकाsa·lā·kā गाहेतब्बा।gā·he·tab·bā

Tena salākaggāhāpakena bhikkhunā salākā gāhetabbā.

That monk should then distribute the ballots.
1097

यथाya·thā बहुतराba·hu·ta·rā भिक्खूbhik·khū धम्मवादिनोdham·ma·vā·di·no वदन्तिva·dan·ti तथाta·thā तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतब्बं।vū·pa·sa·me·tab·baṃ

Yathā bahutarā bhikkhū dhammavādino vadanti tathā taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametabbaṁ.

If the majority of monks vote in accordance with the Teaching, then that legal issue has been resolved.
1098

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

This is called the resolution of a legal issue.
1099

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
1100

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca येभुय्यसिकायye·bhuy·ya·si·kā·ya च।ca

Sammukhāvinayena ca, yebhuyyasikāya ca.

It’s been resolved face-to-face and by majority decision.
1101

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
1102

सङ्घसम्मुखता,saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता,vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā पुग्गलसम्मुखता।pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

Saṅghasammukhatā, dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā.

Face-to-face with the Sangha, the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned.
1103

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha सङ्घसम्मुखता?saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā

Kā ca tattha saṅghasammukhatā?

This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Sangha:
1104

यावतिकाyā·va·ti·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū कम्मप्पत्ताkam·map·pat·tā तेte आगताā·ga·tā होन्ति,hon·ti छन्दारहानंchan·dā·ra·hā·naṃ छन्दोchan·do आहटोā·ha·ṭo होति,ho·ti सम्मुखीभूताsam·mu·khī·bhū·tā नna पटिक्कोसन्ति—pa·ṭik·ko·san·ti

Yāvatikā bhikkhū kammappattā te āgatā honti, chandārahānaṁ chando āhaṭo hoti, sammukhībhūtā na paṭikkosanti—

the monks who should be present have arrived, consent has been brought for those who are eligible to give their consent, and no one present objects to the decision.
1105

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha सङ्घसम्मुखता।saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha saṅghasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
1106

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता?vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā

Kā ca tattha dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā?

This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Teaching and the Monastic Law:
1107

येनye·na धम्मेनdham·me·na येनye·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na येनye·na सत्थुसासनेनsat·thu·sā·sa·ne·na तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति—vū·pa·sam·ma·ti

Yena dhammena yena vinayena yena satthusāsanena taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati—

the Teaching, the Monastic Law, the Teacher’s instruction—that by which that legal issue is resolved.
1108

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता।vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
1109

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता?pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

Kā ca tattha puggalasammukhatā?

This is the meaning of face-to-face with the persons concerned:
1110

योyo चca विवदति,vi·va·da·ti येनye·na चca विवदति,vi·va·da·ti उभोu·bho अत्थपच्चत्थिकाat·tha·pac·cat·thi·kā सम्मुखीभूताsam·mu·khī·bhū·tā होन्ति—hon·ti

Yo ca vivadati, yena ca vivadati, ubho atthapaccatthikā sammukhībhūtā honti—

both sides—those who are disputing and those they’re disputing with—are present.
1111

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता।pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha puggalasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
1112

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha येभुय्यसिकाय?ye·bhuy·ya·si·kā·ya

Kā ca tattha yebhuyyasikāya?

This is the meaning of by majority decision:
1113

याyā येभुय्यसिकाकम्मस्सye·bhuy·ya·si·kā·kam·mas·sa किरियाki·ri·yā करणंka·ra·ṇaṃ उपगमनंu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अज्झुपगमनंaj·jhu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अधिवासनाa·dhi·vā·sa·nā अप्पटिक्कोसना—ap·pa·ṭik·ko·sa·nā

Yā yebhuyyasikākammassa kiriyā karaṇaṁ upagamanaṁ ajjhupagamanaṁ adhivāsanā appaṭikkosanā—

the doing of, the performing of, the participation in, the consent to, the agreement to, the non-objection to that legal procedure of majority decision.
1114

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha येभुय्यसिकाय।ye·bhuy·ya·si·kā·ya

ayaṁ tattha yebhuyyasikāya.

(Pāli only)
1115

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कारकोkā·ra·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं;pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

Evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ kārako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ;

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if any of the participants reopen it, they commit an offense entailing confession for the reopening.
1116

छन्ददायकोchan·da·dā·ya·ko खीयति,khī·ya·ti खीयनकंkhī·ya·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियन्”ति।pā·cit·ti·yan

chandadāyako khīyati, khīyanakaṁ pācittiyan”ti.

If anyone who gave their consent criticizes the resolution, they commit an offense entailing confession.”
1117

9।4। तिविधसलाकग्गाहti·vi·dha·sa·lā·kag·gā·ha

9.4. Tividhasalākaggāha

The three kinds of voting
1118

तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सावत्थियाsā·vat·thi·yā एवंe·vaṃ जातंjā·taṃ एवंe·vaṃ समुप्पन्नंsa·mup·pan·naṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ होति।ho·ti

Tena kho pana samayena sāvatthiyā evaṁ jātaṁ evaṁ samuppannaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ hoti.

At one time at Sāvatthī a legal issue had come about in this way.
1119

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खू—bhik·khū

Atha kho te bhikkhū—

But there were monks
1120

असन्तुट्ठाa·san·tuṭ·ṭhā सावत्थियाsā·vat·thi·yā सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa अधिकरणवूपसमनेन—a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·vū·pa·sa·ma·ne·na

asantuṭṭhā sāvatthiyā saṅghassa adhikaraṇavūpasamanena—

who were dissatisfied with how the Sangha at Sāvatthī had resolved it.
1121

अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho अमुकस्मिंa·mu·kas·miṃ किरki·ra आवासेā·vā·se सम्बहुलाsam·ba·hu·lā थेराthe·rā विहरन्तिvi·ha·ran·ti बहुस्सुताba·hus·su·tā आगतागमाā·ga·tā·ga·mā धम्मधराdham·ma·dha·rā विनयधराvi·na·ya·dha·rā मातिकाधराmā·ti·kā·dha·rā पण्डिताpaṇ·ḍi·tā वियत्ताvi·yat·tā मेधाविनोme·dhā·vi·no लज्जिनोlaj·ji·no कुक्कुच्चकाkuk·kuc·ca·kā सिक्खाकामा।sik·khā·kā·mā

assosuṁ kho amukasmiṁ kira āvāse sambahulā therā viharanti bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā paṇḍitā viyattā medhāvino lajjino kukkuccakā sikkhākāmā.

They heard that in a certain monastery there was a number of senior monks who were learned and masters of the tradition; who were experts on the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Key Terms; who were knowledgeable and competent, had a sense of conscience, and were afraid of wrongdoing and fond of the training.
1122

तेte चेce थेराthe·rā इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेय्युंvū·pa·sa·mey·yuṃ धम्मेनdham·me·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na सत्थुसासनेन,sat·thu·sā·sa·ne·na एवमिदंe·va·mi·daṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सुवूपसन्तंsu·vū·pa·san·taṃ अस्साति।as·sā·ti

Te ce therā imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasameyyuṁ dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena, evamidaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ suvūpasantaṁ assāti.

They thought, “If these senior monks resolve this legal issue—according to the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Teacher’s instruction—then it will be properly disposed of.”
1123

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ आवासंā·vā·saṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā तेte थेरेthe·re एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

Atha kho te bhikkhū taṁ āvāsaṁ gantvā te there etadavocuṁ—

They then went to that monastery and said to those senior monks,
1124

“इदं,i·daṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ एवंe·vaṃ जातं,jā·taṃ एवंe·vaṃ समुप्पन्नं।sa·mup·pan·naṃ

“idaṁ, bhante, adhikaraṇaṁ evaṁ jātaṁ, evaṁ samuppannaṁ.

“This legal issue has come about in this way.
1125

साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te थेराthe·rā इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेन्तुvū·pa·sa·men·tu धम्मेनdham·me·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na सत्थुसासनेन,sat·thu·sā·sa·ne·na यथयिदंya·tha·yi·daṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सुवूपसन्तंsu·vū·pa·san·taṃ अस्सा”ति।as·sā

Sādhu, bhante, therā imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasamentu dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena, yathayidaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ suvūpasantaṁ assā”ti.

Venerables, please resolve it—according to the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Teacher’s instruction—so that it will be properly disposed of.”
1126

अथa·tha खोkho तेte थेरा—the·rā

Atha kho te therā—

Those senior monks thought,
1127

यथाya·thā सावत्थियाsā·vat·thi·yā सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमितंvū·pa·sa·mi·taṃ तथाta·thā सुवूपसन्तन्ति—su·vū·pa·san·tan·ti

yathā sāvatthiyā saṅghena adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasamitaṁ tathā suvūpasantanti—

“This legal issue was properly disposed of by the Sangha at Sāvatthī,”
1128

तथाta·thā तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेसुं।vū·pa·sa·me·suṃ

tathā taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasamesuṁ.

and they resolved it in the same way.
1129

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खू—bhik·khū

Atha kho te bhikkhū—

Those monks
1130

असन्तुट्ठाa·san·tuṭ·ṭhā सावत्थियाsā·vat·thi·yā सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa अधिकरणवूपसमनेन,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·vū·pa·sa·ma·ne·na असन्तुट्ठाa·san·tuṭ·ṭhā सम्बहुलानंsam·ba·hu·lā·naṃ थेरानंthe·rā·naṃ अधिकरणवूपसमनेन—a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·vū·pa·sa·ma·ne·na

asantuṭṭhā sāvatthiyā saṅghassa adhikaraṇavūpasamanena, asantuṭṭhā sambahulānaṁ therānaṁ adhikaraṇavūpasamanena—

were dissatisfied with how the Sangha at Sāvatthī had resolved that legal issue and also with how that number of senior monks had resolved it.
1131

अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho अमुकस्मिंa·mu·kas·miṃ किरki·ra आवासेā·vā·se तयोta·yo थेराthe·rā विहरन्तिvi·ha·ran·ti …पे…pe

assosuṁ kho amukasmiṁ kira āvāse tayo therā viharanti …pe…

They then heard that in a certain monastery there were three senior monks …
1132

द्वेdve थेराthe·rā विहरन्तिvi·ha·ran·ti …पे…pe

dve therā viharanti …pe…

two senior monks …
1133

एकोe·ko थेरोthe·ro विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti बहुस्सुतोba·hus·su·to आगतागमोā·ga·tā·ga·mo धम्मधरोdham·ma·dha·ro विनयधरोvi·na·ya·dha·ro मातिकाधरोmā·ti·kā·dha·ro पण्डितोpaṇ·ḍi·to वियत्तोvi·yat·to मेधावीme·dhā·vī लज्जीlaj·jī कुक्कुच्चकोkuk·kuc·ca·ko सिक्खाकामो।sik·khā·kā·mo

eko thero viharati bahussuto āgatāgamo dhammadharo vinayadharo mātikādharo paṇḍito viyatto medhāvī lajjī kukkuccako sikkhākāmo.

one senior monk who was learned and a master of the tradition; who was an expert on the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Key Terms; who was knowledgeable and competent, had a sense of conscience, and was afraid of wrongdoing and fond of the training.
1134

सोso चेce थेरोthe·ro इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेय्यvū·pa·sa·mey·ya धम्मेनdham·me·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na सत्थुसासनेन,sat·thu·sā·sa·ne·na एवमिदंe·va·mi·daṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सुवूपसन्तंsu·vū·pa·san·taṃ अस्साति।as·sā·ti

So ce thero imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasameyya dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena, evamidaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ suvūpasantaṁ assāti.

They thought, “If this senior monk resolves this legal issue—according to the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Teacher’s instruction—then it will be properly disposed of.”
1135

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū तंtaṃ आवासंā·vā·saṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā तंtaṃ थेरंthe·raṃ एतदवोचुं—e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

Atha kho te bhikkhū taṁ āvāsaṁ gantvā taṁ theraṁ etadavocuṁ—

They then went to that monastery and said to that senior monk,
1136

“इदं,i·daṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ एवंe·vaṃ जातं,jā·taṃ एवंe·vaṃ समुप्पन्नं।sa·mup·pan·naṃ

“idaṁ, bhante, adhikaraṇaṁ evaṁ jātaṁ, evaṁ samuppannaṁ.

“This legal issue has come about in this way.
1137

साधु,sā·dhu भन्ते,bhan·te थेरोthe·ro इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेतुvū·pa·sa·me·tu धम्मेनdham·me·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na सत्थुसासनेन,sat·thu·sā·sa·ne·na यथयिदंya·tha·yi·daṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सुवूपसन्तंsu·vū·pa·san·taṃ अस्सा”ति।as·sā

Sādhu, bhante, thero imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasametu dhammena vinayena satthusāsanena, yathayidaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ suvūpasantaṁ assā”ti.

Venerable, please resolve it—according to the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the Teacher’s instruction—so that it will be properly disposed of.”
1138

अथa·tha खोkho सोso थेरो—the·ro

Atha kho so thero—

That senior monk thought,
1139

यथाya·thā सावत्थियाsā·vat·thi·yā सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमितं,vū·pa·sa·mi·taṃ यथाya·thā सम्बहुलेहिsam·ba·hu·le·hi थेरेहिthe·re·hi अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमितं,vū·pa·sa·mi·taṃ यथाya·thā तीहिtī·hi थेरेहिthe·re·hi अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमितं,vū·pa·sa·mi·taṃ यथाya·thā द्वीहिdvī·hi थेरेहिthe·re·hi अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमितं,vū·pa·sa·mi·taṃ तथाta·thā सुवूपसन्तन्ति—su·vū·pa·san·tan·ti

yathā sāvatthiyā saṅghena adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasamitaṁ, yathā sambahulehi therehi adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasamitaṁ, yathā tīhi therehi adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasamitaṁ, yathā dvīhi therehi adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasamitaṁ, tathā suvūpasantanti—

“This legal issue was properly disposed of by the Sangha at Sāvatthī, and likewise by that number of senior monks, by those three senior monks, and by those two senior monks,”
1140

तथाta·thā तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसमेसि।vū·pa·sa·me·si

tathā taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasamesi.

and he resolved it in the same way.
1141

अथa·tha खोkho तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū असन्तुट्ठाa·san·tuṭ·ṭhā सावत्थियाsā·vat·thi·yā सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa अधिकरणवूपसमनेन,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·vū·pa·sa·ma·ne·na असन्तुट्ठाa·san·tuṭ·ṭhā सम्बहुलानंsam·ba·hu·lā·naṃ थेरानंthe·rā·naṃ अधिकरणवूपसमनेन,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·vū·pa·sa·ma·ne·na असन्तुट्ठाa·san·tuṭ·ṭhā तिण्णंtiṇ·ṇaṃ थेरानंthe·rā·naṃ अधिकरणवूपसमनेन,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·vū·pa·sa·ma·ne·na असन्तुट्ठाa·san·tuṭ·ṭhā द्विन्नंdvin·naṃ थेरानंthe·rā·naṃ अधिकरणवूपसमनेन,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·vū·pa·sa·ma·ne·na असन्तुट्ठाa·san·tuṭ·ṭhā एकस्सe·kas·sa थेरस्सthe·ras·sa अधिकरणवूपसमनेन,a·dhi·ka·ra·ṇa·vū·pa·sa·ma·ne·na येनye·na भगवाbha·ga·vā तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā भगवतोbha·ga·va·to एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ आरोचेसुंā·ro·ce·suṃ …पे…pe

Atha kho te bhikkhū asantuṭṭhā sāvatthiyā saṅghassa adhikaraṇavūpasamanena, asantuṭṭhā sambahulānaṁ therānaṁ adhikaraṇavūpasamanena, asantuṭṭhā tiṇṇaṁ therānaṁ adhikaraṇavūpasamanena, asantuṭṭhā dvinnaṁ therānaṁ adhikaraṇavūpasamanena, asantuṭṭhā ekassa therassa adhikaraṇavūpasamanena, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavato etamatthaṁ ārocesuṁ …pe…

Since those monks were dissatisfied with how all of these had resolved that legal issue, they went to the Buddha and told him what had happened. … The Buddha said:
1142

“निहतमेतं,ni·ha·ta·me·taṃ भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ सन्तंsan·taṃ वूपसन्तंvū·pa·san·taṃ सुवूपसन्तं।su·vū·pa·san·taṃ

“Nihatametaṁ, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ santaṁ vūpasantaṁ suvūpasantaṁ.

“Monks, this legal issue has been settled, laid to rest, and properly disposed of.
1143

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तेसंte·saṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ सञ्ञत्तियाsañ·ñat·ti·yā तयोta·yo सलाकग्गाहे—sa·lā·kag·gā·he

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tesaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ saññattiyā tayo salākaggāhe—

To persuade those monks, I allow three kinds of voting:
1144

गूळ्हकं,gū·ḷha·kaṃ सकण्णजप्पकं,sa·kaṇ·ṇa·jap·pa·kaṃ विवटकं।vi·va·ṭa·kaṃ

gūḷhakaṁ, sakaṇṇajappakaṁ, vivaṭakaṁ.

a secret ballot, whispering in the ear, and an open vote.
1145

कथञ्च,ka·thañ·ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve गूळ्हकोgū·ḷha·ko सलाकग्गाहोsa·lā·kag·gā·ho होति?ho·ti

Kathañca, bhikkhave, gūḷhako salākaggāho hoti?

What’s a secret ballot?
1146

तेनte·na सलाकग्गाहापकेनsa·lā·kag·gā·hā·pa·ke·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सलाकायोsa·lā·kā·yo वण्णावण्णायोvaṇ·ṇā·vaṇ·ṇā·yo कत्वाkat·vā एकमेकोe·ka·me·ko भिक्खुbhik·khu उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एवमस्सe·va·mas·sa वचनीयो—va·ca·nī·yo

Tena salākaggāhāpakena bhikkhunā salākāyo vaṇṇāvaṇṇāyo katvā ekameko bhikkhu upasaṅkamitvā evamassa vacanīyo—

The manager of the vote should make ballots of two different colors, go up to the monks one by one and say,
1147

‘अयंa·yaṃ एवंवादिस्सe·vaṃ·vā·dis·sa सलाका,sa·lā·kā अयंa·yaṃ एवंवादिस्सe·vaṃ·vā·dis·sa सलाका।sa·lā·kā

‘ayaṁ evaṁvādissa salākā, ayaṁ evaṁvādissa salākā.

‘This is the ballot for those who hold this view, and this is the ballot for those who hold that view.
1148

यंyaṃ इच्छसिic·cha·si तंtaṃ गण्हाही’ति।gaṇ·hā·hī

Yaṁ icchasi taṁ gaṇhāhī’ti.

Take the one you like.’
1149

गहितेga·hi·te वत्तब्बो—vat·tab·bo

Gahite vattabbo—

When someone has taken a ballot, they should be told,
1150

‘माmā चca कस्सचिkas·sa·ci दस्सेही’ति।das·se·hī

‘mā ca kassaci dassehī’ti.

‘Don’t show it to anyone.’
1151

सचेsa·ce जानाति—jā·nā·ti

Sace jānāti—

If the manager knows that
1152

अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī बहुतराति,ba·hu·ta·rā·ti दुग्गहोति,dug·ga·ho·ti पच्चुक्कड्ढितब्बं।pac·cuk·kaḍ·ḍhi·tab·baṃ

adhammavādī bahutarāti, duggahoti, paccukkaḍḍhitabbaṁ.

those who speak contrary to the Teaching are in the majority, then the vote is invalid and to be postponed.
1153

सचेsa·ce जानाति—jā·nā·ti

Sace jānāti—

If he knows that
1154

धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī बहुतराति,ba·hu·ta·rā·ti सुग्गहोति,sug·ga·ho·ti सावेतब्बं।sā·ve·tab·baṃ

dhammavādī bahutarāti, suggahoti, sāvetabbaṁ.

those who speak in accordance with the Teaching are in the majority, then the vote is valid and to be announced.
1155

एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve गूळ्हकोgū·ḷha·ko सलाकग्गाहोsa·lā·kag·gā·ho होति।ho·ti

Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, gūḷhako salākaggāho hoti.

(Pāli only)
1156

कथञ्च,ka·thañ·ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सकण्णजप्पकोsa·kaṇ·ṇa·jap·pa·ko सलाकग्गाहोsa·lā·kag·gā·ho होति?ho·ti

Kathañca, bhikkhave, sakaṇṇajappako salākaggāho hoti?

What’s voting by whispering in the ear?
1157

तेनte·na सलाकग्गाहापकेनsa·lā·kag·gā·hā·pa·ke·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā एकमेकस्सe·ka·me·kas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no उपकण्णकेu·pa·kaṇ·ṇa·ke आरोचेतब्बं—ā·ro·ce·tab·baṃ

Tena salākaggāhāpakena bhikkhunā ekamekassa bhikkhuno upakaṇṇake ārocetabbaṁ—

The manager of the vote should inform the monks one by one by whispering in the ear,
1158

‘अयंa·yaṃ एवंवादिस्सe·vaṃ·vā·dis·sa सलाका,sa·lā·kā अयंa·yaṃ एवंवादिस्सe·vaṃ·vā·dis·sa सलाका।sa·lā·kā

‘ayaṁ evaṁvādissa salākā, ayaṁ evaṁvādissa salākā.

‘This is the ballot for those who hold this view, and this is the ballot for those who hold that view.
1159

यंyaṃ इच्छसिic·cha·si तंtaṃ गण्हाही’ति।gaṇ·hā·hī

Yaṁ icchasi taṁ gaṇhāhī’ti.

Take the one you like.’
1160

गहितेga·hi·te वत्तब्बो—vat·tab·bo

Gahite vattabbo—

When someone has taken a ballot, they should be told,
1161

‘माmā चca कस्सचिkas·sa·ci आरोचेही’ति।ā·ro·ce·hī

‘mā ca kassaci ārocehī’ti.

‘Don’t tell anyone.’
1162

सचेsa·ce जानाति—jā·nā·ti

Sace jānāti—

If the manager knows that
1163

अधम्मवादीa·dham·ma·vā·dī बहुतराति,ba·hu·ta·rā·ti दुग्गहोति,dug·ga·ho·ti पच्चुक्कड्ढितब्बं।pac·cuk·kaḍ·ḍhi·tab·baṃ

adhammavādī bahutarāti, duggahoti, paccukkaḍḍhitabbaṁ.

those who speak contrary to the Teaching are in the majority, then the vote is invalid and to be postponed.
1164

सचेsa·ce जानाति—jā·nā·ti

Sace jānāti—

If he knows that
1165

धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī बहुतराति,ba·hu·ta·rā·ti सुग्गहोति,sug·ga·ho·ti सावेतब्बं।sā·ve·tab·baṃ

dhammavādī bahutarāti, suggahoti, sāvetabbaṁ.

those who speak in accordance with the Teaching are in the majority, then the vote is valid and to be announced.
1166

एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve सकण्णजप्पकोsa·kaṇ·ṇa·jap·pa·ko सलाकग्गाहोsa·lā·kag·gā·ho होति।ho·ti

Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, sakaṇṇajappako salākaggāho hoti.

(Pāli only)
1167

कथञ्च,ka·thañ·ca भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve विवटकोvi·va·ṭa·ko सलाकग्गाहोsa·lā·kag·gā·ho होति?ho·ti

Kathañca, bhikkhave, vivaṭako salākaggāho hoti?

What’s an open vote?
1168

सचेsa·ce जानाति—jā·nā·ti

Sace jānāti—

If he knows that
1169

धम्मवादीdham·ma·vā·dī बहुतराति,ba·hu·ta·rā·ti विस्सट्ठेनेवvis·saṭ·ṭhe·ne·va विवटेनvi·va·ṭe·na गाहेतब्बो।gā·he·tab·bo

dhammavādī bahutarāti, vissaṭṭheneva vivaṭena gāhetabbo.

those who speak in accordance with the Teaching are in the majority, the ballots should be distributed openly.”
1170

एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve विवटकोvi·va·ṭa·ko सलाकग्गाहोsa·lā·kag·gā·ho होति।ho·ti

Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, vivaṭako salākaggāho hoti.

(Pāli only)
1171

इमेi·me खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve तयोta·yo सलाकग्गाहा”ति।sa·lā·kag·gā·hā

Ime kho, bhikkhave, tayo salākaggāhā”ti.

(Pāli only)
1172

9।5। सतिविनयsa·ti·vi·na·ya

9.5. Sativinaya

Resolution through recollection
1173

“अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कतिहिka·ti·hi समथेहिsa·ma·the·hi सम्मति?sam·ma·ti

“Anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ katihi samathehi sammati?

(Pāli only)
1174

अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ चतूहिca·tū·hi समथेहिsa·ma·the·hi सम्मति—sam·ma·ti

Anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ catūhi samathehi sammati—

“There are four principles for settling a legal issue arising from an accusation:
1175

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca सतिविनयेनsa·ti·vi·na·ye·na च,ca अमूळ्हविनयेनa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·ye·na च,ca तस्सपापियसिकायtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·ya च।ca

sammukhāvinayena ca, sativinayena ca, amūḷhavinayena ca, tassapāpiyasikāya ca.

resolution face-to-face, resolution through recollection, resolution because of past insanity, and by further penalty.
1176

सियाsi·yā अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ द्वेdve समथेsa·ma·the अनागम्म—a·nā·gam·ma

Siyā anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ dve samathe anāgamma—

Is it possible that a legal issue arising from an accusation should be settled
1177

अमूळ्हविनयञ्च,a·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yañ·ca तस्सपापियसिकञ्च;tas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kañ·ca

amūḷhavinayañca, tassapāpiyasikañca;

not by resolution because of past insanity or by further penalty,
1178

द्वीहिdvī·hi समथेहिsa·ma·the·hi सम्मेय्य—sam·mey·ya

dvīhi samathehi sammeyya—

but
1179

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca सतिविनयेनsa·ti·vi·na·ye·na चाति?cā·ti

sammukhāvinayena ca, sativinayena cāti?

by resolution face-to-face and by resolution through recollection?
1180

सियातिस्सsi·yā·tis·sa वचनीयं।va·ca·nī·yaṃ

Siyātissa vacanīyaṁ.

It is.
1181

यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय?vi·ya

Yathā kathaṁ viya?

How?
1182

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूbhik·khū भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अमूलिकायa·mū·li·kā·ya सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā अनुद्धंसेन्ति।a·nud·dhaṃ·sen·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhū bhikkhuṁ amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṁsenti.

It may be that monks are groundlessly charging a monk with failure in morality.
1183

तस्सtas·sa खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तस्सsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·tas·sa सतिविनयोsa·ti·vi·na·yo दातब्बो।dā·tab·bo

Tassa kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno sativepullappattassa sativinayo dātabbo.

If that monk has great clarity of memory, he’s to be granted resolution through recollection.
1184

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दातब्बो—dā·tab·bo

Evañca pana, bhikkhave, dātabbo—

And it should be granted like this.
1185

तेन,te·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एकंसंe·kaṃ·saṃ उत्तरासङ्गंut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā …पे…pe

Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā saṅghaṁ upasaṅkamitvā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā …pe…

That monk should approach the Sangha, arrange his upper robe over one shoulder, pay respect at the feet of the senior monks, squat on his heels, raise his joined palms,
1186

एवमस्सe·va·mas·sa वचनीयो—va·ca·nī·yo

evamassa vacanīyo—

and say:
1187

‘मं,maṃ भन्ते,bhan·te भिक्खूbhik·khū अमूलिकायa·mū·li·kā·ya सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā अनुद्धंसेन्ति।a·nud·dhaṃ·sen·ti

‘maṁ, bhante, bhikkhū amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṁsenti.

‘Venerables, monks are groundlessly charging me with failure in morality.
1188

सोहं,so·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तोsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·to सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ याचामी’ति।yā·cā·mī

Sohaṁ, bhante, sativepullappatto saṅghaṁ sativinayaṁ yācāmī’ti.

Because of my great clarity of memory, I ask the Sangha for resolution through recollection.’
1189

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi याचितब्बो।yā·ci·tab·bo

Dutiyampi yācitabbo.

And he should ask a second
1190

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi याचितब्बो।yā·ci·tab·bo

Tatiyampi yācitabbo.

and a third time.
1191

ब्यत्तेनंbyat·te·naṃ भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Byattenaṁ bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:
1192

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1193

भिक्खूbhik·khū इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अमूलिकायa·mū·li·kā·ya सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā अनुद्धंसेन्ति।a·nud·dhaṃ·sen·ti

Bhikkhū itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṁsenti.

Monks are groundlessly charging monk so-and-so with failure in morality.
1194

सोso सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तोsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·to सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ याचति।yā·ca·ti

So sativepullappatto saṅghaṁ sativinayaṁ yācati.

Because of his great clarity of memory, he is asking the Sangha for resolution through recollection.
1195

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तस्सsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·tas·sa सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ ददेय्य।da·dey·ya

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho itthannāmassa bhikkhuno sativepullappattassa sativinayaṁ dadeyya.

If the Sangha is ready, then, because of monk so-and-so’s great clarity of memory, the Sangha should grant him resolution through recollection.
1196

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
1197

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1198

भिक्खूbhik·khū इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ अमूलिकायa·mū·li·kā·ya सीलविपत्तियाsī·la·vi·pat·ti·yā अनुद्धंसेन्ति।a·nud·dhaṃ·sen·ti

Bhikkhū itthannāmaṁ bhikkhuṁ amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṁsenti.

Monks are groundlessly charging monk so-and-so with failure in morality.
1199

सोso सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तोsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·to सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ याचति।yā·ca·ti

So sativepullappatto saṅghaṁ sativinayaṁ yācati.

Because of his great clarity of memory, he is asking the Sangha for resolution through recollection.
1200

सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तस्सsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·tas·sa सतिविनयंsa·ti·vi·na·yaṃ देति।de·ti

Saṅgho itthannāmassa bhikkhuno sativepullappattassa sativinayaṁ deti.

Because of his great clarity of memory, the Sangha grants monk so-and-so resolution through recollection.
1201

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तस्सsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·tas·sa सतिविनयस्सsa·ti·vi·na·yas·sa दानं,dā·naṃ सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati itthannāmassa bhikkhuno sativepullappattassa sativinayassa dānaṁ, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves, because of monk so-and-so’s great clarity of memory, of granting him resolution through recollection should remain silent.
1202

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
1203

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi …पे…pe

Dutiyampi etamatthaṁ vadāmi …pe…

For the second time, I speak on this matter. …
1204

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi …पे…।pe

tatiyampi etamatthaṁ vadāmi …pe….

For the third time, I speak on this matter. …
1205

दिन्नोdin·no सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no सतिवेपुल्लप्पत्तस्सsa·ti·ve·pul·lap·pat·tas·sa सतिविनयो।sa·ti·vi·na·yo

Dinno saṅghena itthannāmassa bhikkhuno sativepullappattassa sativinayo.

Because of his great clarity of memory, the Sangha has granted monk so-and-so resolution through recollection.
1206

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’
1207

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

This is called the resolution of a legal issue.
1208

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
1209

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na चca सतिविनयेनsa·ti·vi·na·ye·na च।ca

Sammukhāvinayena ca sativinayena ca.

It’s been resolved by resolution face-to-face and by resolution through recollection.
1210

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
1211

सङ्घसम्मुखता,saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता,vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā पुग्गलसम्मुखताpug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā …पे…pe

Saṅghasammukhatā, dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā …pe…

Face-to-face with the Sangha, the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Sangha: the monks who should be present have arrived, consent has been brought for those who are eligible to give their consent, and no one present objects to the decision. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Teaching and the Monastic Law: the Teaching, the Monastic Law, the Teacher’s instruction—that by which that legal issue is resolved.
1212

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता?pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

kā ca tattha puggalasammukhatā?

This is the meaning of face-to-face with the persons concerned:
1213

योyo चca अनुवदति,a·nu·va·da·ti यञ्चyañ·ca अनुवदति,a·nu·va·da·ti उभोu·bho सम्मुखीभूताsam·mu·khī·bhū·tā होन्ति—hon·ti

Yo ca anuvadati, yañca anuvadati, ubho sammukhībhūtā honti—

both those who are accusing and those who have been accused are present.
1214

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता।pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha puggalasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
1215

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सतिविनयस्मिं?sa·ti·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sativinayasmiṁ?

This is the meaning of resolution through recollection:
1216

याyā सतिविनयस्सsa·ti·vi·na·yas·sa कम्मस्सkam·mas·sa किरियाki·ri·yā करणंka·ra·ṇaṃ उपगमनंu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अज्झुपगमनंaj·jhu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अधिवासनाa·dhi·vā·sa·nā अप्पटिक्कोसना—ap·pa·ṭik·ko·sa·nā

Yā sativinayassa kammassa kiriyā karaṇaṁ upagamanaṁ ajjhupagamanaṁ adhivāsanā appaṭikkosanā—

the doing of, the performing of, the participation in, the consent to, the agreement to, the non-objection to that legal procedure of resolution through recollection.
1217

इदंi·daṃ तत्थtat·tha सतिविनयस्मिं।sa·ti·vi·na·yas·miṃ

idaṁ tattha sativinayasmiṁ.

(Pāli only)
1218

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कारकोkā·ra·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं;pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

Evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ kārako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ;

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if any of the participants reopen it, they commit an offense entailing confession for the reopening.
1219

छन्ददायकोchan·da·dā·ya·ko खीयति,khī·ya·ti खीयनकंkhī·ya·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं।pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

chandadāyako khīyati, khīyanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ.

If anyone who gave their consent criticizes the resolution, they commit an offense entailing confession.”
1220

9।6। अमूळ्हविनयa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·ya

9.6. Amūḷhavinaya

Resolution because of past insanity
1221

सियाsi·yā अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ द्वेdve समथेsa·ma·the अनागम्म—a·nā·gam·ma

Siyā anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ dve samathe anāgamma—

“Is it possible that a legal issue arising from an accusation should be settled
1222

सतिविनयञ्च,sa·ti·vi·na·yañ·ca तस्सपापियसिकञ्च;tas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kañ·ca

sativinayañca, tassapāpiyasikañca;

not by resolution through recollection or by further penalty,
1223

द्वीहिdvī·hi समथेहिsa·ma·the·hi सम्मेय्य—sam·mey·ya

dvīhi samathehi sammeyya—

but
1224

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca अमूळ्हविनयेनa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·ye·na चाति?cā·ti

sammukhāvinayena ca, amūḷhavinayena cāti?

by resolution face-to-face and by resolution because of past insanity?
1225

सियातिस्सsi·yā·tis·sa वचनीयं।va·ca·nī·yaṃ

Siyātissa vacanīyaṁ.

It is.
1226

यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय?vi·ya

Yathā kathaṁ viya?

How?
1227

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko होतिho·ti चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ummattako hoti cittavipariyāsakato.

It may be that a monk is insane and suffering from psychosis.
1228

तेनte·na उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ होतिho·ti भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ hoti bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, he does and says many things unworthy of a monastic.
1229

तंtaṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na अज्झाचिण्णेनaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇe·na आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā चोदेन्ति—co·den·ti

Taṁ bhikkhū ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena ajjhāciṇṇena āpattiyā codenti—

The monks accuse him of an offense, saying,
1230

‘सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता’ति।ā·paj·ji·tā

‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’ti.

‘Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?’
1231

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He replies,
1232

‘अहंa·haṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिंa·ho·siṃ चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

‘ahaṁ kho, āvuso, ummattako ahosiṁ cittavipariyāsakato.

‘I was insane and suffering from psychosis.
1233

तेनte·na मेme उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena me ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, I did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
1234

नाहंnā·haṃ तंtaṃ सरामि।sa·rā·mi

Nāhaṁ taṁ sarāmi.

I don’t remember it.
1235

मूळ्हेनmū·ḷhe·na मेme एतंe·taṃ कतन्’ति।ka·tan

Mūḷhena me etaṁ katan’ti.

I did it because I was insane.’
1236

एवम्पिe·vam·pi नंnaṃ वुच्चमानाvuc·ca·mā·nā चोदेन्तेव—co·den·te·va

Evampi naṁ vuccamānā codenteva—

But they keep on accusing him
1237

‘सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता’ति।ā·paj·ji·tā

‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’ti.

in the same way.
1238

तस्सtas·sa खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no अमूळ्हस्सa·mū·ḷhas·sa अमूळ्हविनयोa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yo दातब्बो।dā·tab·bo

Tassa kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno amūḷhassa amūḷhavinayo dātabbo.

If he’s now sane, that monk should be granted resolution because of past insanity.
1239

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve दातब्बो—dā·tab·bo

Evañca pana, bhikkhave, dātabbo—

And it should be granted like this.
1240

तेन,te·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एकंसंe·kaṃ·saṃ उत्तरासङ्गंut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā …पे…pe

Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā saṅghaṁ upasaṅkamitvā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā …pe…

That monk should approach the Sangha, arrange his upper robe over one shoulder, pay respect at the feet of the senior monks, squat on his heels, raise his joined palms,
1241

एवमस्सe·va·mas·sa वचनीयो—va·ca·nī·yo

evamassa vacanīyo—

and say:
1242

‘अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिंa·ho·siṃ चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

‘ahaṁ, bhante, ummattako ahosiṁ cittavipariyāsakato.

‘Venerables, I’ve been insane and suffering from psychosis.
1243

तेनte·na मेme उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena me ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, I did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
1244

मंmaṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na अज्झाचिण्णेनaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇe·na आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā चोदेन्ति—co·den·ti

Maṁ bhikkhū ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena ajjhāciṇṇena āpattiyā codenti—

The monks accused me of an offense, saying,
1245

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति।ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti.

“Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?”
1246

त्याहंtyā·haṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदामि—va·dā·mi

Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi—

I replied,
1247

“अहंa·haṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिंa·ho·siṃ चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

“ahaṁ kho, āvuso, ummattako ahosiṁ cittavipariyāsakato.

“I was insane and suffering from psychosis.
1248

तेनte·na मेme उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena me ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, I did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
1249

नाहंnā·haṃ तंtaṃ सरामि।sa·rā·mi

Nāhaṁ taṁ sarāmi.

I don’t remember it.
1250

मूळ्हेनmū·ḷhe·na मेme एतंe·taṃ कतन्”ति।ka·tan

Mūḷhena me etaṁ katan”ti.

I did it because I was insane.”
1251

एवम्पिe·vam·pi मंmaṃ वुच्चमानाvuc·ca·mā·nā चोदेन्तेव—co·den·te·va

Evampi maṁ vuccamānā codenteva—

But they kept on accusing me
1252

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति।ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti.

in the same way.
1253

“सोहं,so·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te अमूळ्होa·mū·ḷho सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ याचामी”’ति।yā·cā·mī

“Sohaṁ, bhante, amūḷho saṅghaṁ amūḷhavinayaṁ yācāmī”’ti.

Because I’m now sane, I ask the Sangha for resolution because of past insanity.’
1254

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi याचितब्बो।yā·ci·tab·bo

Dutiyampi yācitabbo.

And he should ask a second
1255

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi याचितब्बो।yā·ci·tab·bo

Tatiyampi yācitabbo.

and a third time.
1256

ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:
1257

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1258

अयंa·yaṃ इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिa·ho·si चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

Ayaṁ itthannāmo bhikkhu ummattako ahosi cittavipariyāsakato.

The monk so-and-so has been insane and suffering from psychosis.
1259

तेनte·na उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that insanity and psychosis, he did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
1260

तंtaṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na अज्झाचिण्णेनaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇe·na आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā चोदेन्ति—co·den·ti

Taṁ bhikkhū ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena ajjhāciṇṇena āpattiyā codenti—

Because of that insanity and psychosis, the monks accused him of an offense, saying,
1261

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति।ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti.

“Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?”
1262

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He replied,
1263

“अहंa·haṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिंa·ho·siṃ चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

“ahaṁ kho, āvuso, ummattako ahosiṁ cittavipariyāsakato.

“I was insane and suffering from psychosis.
1264

तेनte·na मेme उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena me ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that insanity and psychosis, I did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
1265

नाहंnā·haṃ तंtaṃ सरामि।sa·rā·mi

Nāhaṁ taṁ sarāmi.

I don’t remember it.
1266

मूळ्हेनmū·ḷhe·na मेme एतंe·taṃ कतन्”ति।ka·tan

Mūḷhena me etaṁ katan”ti.

I did it because I was insane.”
1267

एवम्पिe·vam·pi नंnaṃ वुच्चमानाvuc·ca·mā·nā चोदेन्तेव—co·den·te·va

Evampi naṁ vuccamānā codenteva—

But even though he said this, they kept on accusing him,
1268

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति।ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti.

“Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?”
1269

सोso अमूळ्होa·mū·ḷho सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ याचति।yā·ca·ti

So amūḷho saṅghaṁ amūḷhavinayaṁ yācati.

Because he is now sane, he is asking the Sangha for resolution because of past insanity.
1270

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no अमूळ्हस्सa·mū·ḷhas·sa अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ ददेय्य।da·dey·ya

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho itthannāmassa bhikkhuno amūḷhassa amūḷhavinayaṁ dadeyya.

If the Sangha is ready, then, because monk so-and-so is now sane, the Sangha should grant him resolution because of past insanity.
1271

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
1272

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1273

अयंa·yaṃ इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिa·ho·si चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

Ayaṁ itthannāmo bhikkhu ummattako ahosi cittavipariyāsakato.

The monk so-and-so has been insane and suffering from psychosis.
1274

तेनte·na उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, he did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
1275

तंtaṃ भिक्खूbhik·khū उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na अज्झाचिण्णेनaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇe·na आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā चोदेन्ति—co·den·ti

Taṁ bhikkhū ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena ajjhāciṇṇena āpattiyā codenti—

The monks accused him of an offense, saying,
1276

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति।ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti.

“Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such an offense?”
1277

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He replied,
1278

“अहंa·haṃ खो,kho आवुसो,ā·vu·so उम्मत्तकोum·mat·ta·ko अहोसिंa·ho·siṃ चित्तविपरियासकतो।cit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·to

“ahaṁ kho, āvuso, ummattako ahosiṁ cittavipariyāsakato.

“I was insane and suffering from psychosis.
1279

तेनte·na मेme उम्मत्तकेनum·mat·ta·ke·na चित्तविपरियासकतेनcit·ta·vi·pa·ri·yā·sa·ka·te·na बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Tena me ummattakena cittavipariyāsakatena bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

Because of that, I did and said many things unworthy of a monastic.
1280

नाहंnā·haṃ तंtaṃ सरामि।sa·rā·mi

Nāhaṁ taṁ sarāmi.

I don’t remember it.
1281

मूळ्हेनmū·ḷhe·na मेme एतंe·taṃ कतन्”ति।ka·tan

Mūḷhena me etaṁ katan”ti.

I did it because I was insane.”
1282

एवम्पिe·vam·pi नंnaṃ वुच्चमानाvuc·ca·mā·nā चोदेन्तेव—co·den·te·va

Evampi naṁ vuccamānā codenteva—

But they kept on accusing him
1283

“सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता”ति।ā·paj·ji·tā

“saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā”ti.

in the same way.
1284

सोso अमूळ्होa·mū·ḷho सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ याचति।yā·ca·ti

So amūḷho saṅghaṁ amūḷhavinayaṁ yācati.

Because he is now sane, he is asking the Sangha for resolution because of past insanity.
1285

सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no अमूळ्हस्सa·mū·ḷhas·sa अमूळ्हविनयंa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yaṃ देति।de·ti

Saṅgho itthannāmassa bhikkhuno amūḷhassa amūḷhavinayaṁ deti.

The Sangha grants monk so-and-so resolution because of past insanity.
1286

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no अमूळ्हस्सa·mū·ḷhas·sa अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa दानं,dā·naṃ सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati itthannāmassa bhikkhuno amūḷhassa amūḷhavinayassa dānaṁ, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves of granting monk so-and-so resolution because of past insanity should remain silent.
1287

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
1288

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi …पे…pe

Dutiyampi etamatthaṁ vadāmi …pe…

For the second time, I speak on this matter. …
1289

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi …पे…।pe

tatiyampi etamatthaṁ vadāmi …pe….

For the third time, I speak on this matter. …
1290

दिन्नोdin·no सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no अमूळ्हस्सa·mū·ḷhas·sa अमूळ्हविनयो।a·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yo

Dinno saṅghena itthannāmassa bhikkhuno amūḷhassa amūḷhavinayo.

Because he is now sane, the Sangha has granted monk so-and-so resolution because of past insanity.
1291

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’
1292

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

This is called the resolution of a legal issue.
1293

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
1294

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca अमूळ्हविनयेनa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·ye·na च।ca

Sammukhāvinayena ca, amūḷhavinayena ca.

It’s been resolved by resolution face-to-face and by resolution because of past insanity.
1295

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
1296

सङ्घसम्मुखता,saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता,vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā पुग्गलसम्मुखताpug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā …पे…pe

Saṅghasammukhatā, dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā …pe…

Face-to-face with the Sangha, the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Sangha: the monks who should be present have arrived, consent has been brought for those who are eligible to give their consent, and no one present objects to the decision. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Teaching and the Monastic Law: the Teaching, the Monastic Law, the Teacher’s instruction—that by which that legal issue is resolved. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the persons concerned: both those who are accusing and those who have been accused are present.
1297

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha अमूळ्हविनयस्मिं?a·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·miṃ

kiñca tattha amūḷhavinayasmiṁ?

This is the meaning of resolution because of past insanity:
1298

याyā अमूळ्हविनयस्सa·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·sa कम्मस्सkam·mas·sa किरियाki·ri·yā करणंka·ra·ṇaṃ उपगमनंu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अज्झुपगमनंaj·jhu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अधिवासनाa·dhi·vā·sa·nā अप्पटिक्कोसना—ap·pa·ṭik·ko·sa·nā

Yā amūḷhavinayassa kammassa kiriyā karaṇaṁ upagamanaṁ ajjhupagamanaṁ adhivāsanā appaṭikkosanā—

the doing of, the performing of, the participation in, the consent to, the agreement to, the non-objection to that legal procedure of resolution because of past insanity.
1299

इदंi·daṃ तत्थtat·tha अमूळ्हविनयस्मिं।a·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yas·miṃ

idaṁ tattha amūḷhavinayasmiṁ.

(Pāli only)
1300

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कारकोkā·ra·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं;pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

Evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ kārako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ;

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if any of the participants reopen it, they commit an offense entailing confession for the reopening.
1301

छन्ददायकोchan·da·dā·ya·ko खीयति,khī·ya·ti खीयनकंkhī·ya·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं।pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

chandadāyako khīyati, khīyanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ.

If anyone who gave their consent criticizes the resolution, they commit an offense entailing confession.”
1302

9।7। तस्सपापियसिकाविनयtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·vi·na·ya

9.7. Tassapāpiyasikāvinaya

Resolution by further penalty
1303

सियाsi·yā अनुवादाधिकरणंa·nu·vā·dā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ द्वेdve समथेsa·ma·the अनागम्म—a·nā·gam·ma

Siyā anuvādādhikaraṇaṁ dve samathe anāgamma—

“Is it possible that a legal issue arising from an accusation should be settled
1304

सतिविनयञ्च,sa·ti·vi·na·yañ·ca अमूळ्हविनयञ्च;a·mū·ḷha·vi·na·yañ·ca

sativinayañca, amūḷhavinayañca;

not by resolution through recollection or by resolution because of past insanity,
1305

द्वीहिdvī·hi समथेहिsa·ma·the·hi सम्मेय्य—sam·mey·ya

dvīhi samathehi sammeyya—

but
1306

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca तस्सपापियसिकायtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·ya चाति?cā·ti

sammukhāvinayena ca, tassapāpiyasikāya cāti?

by resolution face-to-face and by further penalty?
1307

सियातिस्सsi·yā·tis·sa वचनीयं।va·ca·nī·yaṃ

Siyātissa vacanīyaṁ.

It is.
1308

यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय?vi·ya

Yathā kathaṁ viya?

How?
1309

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe गरुकायga·ru·kā·ya आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā चोदेति—co·de·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhikkhuṁ saṅghamajjhe garukāya āpattiyā codeti—

It may be that a monk accuses a monk of an offense in the midst of the Sangha:
1310

‘सरतायस्माsa·ra·tā·yas·mā एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता,ā·paj·ji·tā पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ वाvā पाराजिकसामन्तंpā·rā·ji·ka·sā·man·taṃ वा’ति।vā

‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā, pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti.

‘Venerable, do you remember committing such-and-such a heavy offense entailing expulsion or bordering on expulsion?’
1311

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He replies,
1312

‘नna खोkho अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so सरामिsa·rā·mi एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता,ā·paj·ji·tā पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ वाvā पाराजिकसामन्तंpā·rā·ji·ka·sā·man·taṃ वा’ति।vā

‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, sarāmi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā, pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti.

‘I don’t.’
1313

तमेनंta·me·naṃ सोso निब्बेठेन्तंnib·be·ṭhen·taṃ अतिवेठेति—a·ti·ve·ṭhe·ti

Tamenaṁ so nibbeṭhentaṁ ativeṭheti—

As he tries to free himself, the accusing monk presses him further:
1314

‘इङ्घायस्माiṅ·ghā·yas·mā साधुकमेवsā·dhu·ka·me·va जानाहि,jā·nā·hi यदिya·di सरसिsa·ra·si एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता,ā·paj·ji·tā पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ वाvā पाराजिकसामन्तंpā·rā·ji·ka·sā·man·taṃ वा’ति।vā

‘iṅghāyasmā sādhukameva jānāhi, yadi sarasi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā, pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti.

‘Come on, venerable, try again to remember whether you’ve committed such-and-such a heavy offense.’
1315

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He replies,
1316

‘नna खोkho अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so सरामिsa·rā·mi एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता,ā·paj·ji·tā पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ वाvā पाराजिकसामन्तंpā·rā·ji·ka·sā·man·taṃ वा।vā

‘na kho ahaṁ, āvuso, sarāmi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā, pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā.

‘I don’t remember committing such an offense,
1317

सरामिsa·rā·mi चca खोkho अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ अप्पमत्तिकंap·pa·mat·ti·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता’ति।ā·paj·ji·tā

Sarāmi ca kho ahaṁ, āvuso, evarūpiṁ appamattikaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā’ti.

but I do remember committing such-and-such a minor offense.’
1318

तमेनंta·me·naṃ सोso निब्बेठेन्तंnib·be·ṭhen·taṃ अतिवेठेति—a·ti·ve·ṭhe·ti

Tamenaṁ so nibbeṭhentaṁ ativeṭheti—

As he tries to free himself, the accusing monk presses him further:
1319

‘इङ्घायस्माiṅ·ghā·yas·mā साधुकमेवsā·dhu·ka·me·va जानाहि,jā·nā·hi यदिya·di सरसिsa·ra·si एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता,ā·paj·ji·tā पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ वाvā पाराजिकसामन्तंpā·rā·ji·ka·sā·man·taṃ वा’ति।vā

‘iṅghāyasmā sādhukameva jānāhi, yadi sarasi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā, pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti.

‘Come on, venerable, try harder to remember whether you’ve committed such-and-such a heavy offense.’
1320

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

He replies,
1321

‘इमञ्हिi·mañ·hi नामाहं,nā·mā·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अप्पमत्तिकंap·pa·mat·ti·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जित्वाā·paj·jit·vā अपुट्ठोa·puṭ·ṭho पटिजानिस्सामि।pa·ṭi·jā·nis·sā·mi

‘imañhi nāmāhaṁ, āvuso, appamattikaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitvā apuṭṭho paṭijānissāmi.

‘I’ve admitted that I’ve committed this minor offense without being asked.
1322

किंkiṃ पनाहंpa·nā·haṃ एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जित्वा,ā·paj·jit·vā पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ वाvā पाराजिकसामन्तंpā·rā·ji·ka·sā·man·taṃ वा,vā पुट्ठोpuṭ·ṭho नna पटिजानिस्सामी’ति?pa·ṭi·jā·nis·sā·mī

Kiṁ panāhaṁ evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitvā, pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā, puṭṭho na paṭijānissāmī’ti?

So when asked about a heavy offense, why wouldn’t I admit it?’
1323

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेति—va·de·ti

So evaṁ vadeti—

The accusing monk says,
1324

‘इमञ्हिi·mañ·hi नामnā·ma त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so अप्पमत्तिकंap·pa·mat·ti·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जित्वाā·paj·jit·vā अपुट्ठोa·puṭ·ṭho नna पटिजानिस्ससि।pa·ṭi·jā·nis·sa·si

‘imañhi nāma tvaṁ, āvuso, appamattikaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitvā apuṭṭho na paṭijānissasi.

‘But you didn’t admit that you had committed this minor offense without being asked.
1325

किंkiṃ पनpa·na त्वंtvaṃ एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जित्वा,ā·paj·jit·vā पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ वाvā पाराजिकसामन्तंpā·rā·ji·ka·sā·man·taṃ वा,vā अपुट्ठोa·puṭ·ṭho पटिजानिस्ससि?pa·ṭi·jā·nis·sa·si

Kiṁ pana tvaṁ evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitvā, pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā, apuṭṭho paṭijānissasi?

So when asked about a heavy offense, why would you admit it?
1326

इङ्घायस्माiṅ·ghā·yas·mā साधुकमेवsā·dhu·ka·me·va जानाहि,jā·nā·hi यदिya·di सरसिsa·ra·si एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता,ā·paj·ji·tā पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ वाvā पाराजिकसामन्तंpā·rā·ji·ka·sā·man·taṃ वा’ति।vā

Iṅghāyasmā sādhukameva jānāhi, yadi sarasi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā, pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti.

Come on, venerable, try harder to remember whether you’ve committed such-and-such a heavy offense.’
1327

सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेसि—va·de·si

So evaṁ vadesi—

He then says,
1328

‘सरामिsa·rā·mi खोkho अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता,ā·paj·ji·tā पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ वाvā पाराजिकसामन्तंpā·rā·ji·ka·sā·man·taṃ वा।vā

‘sarāmi kho ahaṁ, āvuso, evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā, pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā.

‘I remember committing such-and-such a heavy offense entailing expulsion or bordering on expulsion.
1329

दवाda·vā मेme एतंe·taṃ वुत्तं,vut·taṃ रवाra·vā मेme एतंe·taṃ वुत्तं—vut·taṃ

Davā me etaṁ vuttaṁ, ravā me etaṁ vuttaṁ—

When I said that I didn’t remember, I spoke playfully, I spoke too fast.’
1330

नाहंnā·haṃ तंtaṃ सरामिsa·rā·mi एवरूपिंe·va·rū·piṃ गरुकंga·ru·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपज्जिता,ā·paj·ji·tā पाराजिकंpā·rā·ji·kaṃ वाvā पाराजिकसामन्तंpā·rā·ji·ka·sā·man·taṃ वा’ति।vā

nāhaṁ taṁ sarāmi evarūpiṁ garukaṁ āpattiṁ āpajjitā, pārājikaṁ vā pārājikasāmantaṁ vā’ti.

(Pāli only)
1331

तस्सtas·sa खो,kho भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ कातब्बं।kā·tab·baṃ

Tassa kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ kātabbaṁ.

They should do a legal procedure of further penalty against that monk.
1332

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve कातब्बं।kā·tab·baṃ

Evañca pana, bhikkhave, kātabbaṁ.

And it should be done like this.
1333

ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

A competent and capable monk should inform the Sangha:
1334

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1335

अयंa·yaṃ इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe गरुकायga·ru·kā·ya आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनुयुञ्जियमानोa·nu·yuñ·ji·ya·mā·no अवजानित्वाa·va·jā·nit·vā पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti पटिजानित्वाpa·ṭi·jā·nit·vā अवजानाति,a·va·jā·nā·ti अञ्ञेनाञ्ञंañ·ñe·nāñ·ñaṃ पटिचरति,pa·ṭi·ca·ra·ti सम्पजानमुसाsam·pa·jā·na·mu·sā भासति।bhā·sa·ti

Ayaṁ itthannāmo bhikkhu saṅghamajjhe garukāya āpattiyā anuyuñjiyamāno avajānitvā paṭijānāti, paṭijānitvā avajānāti, aññenāññaṁ paṭicarati, sampajānamusā bhāsati.

The monk so-and-so, while being examined in the midst of the Sangha about a heavy offense, asserts things after denying them, denies things after asserting them, evades the issue, and lies.
1336

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करेय्य।ka·rey·ya

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho itthannāmassa bhikkhuno tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ kareyya.

If the Sangha is ready, it should do a legal procedure of further penalty against monk so-and-so.
1337

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
1338

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1339

अयंa·yaṃ इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe गरुकायga·ru·kā·ya आपत्तियाā·pat·ti·yā अनुयुञ्जियमानोa·nu·yuñ·ji·ya·mā·no अवजानित्वाa·va·jā·nit·vā पटिजानाति,pa·ṭi·jā·nā·ti पटिजानित्वाpa·ṭi·jā·nit·vā अवजानाति,a·va·jā·nā·ti अञ्ञेनाञ्ञंañ·ñe·nāñ·ñaṃ पटिचरति,pa·ṭi·ca·ra·ti सम्पजानमुसाsam·pa·jā·na·mu·sā भासति।bhā·sa·ti

Ayaṁ itthannāmo bhikkhu saṅghamajjhe garukāya āpattiyā anuyuñjiyamāno avajānitvā paṭijānāti, paṭijānitvā avajānāti, aññenāññaṁ paṭicarati, sampajānamusā bhāsati.

The monk so-and-so, while being examined in the midst of the Sangha about a heavy offense, asserts things after denying them, denies things after asserting them, evades the issue, and lies.
1340

सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मंtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ करोति।ka·ro·ti

Saṅgho itthannāmassa bhikkhuno tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ karoti.

The Sangha does a legal procedure of further penalty against monk so-and-so.
1341

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मस्सtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·mas·sa करणं,ka·ra·ṇaṃ सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati itthannāmassa bhikkhuno tassapāpiyasikākammassa karaṇaṁ, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves of doing a legal procedure of further penalty against monk so-and-so should remain silent.
1342

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
1343

दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi …पे…pe

Dutiyampi etamatthaṁ vadāmi …pe…

For the second time, I speak on this matter. …
1344

ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi एतमत्थंe·ta·mat·thaṃ वदामिva·dā·mi …पे…।pe

tatiyampi etamatthaṁ vadāmi …pe….

For the third time, I speak on this matter. …
1345

कतंka·taṃ सङ्घेनsaṅ·ghe·na इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मं।tas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·maṃ

Kataṁ saṅghena itthannāmassa bhikkhuno tassapāpiyasikākammaṁ.

The Sangha has done a legal procedure of further penalty against monk so-and-so.
1346

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’
1347

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

This is called the resolution of a legal issue.
1348

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
1349

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca तस्सपापियसिकायtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·ya च।ca

Sammukhāvinayena ca, tassapāpiyasikāya ca.

It’s been resolved face-to-face and by further penalty.
1350

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
1351

सङ्घसम्मुखता,saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखताvi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā …पे…pe

Saṅghasammukhatā, dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā …pe…

Face-to-face with the Sangha, the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Sangha: the monks who should be present have arrived, consent has been brought for those who are eligible to give their consent, and no one present objects to the decision. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Teaching and the Monastic Law: the Teaching, the Monastic Law, the Teacher’s instruction—that by which that legal issue is resolved. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the persons concerned: both those who are accusing and those who have been accused are present.
1352

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha तस्सपापियसिकाय?tas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·ya

kā ca tattha tassapāpiyasikāya?

This is the meaning of by further penalty:
1353

याyā तस्सपापियसिकाकम्मस्सtas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·kam·mas·sa किरियाki·ri·yā करणंka·ra·ṇaṃ उपगमनंu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अज्झुपगमनंaj·jhu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अधिवासनाa·dhi·vā·sa·nā अप्पटिक्कोसना—ap·pa·ṭik·ko·sa·nā

Yā tassapāpiyasikākammassa kiriyā karaṇaṁ upagamanaṁ ajjhupagamanaṁ adhivāsanā appaṭikkosanā—

the doing of, the performing of, the participation in, the consent to, the agreement to, the non-objection to that legal procedure of further penalty.
1354

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha तस्सपापियसिकाय।tas·sa·pā·pi·ya·si·kā·ya

ayaṁ tattha tassapāpiyasikāya.

(Pāli only)
1355

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कारकोkā·ra·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं;pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

Evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ kārako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ;

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if any of the participants reopen it, they commit an offense entailing confession for the reopening.
1356

छन्ददायकोchan·da·dā·ya·ko खीयति,khī·ya·ti खीयनकंkhī·ya·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं।pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

chandadāyako khīyati, khīyanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ.

If anyone who gave their consent criticizes the resolution, they commit an offense entailing confession.”
1357

9।8। पटिञ्ञातकरणpa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇa

9.8. Paṭiññātakaraṇa

Acting according to what has been admitted
1358

आपत्ताधिकरणंā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कतिहिka·ti·hi समथेहिsa·ma·the·hi सम्मति?sam·ma·ti

Āpattādhikaraṇaṁ katihi samathehi sammati?

(Pāli only)
1359

आपत्ताधिकरणंā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ तीहिtī·hi समथेहिsa·ma·the·hi सम्मति—sam·ma·ti

Āpattādhikaraṇaṁ tīhi samathehi sammati—

“There are three principles for settling a legal issue arising from an offense:
1360

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca पटिञ्ञातकरणेनpa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇe·na च,ca तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na च।ca

sammukhāvinayena ca, paṭiññātakaraṇena ca, tiṇavatthārakena ca.

resolution face-to-face, acting according to what’s been admitted, and covering over as if with grass.
1361

सियाsi·yā आपत्ताधिकरणंā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ एकंe·kaṃ समथंsa·ma·thaṃ अनागम्म—a·nā·gam·ma

Siyā āpattādhikaraṇaṁ ekaṁ samathaṁ anāgamma—

Is it possible that a legal issue arising from an accusation should be settled
1362

तिणवत्थारकं,ti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·kaṃ द्वीहिdvī·hi समथेहिsa·ma·the·hi सम्मेय्य—sam·mey·ya

tiṇavatthārakaṁ, dvīhi samathehi sammeyya—

not by covering over as if with grass,
1363

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca पटिञ्ञातकरणेनpa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇe·na चाति?cā·ti

sammukhāvinayena ca, paṭiññātakaraṇena cāti?

but by resolution face-to-face and by acting according to what’s been admitted?
1364

सियातिस्सsi·yā·tis·sa वचनीयं।va·ca·nī·yaṃ

Siyātissa vacanīyaṁ.

It is.
1365

यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय?vi·ya

Yathā kathaṁ viya?

How?
1366

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुbhik·khu लहुकंla·hu·kaṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नोā·pan·no होति।ho·ti

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhu lahukaṁ āpattiṁ āpanno hoti.

It may be that a monk has committed a light offense.
1367

तेन,te·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā एकंe·kaṃ भिक्खुंbhik·khuṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एकंसंe·kaṃ·saṃ उत्तरासङ्गंut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā उक्कुटिकंuk·ku·ṭi·kaṃ निसीदित्वाni·sī·dit·vā अञ्जलिंañ·ja·liṃ पग्गहेत्वाpag·ga·het·vā एवमस्सe·va·mas·sa वचनीयो—va·ca·nī·yo

Tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā ekaṁ bhikkhuṁ upasaṅkamitvā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā ukkuṭikaṁ nisīditvā añjaliṁ paggahetvā evamassa vacanīyo—

That monk should approach a single monk, arrange his upper robe over one shoulder, squat on his heels, raise his joined palms, and say:
1368

‘अहं,a·haṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नो;ā·pan·no

‘ahaṁ, āvuso, itthannāmaṁ āpattiṁ āpanno;

‘I’ve committed such-and-such an offense.
1369

तंtaṃ पटिदेसेमी’ति।pa·ṭi·de·se·mī

taṁ paṭidesemī’ti.

I confess it.’
1370

तेनte·na वत्तब्बो—vat·tab·bo

Tena vattabbo—

—
1371

‘पस्ससी’ति?pas·sa·sī

‘passasī’ti?

‘Do you recognize it?’ —
1372

‘आमā·ma पस्सामी’ति।pas·sā·mī

‘Āma passāmī’ti.

‘Yes, I recognize it.’ —
1373

‘आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ संवरेय्यासी’ति।saṃ·va·rey·yā·sī

‘Āyatiṁ saṁvareyyāsī’ti.

‘You should restrain yourself in the future.’
1374

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

This is called the resolution of a legal issue.
1375

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
1376

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca पटिञ्ञातकरणेनpa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇe·na च।ca

Sammukhāvinayena ca, paṭiññātakaraṇena ca.

It’s been resolved face-to-face and by acting according to what’s been admitted.
1377

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
1378

धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता,vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā पुग्गलसम्मुखताpug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā …पे…pe

Dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā …pe…

Face-to-face with the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Teaching and the Monastic Law: the Teaching, the Monastic Law, the Teacher’s instruction—that by which that legal issue is resolved.
1379

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता?pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

kā ca tattha puggalasammukhatā?

This is the meaning of face-to-face with the persons concerned:
1380

योyo चca देसेति,de·se·ti यस्सyas·sa चca देसेति,de·se·ti उभोu·bho सम्मुखीभूताsam·mu·khī·bhū·tā होन्ति—hon·ti

Yo ca deseti, yassa ca deseti, ubho sammukhībhūtā honti—

both the one who confesses and the one he confesses to are present.
1381

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता।pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha puggalasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
1382

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha पटिञ्ञातकरणस्मिं?pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha paṭiññātakaraṇasmiṁ?

This is the meaning of acting according to what’s been admitted:
1383

याyā पटिञ्ञातकरणस्सpa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇas·sa कम्मस्सkam·mas·sa किरियाki·ri·yā करणंka·ra·ṇaṃ उपगमनंu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अज्झुपगमनंaj·jhu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अधिवासनाa·dhi·vā·sa·nā अप्पटिक्कोसना—ap·pa·ṭik·ko·sa·nā

Yā paṭiññātakaraṇassa kammassa kiriyā karaṇaṁ upagamanaṁ ajjhupagamanaṁ adhivāsanā appaṭikkosanā—

the doing of, the performing of, the participation in, the consent to, the agreement to, the non-objection to that legal procedure of acting according to what’s been admitted.
1384

इदंi·daṃ तत्थtat·tha पटिञ्ञातकरणस्मिं।pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇas·miṃ

idaṁ tattha paṭiññātakaraṇasmiṁ.

(Pāli only)
1385

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ पटिग्गाहकोpa·ṭig·gā·ha·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं।pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

Evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ paṭiggāhako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ.

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if the receiver of the confession reopens it, he commits an offense entailing confession for the reopening.
1386

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ लभेथ,la·bhe·tha इच्चेतंic·ce·taṃ कुसलं।ku·sa·laṃ

Evañcetaṁ labhetha, iccetaṁ kusalaṁ.

If this is what happens, all’s well.
1387

नोno चेce लभेथ,la·bhe·tha तेन,te·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सम्बहुलेsam·ba·hu·le भिक्खूbhik·khū उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एकंसंe·kaṃ·saṃ उत्तरासङ्गंut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā वुड्ढानंvuḍ·ḍhā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पादेpā·de वन्दित्वाvan·dit·vā उक्कुटिकंuk·ku·ṭi·kaṃ निसीदित्वाni·sī·dit·vā अञ्जलिंañ·ja·liṃ पग्गहेत्वाpag·ga·het·vā एवमस्सुe·va·mas·su वचनीया—va·ca·nī·yā

No ce labhetha, tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā sambahule bhikkhū upasaṅkamitvā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā vuḍḍhānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ pāde vanditvā ukkuṭikaṁ nisīditvā añjaliṁ paggahetvā evamassu vacanīyā—

If not, that monk should approach several monks, arrange his upper robe over one shoulder, pay respect at the feet of the senior monks, squat on his heels, raise his joined palms, and say,
1388

‘अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नो;ā·pan·no

‘ahaṁ, bhante, itthannāmaṁ āpattiṁ āpanno;

‘Venerables, I’ve committed such-and-such an offense.
1389

तंtaṃ पटिदेसेमी’ति।pa·ṭi·de·se·mī

taṁ paṭidesemī’ti.

I confess it.’
1390

ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na तेte भिक्खूbhik·khū ञापेतब्बा—ñā·pe·tab·bā

Byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena te bhikkhū ñāpetabbā—

A competent and capable monk should then inform those monks:
1391

‘सुणन्तुsu·ṇan·tu मेme आयस्मन्ता।ā·yas·man·tā

‘Suṇantu me āyasmantā.

‘Please, venerables, I ask you to listen.
1392

अयंa·yaṃ इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ सरति,sa·ra·ti विवरति,vi·va·ra·ti उत्तानिंut·tā·niṃ करोतिka·ro·ti देसेति।de·se·ti

Ayaṁ itthannāmo bhikkhu āpattiṁ sarati, vivarati, uttāniṁ karoti deseti.

The monk so-and-so remembers an offense—he reveals it, makes it plain, and confesses it.
1393

यदायस्मन्तानंya·dā·yas·man·tā·naṃ पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ अहंa·haṃ इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ पटिग्गण्हेय्यन्’ति।pa·ṭig·gaṇ·hey·yan

Yadāyasmantānaṁ pattakallaṁ, ahaṁ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno āpattiṁ paṭiggaṇheyyan’ti.

If the venerables are ready, I will receive the confession of monk so-and-so.’
1394

तेनte·na वत्तब्बो—vat·tab·bo

Tena vattabbo—

And he should say:
1395

‘पस्ससी’ति?pas·sa·sī

‘passasī’ti?

‘Do you recognize it?’ —
1396

‘आमā·ma पस्सामी’ति।pas·sā·mī

‘Āma passāmī’ti.

‘Yes, I recognize it.’ —
1397

‘आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ संवरेय्यासी’ति।saṃ·va·rey·yā·sī

‘Āyatiṁ saṁvareyyāsī’ti.

‘You should restrain yourself in the future.’
1398

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

This is called the resolution of a legal issue.
1399

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
1400

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca पटिञ्ञातकरणेनpa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇe·na च।ca

Sammukhāvinayena ca, paṭiññātakaraṇena ca.

It’s been resolved face-to-face and by acting according to what’s been admitted.
1401

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
1402

धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता,vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā पुग्गलसम्मुखताpug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā …पे…pe

Dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā …pe…

Face-to-face with the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Teaching and the Monastic Law: the Teaching, the Monastic Law, the Teacher’s instruction—that by which that legal issue is resolved.
1403

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता?pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

kā ca tattha puggalasammukhatā?

This is the meaning of face-to-face with the persons concerned:
1404

योyo चca देसेति,de·se·ti यस्सyas·sa चca देसेति,de·se·ti उभोu·bho सम्मुखीभूताsam·mu·khī·bhū·tā होन्ति—hon·ti

Yo ca deseti, yassa ca deseti, ubho sammukhībhūtā honti—

both the one who confesses and the one he confesses to are present.
1405

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता।pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha puggalasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
1406

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha पटिञ्ञातकरणस्मिं?pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha paṭiññātakaraṇasmiṁ?

This is the meaning of acting according to what’s been admitted:
1407

याyā पटिञ्ञातकरणस्सpa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇas·sa कम्मस्सkam·mas·sa किरियाki·ri·yā करणंka·ra·ṇaṃ उपगमनंu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अज्झुपगमनंaj·jhu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अधिवासनाa·dhi·vā·sa·nā अप्पटिक्कोसना—ap·pa·ṭik·ko·sa·nā

Yā paṭiññātakaraṇassa kammassa kiriyā karaṇaṁ upagamanaṁ ajjhupagamanaṁ adhivāsanā appaṭikkosanā—

the doing of, the performing of, the participation in, the consent to, the agreement to, the non-objection to that legal procedure of acting according to what’s been admitted.
1408

इदंi·daṃ तत्थtat·tha पटिञ्ञातकरणस्मिं।pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇas·miṃ

idaṁ tattha paṭiññātakaraṇasmiṁ.

(Pāli only)
1409

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ पटिग्गाहकोpa·ṭig·gā·ha·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं।pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

Evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ paṭiggāhako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ.

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if the receiver of the confession reopens it, he commits an offense entailing confession for the reopening.
1410

एवञ्चेतंe·vañ·ce·taṃ लभेथ,la·bhe·tha इच्चेतंic·ce·taṃ कुसलं।ku·sa·laṃ

Evañcetaṁ labhetha, iccetaṁ kusalaṁ.

If this is what happens, all’s well.
1411

नोno चेce लभेथ,la·bhe·tha तेन,te·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā सङ्घंsaṅ·ghaṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एकंसंe·kaṃ·saṃ उत्तरासङ्गंut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā वुड्ढानंvuḍ·ḍhā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ पादेpā·de वन्दित्वाvan·dit·vā उक्कुटिकंuk·ku·ṭi·kaṃ निसीदित्वाni·sī·dit·vā अञ्जलिंañ·ja·liṃ पग्गहेत्वाpag·ga·het·vā एवमस्सe·va·mas·sa वचनीयो—va·ca·nī·yo

No ce labhetha, tena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā saṅghaṁ upasaṅkamitvā ekaṁsaṁ uttarāsaṅgaṁ karitvā vuḍḍhānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ pāde vanditvā ukkuṭikaṁ nisīditvā añjaliṁ paggahetvā evamassa vacanīyo—

If not, that monk should approach the Sangha, arrange his upper robe over one shoulder, pay respect at the feet of the senior monks, squat on his heels, raise his joined palms, and say,
1412

‘अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te इत्थन्नामंit·than·nā·maṃ आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ आपन्नो;ā·pan·no

‘ahaṁ, bhante, itthannāmaṁ āpattiṁ āpanno;

‘Venerables, I’ve committed such-and-such an offense.
1413

तंtaṃ पटिदेसेमी’ति।pa·ṭi·de·se·mī

taṁ paṭidesemī’ti.

I confess it.’
1414

ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:
1415

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1416

अयंa·yaṃ इत्थन्नामोit·than·nā·mo भिक्खुbhik·khu आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ सरति,sa·ra·ti विवरति,vi·va·ra·ti उत्तानिंut·tā·niṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti देसेति।de·se·ti

Ayaṁ itthannāmo bhikkhu āpattiṁ sarati, vivarati, uttāniṁ karoti, deseti.

The monk so-and-so remembers an offense—he reveals it, makes it plain, and confesses it.
1417

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ अहंa·haṃ इत्थन्नामस्सit·than·nā·mas·sa भिक्खुनोbhik·khu·no आपत्तिंā·pat·tiṃ पटिग्गण्हेय्यन्’ति।pa·ṭig·gaṇ·hey·yan

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, ahaṁ itthannāmassa bhikkhuno āpattiṁ paṭiggaṇheyyan’ti.

If the Sangha is ready, I will receive the confession of monk so-and-so.’
1418

तेनte·na वत्तब्बो—vat·tab·bo

Tena vattabbo—

And he should say:
1419

‘पस्ससी’ति?pas·sa·sī

‘passasī’ti?

‘Do you recognize it?’ —
1420

‘आमā·ma पस्सामी’ति।pas·sā·mī

‘Āma passāmī’ti.

‘Yes, I recognize it.’ —
1421

‘आयतिंā·ya·tiṃ संवरेय्यासी’ति।saṃ·va·rey·yā·sī

‘Āyatiṁ saṁvareyyāsī’ti.

‘You should restrain yourself in the future.’
1422

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

This is called the resolution of a legal issue.
1423

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
1424

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca पटिञ्ञातकरणेनpa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇe·na च।ca

Sammukhāvinayena ca, paṭiññātakaraṇena ca.

It’s been resolved face-to-face and by acting according to what’s been admitted.
1425

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
1426

सङ्घसम्मुखता,saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता,vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā पुग्गलसम्मुखताpug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā …पे…pe

Saṅghasammukhatā, dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā …pe…

Face-to-face with the Sangha, the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Sangha: the monks who should be present have arrived, consent has been brought for those who are eligible to give their consent, and no one present objects to the decision. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Teaching and the Monastic Law: the Teaching, the Monastic Law, the Teacher’s instruction—that by which that legal issue is resolved. This is the meaning of face-to-face with the persons concerned: both the one who confesses and the one he confesses to are present. This is the meaning of acting according to what’s been admitted: the doing of, the performing of, the participation in, the consent to, the agreement to, the non-objection to that legal procedure of acting according to what’s been admitted.
1427

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ पटिग्गाहकोpa·ṭig·gā·ha·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं;pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ paṭiggāhako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ;

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if the receiver of the confession reopens it, he commits an offense entailing confession for the reopening.
1428

छन्ददायकोchan·da·dā·ya·ko खीयति,khī·ya·ti खीयनकंkhī·ya·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं।pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

chandadāyako khīyati, khīyanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ.

If anyone who gave their consent criticizes the resolution, they commit an offense entailing confession.”
1429

9।9। तिणवत्थारकti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ka

9.9. Tiṇavatthāraka

Covering over as if with grass
1430

सियाsi·yā आपत्ताधिकरणंā·pat·tā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ एकंe·kaṃ समथंsa·ma·thaṃ अनागम्म—a·nā·gam·ma

Siyā āpattādhikaraṇaṁ ekaṁ samathaṁ anāgamma—

“Is it possible that a legal issue arising from an offense should be settled
1431

पटिञ्ञातकरणं,pa·ṭiñ·ñā·ta·ka·ra·ṇaṃ द्वीहिdvī·hi समथेहिsa·ma·the·hi सम्मेय्य—sam·mey·ya

paṭiññātakaraṇaṁ, dvīhi samathehi sammeyya—

not by acting according to what’s been admitted,
1432

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na चाति?cā·ti

sammukhāvinayena ca, tiṇavatthārakena cāti?

but by resolution face-to-face and by covering over as if with grass?
1433

सियातिस्सsi·yā·tis·sa वचनीयं।va·ca·nī·yaṃ

Siyātissa vacanīyaṁ.

It is.
1434

यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय?vi·ya

Yathā kathaṁ viya?

How?
1435

इधi·dha पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ होतिho·ti भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Idha pana, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ hoti bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

It may be that monks who are arguing and disputing do and say many things unworthy of monastics.
1436

तत्रtat·ra चेce भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ एवंe·vaṃ होति—ho·ti

Tatra ce bhikkhūnaṁ evaṁ hoti—

If they consider this and think,
1437

‘अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ खोkho भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

‘amhākaṁ kho bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

(Pāli only)
1438

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्या’ति।saṃ·vat·tey·yā

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyyā’ti.

‘If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism,’
1439

अनुजानामि,a·nu·jā·nā·mi भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na वूपसमेतुं।vū·pa·sa·me·tuṃ

Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, evarūpaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ tiṇavatthārakena vūpasametuṁ.

then I allow you to resolve that legal issue by covering over as if with grass.
1440

एवञ्चe·vañ·ca पन,pa·na भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve वूपसमेतब्बं।vū·pa·sa·me·tab·baṃ

Evañca pana, bhikkhave, vūpasametabbaṁ.

And it should be resolved like this.
1441

सब्बेहेवsab·be·he·va एकज्झंe·kaj·jhaṃ सन्निपतितब्बं,san·ni·pa·ti·tab·baṃ सन्निपतित्वाsan·ni·pa·tit·vā ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Sabbeheva ekajjhaṁ sannipatitabbaṁ, sannipatitvā byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

Everyone should gather in one place. A competent and capable monk should then inform the Sangha:
1442

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1443

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics.
1444

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्य।saṃ·vat·tey·ya

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyya.

If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism.
1445

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ सङ्घोsaṅ·gho इमंi·maṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na वूपसमेय्य,vū·pa·sa·mey·ya ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तन्ति।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·tan·ti

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, saṅgho imaṁ adhikaraṇaṁ tiṇavatthārakena vūpasameyya, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttanti.

If the Sangha is ready, it should resolve this legal issue by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.’
1446

एकतोपक्खिकानंe·ka·to·pak·khi·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सकोsa·ko पक्खोpak·kho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena sako pakkho ñāpetabbo—

The monks belonging to one side should then be informed by a competent and capable monk belonging to their own side:
1447

सुणन्तुsu·ṇan·tu मेme आयस्मन्ता।ā·yas·man·tā

Suṇantu me āyasmantā.

‘Please, venerables, I ask you to listen.
1448

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics.
1449

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्य।saṃ·vat·tey·ya

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyya.

If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism.
1450

यदायस्मन्तानंya·dā·yas·man·tā·naṃ पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ अहंa·haṃ याyā चेवce·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti याyā चca अत्तनोat·ta·no आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti आयस्मन्तानञ्चेवā·yas·man·tā·nañ·ce·va अत्थाय,at·thā·ya अत्तनोat·ta·no चca अत्थाय,at·thā·ya सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na देसेय्यं,de·sey·yaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तन्’ति।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·tan

Yadāyasmantānaṁ pattakallaṁ, ahaṁ yā ceva āyasmantānaṁ āpatti, yā ca attano āpatti, āyasmantānañceva atthāya, attano ca atthāya, saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena deseyyaṁ, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttan’ti.

If the venerables are ready, then, for your benefit and for my own, I will confess in the midst of the Sangha both your and my own offenses by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.’
1451

अथापरेसंa·thā·pa·re·saṃ एकतोपक्खिकानंe·ka·to·pak·khi·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सकोsa·ko पक्खोpak·kho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Athāparesaṁ ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena sako pakkho ñāpetabbo—

And the monks belonging to the other side should be informed by a competent and capable monk belonging to their own side:
1452

‘सुणन्तुsu·ṇan·tu मेme आयस्मन्ता।ā·yas·man·tā

‘Suṇantu me āyasmantā.

‘Please, venerables, I ask you to listen.
1453

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics.
1454

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्य।saṃ·vat·tey·ya

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyya.

If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism.
1455

यदायस्मन्तानंya·dā·yas·man·tā·naṃ पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ अहंa·haṃ याyā चेवce·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti याyā चca अत्तनोat·ta·no आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti आयस्मन्तानञ्चेवā·yas·man·tā·nañ·ce·va अत्थाय,at·thā·ya अत्तनोat·ta·no चca अत्थाय,at·thā·ya सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na देसेय्यं,de·sey·yaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तन्’ति।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·tan

Yadāyasmantānaṁ pattakallaṁ, ahaṁ yā ceva āyasmantānaṁ āpatti, yā ca attano āpatti, āyasmantānañceva atthāya, attano ca atthāya, saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena deseyyaṁ, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttan’ti.

If the venerables are ready, then, for your benefit and for my own, I will confess in the midst of the Sangha both your and my own offenses by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.’
1456

अथापरेसंa·thā·pa·re·saṃ एकतोपक्खिकानंe·ka·to·pak·khi·kā·naṃ भिक्खूनंbhik·khū·naṃ ब्यत्तेनbyat·te·na भिक्खुनाbhik·khu·nā पटिबलेनpa·ṭi·ba·le·na सङ्घोsaṅ·gho ञापेतब्बो—ñā·pe·tab·bo

Athāparesaṁ ekatopakkhikānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena saṅgho ñāpetabbo—

A competent and capable monk belonging to one side should then inform the Sangha:
1457

‘सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1458

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics.
1459

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्य।saṃ·vat·tey·ya

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyya.

If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism.
1460

यदिya·di सङ्घस्सsaṅ·ghas·sa पत्तकल्लं,pat·ta·kal·laṃ अहंa·haṃ याyā चेवce·va इमेसंi·me·saṃ आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti याyā चca अत्तनोat·ta·no आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti इमेसञ्चेवi·me·sañ·ce·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ अत्थाय,at·thā·ya अत्तनोat·ta·no चca अत्थाय,at·thā·ya सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na देसेय्यं,de·sey·yaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तं।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·taṃ

Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṁ, ahaṁ yā ceva imesaṁ āyasmantānaṁ āpatti, yā ca attano āpatti, imesañceva āyasmantānaṁ atthāya, attano ca atthāya, saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena deseyyaṁ, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttaṁ.

If the Sangha is ready, then, for the benefit of these venerables and myself, I will confess in the midst of the Sangha both their and my own offenses by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.
1461

एसाe·sā ञत्ति।ñat·ti

Esā ñatti.

This is the motion.
1462

सुणातुsu·ṇā·tu मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te सङ्घो।saṅ·gho

Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho.

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen.
1463

अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ भण्डनजातानंbhaṇ·ḍa·na·jā·tā·naṃ कलहजातानंka·la·ha·jā·tā·naṃ विवादापन्नानंvi·vā·dā·pan·nā·naṃ विहरतंvi·ha·ra·taṃ बहुंba·huṃ अस्सामणकंas·sā·ma·ṇa·kaṃ अज्झाचिण्णंaj·jhā·ciṇ·ṇaṃ भासितपरिक्कन्तं।bhā·si·ta·pa·rik·kan·taṃ

Amhākaṁ bhaṇḍanajātānaṁ kalahajātānaṁ vivādāpannānaṁ viharataṁ bahuṁ assāmaṇakaṁ ajjhāciṇṇaṁ bhāsitaparikkantaṁ.

While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics.
1464

सचेsa·ce मयंma·yaṃ इमाहिi·mā·hi आपत्तीहिā·pat·tī·hi अञ्ञमञ्ञंañ·ña·mañ·ñaṃ कारेस्साम,kā·res·sā·ma सियापिsi·yā·pi तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कक्खळत्तायkak·kha·ḷat·tā·ya वाळत्तायvā·ḷat·tā·ya भेदायbhe·dā·ya संवत्तेय्य।saṃ·vat·tey·ya

Sace mayaṁ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṁ kāressāma, siyāpi taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ kakkhaḷattāya vāḷattāya bhedāya saṁvatteyya.

If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism.
1465

अहंa·haṃ याyā चेवce·va इमेसंi·me·saṃ आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti याyā चca अत्तनोat·ta·no आपत्ति,ā·pat·ti इमेसञ्चेवi·me·sañ·ce·va आयस्मन्तानंā·yas·man·tā·naṃ अत्थाय,at·thā·ya अत्तनोat·ta·no चca अत्थाय,at·thā·ya सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na देसेमि,de·se·mi ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तं।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·taṃ

Ahaṁ yā ceva imesaṁ āyasmantānaṁ āpatti, yā ca attano āpatti, imesañceva āyasmantānaṁ atthāya, attano ca atthāya, saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena desemi, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttaṁ.

For the benefit of these venerables and myself, I confess in the midst of the Sangha both their and my own offenses by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.
1466

यस्सायस्मतोyas·sā·yas·ma·to खमतिkha·ma·ti अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ इमासंi·mā·saṃ आपत्तीनंā·pat·tī·naṃ सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na देसना,de·sa·nā ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तं,gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·taṃ सोso तुण्हस्स;tuṇ·has·sa

Yassāyasmato khamati amhākaṁ imāsaṁ āpattīnaṁ saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena desanā, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttaṁ, so tuṇhassa;

Any monk who approves of confessing our offenses in the midst of the Sangha by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders, should remain silent.
1467

यस्सyas·sa नक्खमति,nak·kha·ma·ti सोso भासेय्य।bhā·sey·ya

yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.

Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
1468

देसिताde·si·tā अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ इमाi·mā आपत्तियोā·pat·ti·yo सङ्घमज्झेsaṅ·gha·maj·jhe तिणवत्थारकेन,ti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā थुल्लवज्जं,thul·la·vaj·jaṃ ठपेत्वाṭha·pet·vā गिहिप्पटिसंयुत्तं।gi·hip·pa·ṭi·saṃ·yut·taṃ

Desitā amhākaṁ imā āpattiyo saṅghamajjhe tiṇavatthārakena, ṭhapetvā thullavajjaṁ, ṭhapetvā gihippaṭisaṁyuttaṁ.

We have confessed our offenses in the midst of the Sangha by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders.
1469

खमतिkha·ma·ti सङ्घस्स,saṅ·ghas·sa तस्माtas·mā तुण्ही,tuṇ·hī एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

Khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

The Sangha approves and is therefore silent. I will remember it thus.’
1470

अथापरेसंa·thā·pa·re·saṃ …पे…pe

Athāparesaṁ …pe…

A competent and capable monk belonging to the other side should inform the Sangha:
1471

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen. While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics. If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism. If the Sangha is ready, then for the benefit of these venerables and myself, I’ll confess in the midst of the Sangha both their and my own offenses by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders. This is the motion.
1472

‘Please, venerables, I ask the Sangha to listen. While we were arguing and disputing, we did and said many things unworthy of monastics. If we deal with one another for these offenses, this legal issue might lead to harshness, nastiness, and schism. For the benefit of these venerables and myself, I confess in the midst of the Sangha both their and my own offenses by covering over, as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders. Any monk who approves of confessing our offenses in the midst of the Sangha by covering over as if with grass should remain silent. Any monk who doesn’t approve should speak up.
1473

We have confessed our offenses in the midst of the Sangha by covering over as if with grass, except for heavy offenses and offenses connected with householders. The Sangha approves and is therefore silent.
1474

एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ धारयामी’ति।dhā·ra·yā·mī

evametaṁ dhārayāmī’ti.

I will remember it thus.’
1475

इदंi·daṃ वुच्चति,vuc·ca·ti भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसन्तं।vū·pa·san·taṃ

Idaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasantaṁ.

This is called the resolution of a legal issue.
1476

केनke·na वूपसन्तं?vū·pa·san·taṃ

Kena vūpasantaṁ?

(Pāli only)
1477

सम्मुखाविनयेनsam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·na च,ca तिणवत्थारकेनti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·ke·na च।ca

Sammukhāvinayena ca, tiṇavatthārakena ca.

It’s been resolved face-to-face and by covering over as if with grass.
1478

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha सम्मुखाविनयस्मिं?sam·mu·khā·vi·na·yas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha sammukhāvinayasmiṁ?

Face-to-face with what?
1479

सङ्घसम्मुखता,saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता,vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā पुग्गलसम्मुखता।pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

Saṅghasammukhatā, dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā, puggalasammukhatā.

Face-to-face with the Sangha, the Teaching, the Monastic Law, and the persons concerned.
1480

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha सङ्घसम्मुखता?saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā

Kā ca tattha saṅghasammukhatā?

This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Sangha:
1481

यावतिकाyā·va·ti·kā भिक्खूbhik·khū कम्मप्पत्ता,kam·map·pat·tā तेte आगताā·ga·tā होन्ति,hon·ti छन्दारहानंchan·dā·ra·hā·naṃ छन्दोchan·do आहटोā·ha·ṭo होति,ho·ti सम्मुखीभूताsam·mu·khī·bhū·tā नna पटिक्कोसन्ति—pa·ṭik·ko·san·ti

Yāvatikā bhikkhū kammappattā, te āgatā honti, chandārahānaṁ chando āhaṭo hoti, sammukhībhūtā na paṭikkosanti—

the monks who should be present have arrived, consent has been brought for those who are eligible to give their consent, and no one present objects to the decision.
1482

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha सङ्घसम्मुखता।saṅ·gha·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha saṅghasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
1483

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता?vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā

Kā ca tattha dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā?

This is the meaning of face-to-face with the Teaching and the Monastic Law:
1484

येनye·na धम्मेनdham·me·na येनye·na विनयेनvi·na·ye·na येनye·na सत्थुसासनेनsat·thu·sā·sa·ne·na तंtaṃ अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ वूपसम्मति—vū·pa·sam·ma·ti

Yena dhammena yena vinayena yena satthusāsanena taṁ adhikaraṇaṁ vūpasammati—

the Teaching, the Monastic Law, the Teacher’s instruction—that by which that legal issue is resolved.
1485

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha धम्मसम्मुखता,dham·ma·sam·mu·kha·tā विनयसम्मुखता।vi·na·ya·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha dhammasammukhatā, vinayasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
1486

काkā चca तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता?pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

Kā ca tattha puggalasammukhatā?

This is the meaning of face-to-face with the persons concerned:
1487

योyo चca देसेति,de·se·ti यस्सyas·sa चca देसेति,de·se·ti उभोu·bho सम्मुखीभूताsam·mu·khī·bhū·tā होन्ति—hon·ti

Yo ca deseti, yassa ca deseti, ubho sammukhībhūtā honti—

both the one who confesses and the one he confesses to are present.
1488

अयंa·yaṃ तत्थtat·tha पुग्गलसम्मुखता।pug·ga·la·sam·mu·kha·tā

ayaṁ tattha puggalasammukhatā.

(Pāli only)
1489

किञ्चkiñ·ca तत्थtat·tha तिणवत्थारकस्मिं?ti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·kas·miṃ

Kiñca tattha tiṇavatthārakasmiṁ?

This is the meaning of covering over as if with grass:
1490

याyā तिणवत्थारकस्सti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·kas·sa कम्मस्सkam·mas·sa किरियाki·ri·yā करणंka·ra·ṇaṃ उपगमनंu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अज्झुपगमनंaj·jhu·pa·ga·ma·naṃ अधिवासनाa·dhi·vā·sa·nā अप्पटिक्कोसना—ap·pa·ṭik·ko·sa·nā

Yā tiṇavatthārakassa kammassa kiriyā karaṇaṁ upagamanaṁ ajjhupagamanaṁ adhivāsanā appaṭikkosanā—

the doing of, the performing of, the participation in, the consent to, the agreement to, the non-objection to that legal procedure of covering over as if with grass.
1491

इदंi·daṃ तत्थtat·tha तिणवत्थारकस्मिं।ti·ṇa·vat·thā·ra·kas·miṃ

idaṁ tattha tiṇavatthārakasmiṁ.

(Pāli only)
1492

एवंe·vaṃ वूपसन्तञ्चे,vū·pa·san·tañ·ce भिक्खवे,bhik·kha·ve अधिकरणंa·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ पटिग्गाहकोpa·ṭig·gā·ha·ko उक्कोटेति,uk·ko·ṭe·ti उक्कोटनकंuk·ko·ṭa·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं;pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

Evaṁ vūpasantañce, bhikkhave, adhikaraṇaṁ paṭiggāhako ukkoṭeti, ukkoṭanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ;

When a legal issue has been resolved like this, if a receiver of the confession reopens it, he commits an offense entailing confession for the reopening.
1493

छन्ददायकोchan·da·dā·ya·ko खीयति,khī·ya·ti खीयनकंkhī·ya·na·kaṃ पाचित्तियं।pā·cit·ti·yaṃ

chandadāyako khīyati, khīyanakaṁ pācittiyaṁ.

If anyone who gave their consent criticizes the resolution, they commit an offense entailing confession.
1494

किच्चाधिकरणंkic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ कतिहिka·ti·hi समथेहिsa·ma·the·hi सम्मति?sam·ma·ti

Kiccādhikaraṇaṁ katihi samathehi sammati?

(Pāli only)
1495

किच्चाधिकरणंkic·cā·dhi·ka·ra·ṇaṃ एकेनe·ke·na समथेनsa·ma·the·na सम्मति—sam·ma·ti

Kiccādhikaraṇaṁ ekena samathena sammati—

There’s one principle for settling a legal issue arising from business:
1496

सम्मुखाविनयेना”ति।sam·mu·khā·vi·na·ye·nā

sammukhāvinayenā”ti.

by resolution face-to-face.”
1497

समथक्खन्धकोsa·ma·thak·khan·dha·ko निट्ठितोniṭ·ṭhi·to चतुत्थो।ca·tut·tho

Samathakkhandhako niṭṭhito catuttho.

The fourth chapter on the settling of legal issues is finished.

Sources. Sanskrit: Satyavedaḥ, the New Testament in Sanskrit (Calcutta Baptist Missionaries, 1851; J. Wenger’s revision of W. Carey’s version). Digital text © 2018 SanskritBible.in, via eBible.org, licensed CC BY-SA 4.0; changed here: arranged by verse and every word linked to the dictionary (links made automatically). Old Testament Sanskrit: the Old Testament in Sanskrit, Calcutta Baptist Mission Press, 1848–1852 (public domain), read by OCR from the Internet Archive scans of the Boston University School of Theology copy; unproofread, with machine clean-up only. Pāli Canon: Mahāsaṅgīti Tipiṭaka Buddhavasse 2500 (based on the Vipassana Research Institute’s Chaṭṭha Saṅgāyana edition), from SuttaCentral bilara-data, CC0; Devanagari and pronunciation made automatically from the Roman text. Pāli English: Bhikkhu Sujato (suttas) and Bhikkhu Brahmali (Vinaya), SuttaCentral, CC0. Pāli word meanings: the Pali Text Society’s Pali-English Dictionary (Rhys Davids & Stede), corrected reprint © The Pali Text Society, CC BY-NC 3.0, digital text from BuddhaDust; word matching automatic. English: King James Version (1769), public domain; words the translators added are in italics. Word meanings and pronunciations: Monier-Williams, Sanskrit–English Dictionary (1872), via this site’s Sanskrit dictionary (CC BY-SA 4.0); English↔Sanskrit word matches made automatically and may need checking.